AMP Characterization Manual

10 Series CNC AMP
Software Characterization Manual
Code: 45006667V Rev. 18
PUBLICATION ISSUED BY:

PRIMA ELECTRO S.p.A. Strada Carignano, 48/2 - 10024 Moncalieri (TO) (Italy) Tel. Web: +39-011 9899800 www.osai.it; www.primaelectro.com
e-mail: it.sales@primaelectro.com . Copyright 2011 by PRIMA ELECTRO All rights reserved Edition: September 2011
IMPORTANT USER INFORMATION

This document has been prepared in order to be used by PRIMA ELECTRO . It describes the latest release of the product. PRIMA ELECTRO reserves the right to modify and improve the product described by this document at any time and without prior notice. Actual application of this product is up to the user. In no event will PRIMA ELECTRO be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages that may result from installation or use of the equipment described in this text.
abc
UPDATING 10 Series CNC - AMP Software Characterization Manual
UPDATES FOR THE PRESENT RELEASE General

This publication has been issued following the Software Release 8.0. This page lists the modifications made to the manual in this version. PAGE INDEX CHAP 3 Page 2 Page 3 Page 4 Page 22 Page 33 CHAP 4 Page 10 Page 15 CHAP 5 Page 20 Page 31 UPDATE TYPE Updated Modified codes 11 and 12 Modified codes 32 and 37 Changed description Modified AUXILAIRY AXIS CHARACTERIZATION table Added the Null-motion threshold parameter
Modified PROCESS VARIABLES table Added parameters CRV, ERF, MOM, MOA and Toll contact mode
Modified AUXILAIRY AXIS CHARACTERIZATION table Added the Null-motion threshold parameter
10 Series CNC - AMP Software Characterization Manual
Preface 10 Series CNC - AMP Software Characterization Manual
PREFACE
This manual describes the characterization phase of the 10 Series CNC system through use of the AMP (Adjustable Machine Parameters) and Servo Monitor utilities. AMP allows the operator to enter all the necessary parameters and information to configure the system and the various machining processes. The Servo Monitor allows the operator to perform a tuning of the system in order to achieve optimum performance. The manual is intended for the operator that has in charge the system characterization after installation.
REFERENCES
Read first: 10 Series CNC : Product Specification For further information: 10 Series CNC : User Guide 10 Series CNC : Programmer Guide
SUMMARY
In this guide the operator will find a short description of all the configuration parameters as well as the procedures for defining them. 1. General Concepts Contains a description of the numerical control terms used within the manual. 2. AMP Provides a general description of the AMP configuration procedures. 3. Global Parameters Configuration Describes the data entries used for configuring the global parameters. 4. Process Configuration Describes the data entries used for configuring the processes. 5. Axis Configuration Describes the data entries used for configuring the axes. 6. Human Interface Configuration Describes the data entries used for configuring the human interface. 7. THE SERVO MONITOR Describes the Servo Monitor Utility. 8. DSI SERVICE CHANNEL Describes the DSI Service Channel Utility. 9. MECHATROLINK DIGITAL DRIVES CONFIGURATION UTILITY Describes the Mechatrolink digital drives configuration utility. 10. EMERGENCY DIAGNOSTIC Describes the Emergency Diagnostic Utility. A. AMP - Error Messages Contains the list of error messages completes this guide. B. Generation of Help Files for OEM Softkeys Contains instructions to generate help files for OEM defined softkeys. C. Axis calibration from file Contains instructions to introduce calibration points of an axis.
TERMINOLOGY
Some terms appearing throughout the manual are explained below. Control Refers to the 10 Series CNC numerical control unit comprising front panel unit and basic unit. Is the interface module between machine and operator; it has a monitor on which messages are output and a keyboard to input the data. It is connected to the basic unit. Is the hardware-software unit handling all the machine functions. It is connected to the front panel and to the machine tool.
Front Panel
Basic Unit
Is connected to developments or circumstances which can make damages to the system, to the equipments or to the operators.
Is connected to the information that it is necessary take in consideration in order to avoid damages to the equipment in general.
Is connected to the operations that it is necessary to execute carefully in order to assure the full success of the application.
END OF PREFACE
Index 10 Series - AMP CNC Software Characterization Manual
INDEX
GENERAL CONCEPTS ................................................................... 1-1

SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE ........................................................................................ 1-1 CLASSIFICATION OF THE MACHINE AXES ........................................................... 1-3 SERVO LOOP ............................................................................................................ 1-4 Position tolerance ............................................................................................. 1-5 Dead zone ......................................................................................................... 1-6 Travel limits ....................................................................................................... 1-6 Homing cycle .................................................................................................... 1-7 Manual/automatic switch search ....................................................................... 1-9 Miscellaneous axis parameters ........................................................................ 1-10 Operating limits ................................................................................................. 1-12 Measuring cycle ................................................................................................ 1-12 Coordinate display modes ................................................................................ 1-12 SPLIT AXES ............................................................................................................... 1-13 DUAL AXES ................................................................................................................ 1-15 AXES WITH ROLLOVER ........................................................................................... 1-16 DIAMETER AXES ....................................................................................................... 1-17 AUXILIARY AXES ...................................................................................................... 1-18 SPINDLE AXIS ........................................................................................................... 1-19 Spindle axis with gears ..................................................................................... 1-19 Spindle axis ramp ............................................................................................. 1-20 Spindle with trasducer ....................................................................................... 1-21 Spindle orientation ............................................................................................ 1-21 Spindle properties ............................................................................................. 1-22 HANDWHEEL ............................................................................................................. 1-24 PART PROGRAM-LOGIC INTERFACE .................................................................... 1-25 Synchronous mode ........................................................................................... 1-25 Asynchronous mode ......................................................................................... 1-25 Language expansion......................................................................................... 1-25 PSEUDO AXES .......................................................................................................... 1-26 VIRTUAL AXES .......................................................................................................... 1-26 USER INTERFACE ..................................................................................................... 1-26 Logic display ..................................................................................................... 1-26 OEM softkey ..................................................................................................... 1-26 VARIABLE SERVO ERROR ...................................................................................... 1-27 RIGID TAPPING PARAMETER CALCULATIONS .................................................... 1-30
Index 10 Series CNC - AMP Software Characterization Manual
AMP .................................................................................................2-1
SOFTKEY.................................................................................................................... 2-1 AMP main menu ................................................................................................ 2-2 Help ................................................................................................................... 2-3 Activate.............................................................................................................. 2-4 Select ................................................................................................................ 2-4 Characterization menu softkeys ........................................................................ 2-5 Operativity notes ............................................................................................... 2-7 Data Entry Storage ............................................................................................ 2-7 ENTER/EXIT THE CHARACTERIZATION ................................................................. 2-8 Edit Comment ................................................................................................... 2-10 Backup .............................................................................................................. 2-10 Delete ................................................................................................................ 2-11 Print ................................................................................................................... 2-11 AMP print utility error messages ....................................................................... 2-18
GLOBAL PARAMETERS CONFIGURATION ..................................3-1

HARDWARE 10/110 AND 10/510 SYSTEM .............................................................. 3-2 HARDWARE (10/565 AND 10/585 SYSTEMS) .......................................................... 3-7 GENERAL INFORMATION ......................................................................................... 3-10 LOGIC CONFIGURATION .......................................................................................... 3-12 Short Variables .................................................................................................. 3-14 Double Variables ............................................................................................... 3-16 Auxiliary Axis General Information .................................................................... 3-18 Select Auxiliary .................................................................................................. 3-20 Auxiliary Axis Characterization ........................................................................ 3-21 Notes on characterization of D.S.I digital drivers .............................................. 3-37 Notes on the characterization of OS-Wire digital drivers .................................. 3-38 Notes on the characterisation of Mechatrolink digital drives ............................. 3-38 Physical Conn ................................................................................................... 3-39 Axis Calibration ................................................................................................. 3-41 OPTIONS .................................................................................................................... 3-43 DOS Real-time .................................................................................................. 3-44 END User Dos ................................................................................................... 3-45 DOS Graphics ................................................................................................... 3-46
PROCESS CONFIGURATION .........................................................4-1

SELECT PROCESS .................................................................................................... 4-2 PROCESS CONFIG .................................................................................................... 4-3 Proc Char .......................................................................................................... 4-3 Proc Variables ................................................................................................... 4-9 Progr Char ......................................................................................................... 4-18 M Codes ............................................................................................................ 4-21 G Codes ............................................................................................................ 4-25 GTL (Geometrical Technological Language) ................................................... 4-28 Virtual Axes ....................................................................................................... 4-30 E Parameters .................................................................................................... 4-32 User Variables ................................................................................................... 4-33
ii
AXIS CONFIGURATION.................................................................. 5-1

AXIS CONFIGURATION............................................................................................. 5-1 Axis General Information .................................................................................. 5-2 Pseudo Axes ..................................................................................................... 5-5 Spindle .............................................................................................................. 5-6 Notes on the characterization of D.S.I digital drivers ........................................ 5-15 Probing.............................................................................................................. 5-16 Select Axis ........................................................................................................ 5-18 Axis Characterization ........................................................................................ 5-19 Notes on the characterization of D.S.I. digital drivers ....................................... 5-37 Notes on the characterization of OS_wire digital drivers .................................. 5-38 Notes on the characterisation of Mechatrolink digital drives ............................. 5-38 Axis Charact (Slave axis selected with "Select Axis") ...................................... 5-39 Axis Calibration ................................................................................................. 5-40 Physical Connection ......................................................................................... 5-43
HUMAN INTERFACE CONFIGURATION ....................................... 6-1

HUMAN INTERFACE ................................................................................................. 6-1 H.I. Gen Info...................................................................................................... 6-2 Add Scr Config .................................................................................................. 6-5 Common Screen ............................................................................................... 6-6 Process Screen ................................................................................................ 6-7 Select Menu ...................................................................................................... 6-8 OEM SK Config................................................................................................. 6-10 Select DE .......................................................................................................... 6-13 DE Config.......................................................................................................... 6-15 PPDIR Config.................................................................................................... 6-18
THE SERVO MONITOR .................................................................. 7-1

USING THE SERVO MONITOR ................................................................................. 7-2 ENABLING THE SERVO MONITOR ......................................................................... 7-3 CHANGE PARAM ....................................................................................................... 7-4 Null Offset ......................................................................................................... 7-5 Tolerance .......................................................................................................... 7-6 Dead Zone ........................................................................................................ 7-8 Backlash ........................................................................................................... 7-9 KC KV VFF ....................................................................................................... 7-10 Servo Error........................................................................................................ 7-12 Feed/Acc/Jrk ..................................................................................................... 7-14 Spindle .............................................................................................................. 7-16 Operative Limits ................................................................................................ 7-19 Split Param. ...................................................................................................... 7-20 Broken wire ....................................................................................................... 7-22 Ramp Time ....................................................................................................... 7-23 CONFIGURING THE OSCILLOSCOPE ..................................................................... 7-24 Config. oscill...................................................................................................... 7-24 Feedrate on the profile ...................................................................................... 7-26 Feed calculated (single axis) ............................................................................ 7-28 Following error (single axis) .............................................................................. 7-30
iii
Feed and error on same axis ............................................................................ 7-32 CONTINUOUS MODE ................................................................................................ 7-33 TRIGGER MODE ........................................................................................................ 7-33 DATA DISPLAY MODES ............................................................................................ 7-33 ANALYZING THE DATA (EXAME)............................................................................. 7-36 Main menu and graphics ................................................................................... 7-36 Zoom ................................................................................................................. 7-37 Time Enlarge ..................................................................................................... 7-37 Dimension ......................................................................................................... 7-37 Check ................................................................................................................ 7-38 Save ASCII ........................................................................................................ 7-38 SAVING AND RESTORING DATA ............................................................................. 7-39 Save .................................................................................................................. 7-39 Restore .............................................................................................................. 7-40 ERROR MESSAGES .................................................................................................. 7-41
DSI SERVICE CHANNEL.................................................................8-1

SETUP ......................................................................................................................... 8-2 DESCRIPTION ............................................................................................................ 8-3 SAVE ALL ................................................................................................................... 8-4 Format and syntax of the configuration file ....................................................... 8-5 LOAD........................................................................................................................... 8-8 SELECT AXIS ............................................................................................................. 8-12 READ BLOCK ............................................................................................................. 8-14 WRITE DATA .............................................................................................................. 8-16 COMMAND ................................................................................................................. 8-17 SAVE AX INFO............................................................................................................ 8-18 SHOW LOAD LOG ..................................................................................................... 8-19 LOADING DSI DRIVErs PARAMETERS .................................................................... 8-20 Usage Mode ...................................................................................................... 8-20 Application notes ............................................................................................... 8-21 ERROR MESSAGES .................................................................................................. 8-22
MECHATROLINK DIGITAL DRIVES CONFIGURATION UTILITY ..9-1

INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................... 9-1 DESCRIPTION OF FUNCTIONS ................................................................................ 9-2 PRELIMINARY TECHNICAL CONSIDERATIONS ON MECHATROLINK ............ 9-2 BASICS ....................................................................................................................... 9-3 APL and ALT files.............................................................................................. 9-3 USING THE PACKAGE .............................................................................................. 9-8 Files needed ...................................................................................................... 9-8 Creating an ALT file from a Microsoft Excel file .............................................. 9-8 Creating an APL file from a Microsoft Excel file .............................................. 9-8 Automatic database creation ............................................................................. 9-9 Starting the program. ........................................................................................ 9-9 Softkey menu .................................................................................................... 9-9 Selecting an axis ............................................................................................... 9-10 Changing the parameters set ............................................................................ 9-10 Parameter reading and writing .......................................................................... 9-11 Information on the drive .................................................................................... 9-12 Saving changes ................................................................................................. 9-13
iv
Monitoring ......................................................................................................... 9-15 PARAMETER CHANGE DETAILS ............................................................................. 9-17 PARAMETER SUPERVISOR ..................................................................................... 9-18 Error codes displayed ....................................................................................... 9-19
D.S.I. SPINDLE DRIVE SETUP..................................................... 10-1

configuring the operative modes ............................................................................ 10-1 configuring the external transducer ....................................................................... 10-3 configuring the type of axis ..................................................................................... 10-4 configuring the position scale ................................................................................. 10-5 configuring additional parameters .......................................................................... 10-6
EMERGENCY DIAGNOSTIC ........................................................ 11-1

EMERGENCY START ................................................................................................ 11-1 EMERGENCY DIAGNOSTIC Screen Softkeys ................................................ 11-2 TABLE RESET UTILITY............................................................................................. 11-4 Reset DP........................................................................................................... 11-6 Select Tables .................................................................................................... 11-7 Delete Tables .................................................................................................... 11-8 Save DP (Save DUAL PORT memory request) ............................................... 11-11 Restore DP (Restore DUAL PORT memory request) ...................................... 11-15 Delete Files (Backup file procedure) ................................................................. 11-19 LANGUAGE MANAGEMENT UTILITY ...................................................................... 11-22 Activate ............................................................................................................. 11-25 Create ............................................................................................................... 11-27 Delete................................................................................................................ 11-29 Text Handler ..................................................................................................... 11-30 Text Types ........................................................................................................ 11-31 Compare ........................................................................................................... 11-33 Update .............................................................................................................. 11-35 Show diff ........................................................................................................... 11-36 Modify ............................................................................................................... 11-37 EDITOR FOR MODIFYING TEXT FILES ................................................................... 11-38 SOFTKEYS OF THE EDITOR FOR CONFIGURATION FILE MODIFICATION .......................................................................................................... 11-41 DELETE ............................................................................................................ 11-41 INSERT ............................................................................................................. 11-41 MODIFY ............................................................................................................ 11-42 SK MODIFY ...................................................................................................... 11-43 DE MODIFY ...................................................................................................... 11-45 HELP MODIFY.................................................................................................. 11-46 ERR MODIFY ................................................................................................... 11-48 ERROR ATTRIB ............................................................................................... 11-49 VIEW ................................................................................................................. 11-50 BACKUP ........................................................................................................... 11-51 RESTORE......................................................................................................... 11-52 EXIT .................................................................................................................. 11-53 OFF-LINE VERSION OF LANGUAGE UTILITY ............................................... 11-54 GENERAL EXEC FILE COMPILING UTILITY ........................................................... 11-56 DSI REBOOT CONFIGURATION .............................................................................. 11-59 CFG DSI Setup ................................................................................................. 11-60 DATA RESTORE ........................................................................................................ 11-61
ERROR MESSAGES .................................................................................................. 11-62 Reset Tables Utility ........................................................................................... 11-62 Utility Languages ............................................................................................... 11-64 Utility Compiler .................................................................................................. 11-70 Utility DSI Reboot Configuration ........................................................................ 11-72
AMP - ERROR MESSAGES ........................................................... A-1

MESSAGE DESCRIPTION AND RECOVERY ACTION ............................................ A-1
GENERATION OF HELP FILES FOR OEM SOFTKEYS ................ B-1

HELP file - menu association ............................................................................ B-1
AXIS CALIBRATION FROM FILE ................................................... C-1

GENERAL ................................................................................................................... C-1 File Format ........................................................................................................ C-2 Error conditions and messages......................................................................... C-3
END OF INDEX
vi
Chapter
GENERAL CONCEPTS
This chapter provides a glossary of the terms used in the present AMP Configuration Guide. For users who are not familiar with NC technology it may serve as an introduction to the philosophy underlying system operation. Users with extensive NC experience can use it as a source of lexical reference. Special attention has been devoted to the classification of the axes and to the description of the characteristics of the various types. Users already familiar with numeric control machines may use this chapter as a terminology reference.
SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE
The architecture of 10 Series CNC can be broken down into four partitions, each of which controls a specific set of features.
1-1
Chapter 1 General Concepts
HARD DISK UNIT OPERATOR PANEL COMMUNICATIONS OPERATING SYSTEM INTER-PROCESS COMMUNICATIONS
FLOPPY DISK UNIT
UTILITIES
CN PROCESS
I/O INTERFACE
HUMAN INTERFACE
The major function of each partition is as follows: Numerical Control Utilities I I/O Interface Human Interface Includes the part program interpreter, the axes interpolator and the process manager for machining centers. ncludes a series of text-only and graphics packages that can be used by the end user, the OEM or the technical assistance. Controls the execution of the machine tool/control interface code that has been developed by the OEM. Controls all the data input and display operations and the man/machine interface.
1-2
CLASSIFICATION OF THE MACHINE AXES

10 Series CNC can control the following types of axes: Coordinated axes These are physical axes that move in coordination with each other. Each 10 Series CNC AMP process can move 9 simultaneous axes and up to 9 coordinated axes. These are physical axes that are not requested to move in coordination with each other. This is the tool-holder spindle. 10 Series CNC can associate one spindle with each process.
Auxiliary axes
Spindle axis
The axes can also be classified according to the type of move that they must carry out: linear axis rotary axis split axis It is an axis moving on a rectilinear trajectory It is a coordinated axis programmable in degrees. It is a physical axis coupled to a pair of motors for synchronized motion. It is an axis whose moves are dependent on the moves of the master axis to which it is coupled. It is a coordinated axis that must be programmed and displayed with a 2 coefficient.
dual axis
diameter axis
They are also classified as a function of type of interface with the drive. In this manual we distinguish between analog and digital axes according to the following criteria: Analog axes The axes in this class are (coordinated, auxiliary and spindle) axes whose interface with the drive is an analog homing signal. Axes managed by boards with D/A converters and Bridge OS-Wire devices are part of this class. (Coordinated, auxiliary and spindle) axes whose interface with the drive system is a digital homing signal, and for which communications are performed through high level protocols. This class includes the OS-Wire axes connected to OS3 drives (OSAI protocol), D.S.I. (digital Standard Interface) axes and the axes with Mechatrolink interface.
Digital axes
1-3
SERVO LOOP
10 Series CNC permits to define the algorithms that are used for servo loop control of each axis. Such algorithms are based on three configurable constants, Kc, Kv and Kcs. 10 Series CNC uses these constants in the following formula: Vout = (Le * Kv + Vff) * Kc Where: Vout output voltage is the voltage output by the Digital/Analog converter is the variance between the programmed axis position requested by the control and the actual position measured by the position transducer is the position loop gain velocity feed forward is a velocity value that is proportional to the programmed axis feedrate.
Le
lagging error
Kv
servo loop gain
Vff
The units of measure for the constants are: Le [mm], Kv [1/s], Vff [mm/s] (Le * Kv + Vff) represents a velocity. Therefore, Kc is a velocity-to-voltage conversion factor . The control applies the following internal formula: Vout = Le' * K + Vff * Kc Where: Le' Vff K is the lagging error expressed in "encoder pulses" is a function of the interpolation clock is the result of multiplying Kc by Kv
K and Kc are calculated using parameters established in the system configuration. The formulas are: Kc = Vm*60 60000 8192 * * Fm Cki 10
K=
Vm*60 Pm 8192 * * * (Kv * 16.66666666...) Fm Pe 10
1-4
For the spindle, the formula is: Kcs = Where: Vm = maximum voltage Fm = maximum velocity Pm = mechanical pitch Pe = electrical pitch Cki = interpolator clock [ms] 8192 is the number of possible output levels for the D/A converter 10 is the maximum positive or negative voltage output of the D/A converter 60000 is the minute-to-millisecond conversion factor. Vm 8192 * Fm 10
Position tolerance
The position tolerance is the threshold within which the axis must position at motion end. If the axis is out of tolerance, the move is not considered terminated. When a move ends, if the position control is active, the system checks that all the axes are in the programmed position and that their lagging error (Le) is smaller than the threshold configured in the "in position band" field. To enhance the positioning accuracy, the "in position band" threshold must remain active during an interval specified in the "in position window" field. If it does not, or if the positioning error is out of tolerance after the interval specified in the "in position time-out", the system generates an emergency condition.
lagging error
in position band
in position window in position time-out
1-5
Dead zone
It is the threshold within which the D/A reference voltage output remains to zero irrespective of the position error. The dead zone must be smaller than the position tolerance.
Travel limits
Each axis moves within the limits of an operating field, which is a function of the characteristics of the machine and can be established by means of physical and/or calculation devices which protect the axis from erroneous operation or loss of control.
operating limitend of travel overtravel -
overtravel+ end of travel+ operating limit+ zero microswitch
The axis travel limits may be controlled by: positive/negative end of travel microswitches positive/negative end of travel microswitches positive/negative operating limits NOTE: In many applications zero microswitch can be coincident with end of travel.
1-6
The microswitches start operating as soon as the machine is switched on whereas the operating limits, which are based on the axes positions, start operating only after the axes have been homed. The overtravel microswitches are normally connected directly to the power circuitry of the axes. In order to enable the travel microswitches that are connected to the I/O board they must be managed by the logic. Operating limits are managed directly by the control. While the control executes a special cycle, such as tool or pallet change, the operating limits can be disabled or modified by the logic to allow displacements beyond the limits. Operating limits must be disabled/modified with standstill axes.
Homing cycle
Each time the system is switched on it is necessary to execute a homing cycle, i.e. to move the axes to the microswitch that is considered as the machine zero. The aim of this operation is to reset the internal counters that measure the axes positions. For analog axes, zero microswitches have to be managed by the foreground logic according to which signal status must be read in the appropriate bits of status words SW03 and SW04 (See PLUS APPLICATION MANUAL). This cycle is referred to as Homing cycle or Axis reference cycle."
I/O RING MODULE
optical fiber
I/O CARD
FOREGROUND
SW
Ixx
The status of signals SW3 and SW4 must be interpreted as follows: 1= microswitch released 0= microswitch closed
1-7
To invert this operation mode it is necessary to write the NOT operator in the logic equations. The homing cycle makes all the requests and signal controls that permit to refer the machine zero to the initial time. As a rule, in OS-Wire digital axes connected to OS3 OSAI drives, microswitches are connected to the drive itself. It is possible to continue using the microswitches managed by machine logic by changing their resetting mode (see below for details). A homing cycle can be broken down into four main steps: 1. Zero switch search During this step the axis makes a linear displacement in search of the zero microswitch. As the contact with the microswitch occurs, the axis decelerates until it comes to a complete stop. 2. Zero switch release n this step the axis reverts the direction of motion and moves until the zero microswitch is released. The return velocity is equal to the configured "home position feed" and cannot be altered by the "feed override". 3. Electric zero search This step starts when the microswitch is released. The system waits for the electrical zero (i.e. marker ) to be read and then stops the axis. 4. Return to electric zero After the system has acquired the coordinates in which the electrical zero was read, the axis is returned to the zero position. If at cycle start the microswitch is already closed, the system will carry out only the last three steps. If the axis is configured with an optical linear scale, the microswitch is assumed to be missing and 1only the last two steps will be carried out: in this case the electrical zero switch search speed will be the one used in manual mode. The homing cycle will be interrupted if the system is reset or put on hold. To resume the cycle a CYCLE START command must be given.
1-8
F+
" h o m e lim it s w itc h r e le a s e d " d e te c te d b y P . L .U .S . a n d n o tifie d to th e s y s te m
+ "manual" feed
" h o m e lim it s w itc h p r e s s e d " d e te c te d b y P .L .U .S . a n d n o t if ie d t o th e s y s te m
marker "home feed"
O t
AXIS HOMED w/o null offset
AXIS HOMED with null offset
"manual feed"
F-
- "manual" feed
Manual/automatic switch search

The switch search can be carried out manually or automatically. The "homing cycle type" field permits to define the switch search mode to be used in the homing cycle for each process. Manual switch search The characteristics of the manual switch search cycle to be carried out by the process axes are as follows: 1. prior to starting the cycle the operator must check that the selected direction of motion is compatible with the configured direction. 2. during the first step, i.e. while the axes are moving towards the microswitch, the operator must not release the CYCLE START pushbutton. If the command is to be sent by the logic, this means that no CYCLE STOP command must be given. 3. after the microswitch has been found the homing cycle will be completed even if the CYCLE START pushbutton is released and unless a RESET or HOLD command is given. Automatic switch search The characteristics of the automatic switch search cycle are: 1. the direction of motion is automatically selected by the control. 2. after the homing cycle has been launched, the operator can release the CYCLE START pushbutton. The cycle will be completed unless a RESET or HOLD command is given.
1-9
Miscellaneous axis parameters

10 Series CNC also allows characterization of the following axis parameters: 1. null offset 2. home position corrects the position of the zero microswitch defines a machine zero that is independent from both the physical position of the zero microswitch and the actual axes displacement.
c (machine zero) b (theoretical home switch)

a (physical home switch)
The positions shown in the figure are as follows: a) physical position of the zero microswitch b) theoretical position of the zero microswitch
home position
null offset
c) machine zero referred to the theoretical machine zero with respect to which all the other axis position parameters are defined. The examples that follow show how to use these parameters: correct microswitch position machine zero on the zero microswitch null offset = 0 home position = 0
a=b=c
absolute position transducer plane
0 0
100 100
physical home switch theoretical machine zero
1-10
microswitch position error machine zero on the microswitch

a=c
null offset = +5 home position = 0

b 0 5
100
-5 0
+105
null offset
no microswitch position error offset between machine zero and physical microswitch
a=b
null offset = 0 home position = +100
-100 0
0
100
home position
microswitch position error offset between the machine zero and the zero microswitch
a
null offset = +5 home position = +100

c
b
-100
-105 0
0 +105
null offset
physical home switch theoretical
home position
machine zero
1-11
Operating limits
The operating limits are defined with respect to the machine zero (c) in the AMP.
Measuring cycle
The coordinates read by the axes boards are referred to the machine zero (c).
Coordinate display modes

10 Series CNC permits the display of the following axis coordinates: Absolute coordinates Machine coordinates Work coordinates Distance to go Error referred to the machine zero (c) referred to the machine zero (c) and including the origins programmed coordinates difference between programmed and machine coordinates difference between interpolated and real coordinates
The example that follows illustrates an axes calibration sequence. 1. Set the "null offset" and "home position" fields in the AMP to zero. 2. Key in the corrections to the geometrical errors in the AMP. This corrections are based on the mecahnical distances to the physical microswitch. 3. Switch off and reboot the control. 4. Home the axis. 5. Move the axis to the position in which the zero microswitch should have been wired. 6. With the axis in this position read the "absolute position" coordinate. 7. Write this value in the "null offset" AMP field for the axis in object. 8. If the home position is to be established on a value other than zero, write this value in the "home position" AMP field for the axis in object. 9. Switch off and reboot the control. 10. From this point, all the machine coordinates are measured with respect to the "machine zero". 11. If necessary, define the operating limits in the AMP. These limits are always referred to the "machine zero".
1-12
SPLIT AXES
A split axis (gantry) is a physical axis coupled to a pair of motors or drives. Split axes are typical of large machines and of machines with special mechanical requirements, such as From the User's standpoint, a split axis is seen as one single axis configured as a Master.
Servo motor 1
Axis
Servo motor 2
The parameters that configure a split axis are: SKEW It is the maximum acceptable disalignment between two physical axes. Two maximum values are configured: the first one (Max Skew Error) is used both during movement for non referred axes and during the marker search; the second (Skew Error) is used for all other movements for referred axes and after the marker search. When the current skew error exceeds the configured value, an emergency condition (Skew Error) occurs. SKEW GAIN permits to specify the skew compensation value.
SKEW
When the split axis is enabled, the system calculates at each sampling the lagging errors of the master (Lem = Lagging Error Master) and the slave (Les = Lagging Error Slave). The misalignement (SKEW) can be calculated as follows:
SKEW = Lem - Les
1-13
The result of multiplying the SKEW value by the SKEW GAIN can be used for calculating new lagging errors with the folllowing formulas: Lem' = Lem + (Skew Gain * (Skew/2 ) )
Les' = Les - (Skew Gain * (Skew/2) ) If these new lagging errors are multiplied by a K constant, the resulting voltages on the D/A converter represent positive and negative skew compensations to be applied to the master and the slave. Such compensation tends to re-align the axes correctly. In case of emergencies (servo, error, skew error ...) and of all operations generating disabling and abling of a couple of split axes, it is necessary to refer the axes again in order to ensure correct application of configured null offset and home position parameters and recuperate the misalignment between the two physical axes that the activation/deactivation condition may have generated.
The figure illustrates how the wiring and/or the mechanical orientation permit to shift the counting direction of the position transducer or the rotation of the motor between the master and the slave. (T=transducer, M=motor)
MASTER T
SLAVE M T
MASTER
SLAVE
T M
1-14
DUAL AXES
Dual axes are two or more axes that follow an identical trajectory. A typical application of this feature are multiple heads and multi-spindles.
Axis 1
Servo motor 1
Servo motor 2
Axis 2
With dual axes, only the programming of the master axis is mandatory. The master-slave association must be defined by the program (refer to the UDA instruction in the Programming Guide).
1-15
AXES WITH ROLLOVER

The axes with rollover are linear or rotary axes whose position is controlled by the system within a range from zero to the value configured in the "Rollover pitch" field. The sign of the quote programmed for the axis with rollover indicates the rotation direction: positive, rotation is in a clockwise direction negative, rotation is in an anticlockwise direction. Examples:
270
180 0
359.999
90 CLOCKWISE ROTATION ANTICLOCKWISE ROTATION
1-16
DIAMETER AXES
Diameter axes are coordinated axes that must be programmed and displayed with a 2 coefficient. Example:
1-17
AUXILIARY AXES
Auxiliary axes are interpolated axes that are managed directly by the machine logic. This feature permits to control those axes that do not take part in the machining process but support auxiliary functions such as tool change chains, part change gates, etc. 10 Series CNC can control up to 32 simultaneous auxiliary axes coordinated with one another. Auxiliary axes remain independent from machining axes and work in parallel with the machine tool activities. Example:
STEP
POCKET
Step Pocket
= Distance between two pockets = Generic position of a tool in the tool magazine.
1-18
SPINDLE AXIS
The spindle axis is the axis on which the tool is mounted during the machining cycle. It may correspond to one of the machine axes.
SPINDLE
Spindle axis with gears

Gears are speed reduction devices that can be installed between the motor and the spindle. They enhance the motor performance by allowing to reach a high torque at medium and low speeds. 10 Series CNC MC can control spindles with as many as four different gears. Prior to enabling a range it is necessary to configure the corresponding conversion factor between the maximum voltage applied to the servo drive and the spindle velocity in rpm. It is also possible to configure various "servo loop gain" values for each gear used by the spindle with transducer during spindle orientation. The parameters that configure this feature are: "Voltage for max RPM gear n" "Max speed for gear n".
1-19
Spindle axis ramp

10 Series CNC permits to configure whether the converter voltage is to vary uniformly (i.e. follow a variation ramp) or make a step when the programmed rotation speed varies. In spindle drives this control is carried out by an input compensation net. By using the potentialities of the control unit and disactivating the compensation network it is possible to optimize spindle functionality, mainly for threading cycles and orienting. Examples: Spindle axis without ramp.
Vlt o
+7.5
-7.5
Spindle axis with ramp.
Vlt o
+7.5
-7.5
rt
To establish a ramp it is necessary to configure the "reversal time", i.e. the time employed by the spindle for switching from the maximum clockwise rotation speed to the maximum counter clockwise rotation speed with the gear that allows the lowest voltage/speed ratio. Such gear must also be configured. If the ramp is not configured, these parameters must nevertheless be specified because they are used during tapping and boring canned cycles.
1-20
Spindle with trasducer

The position transducer has two basic applications: 1. execution of threading and tapping cycles 2. spindle orientation to a defined position.
Spindle orientation
With 10 Series CNC spindle orientation is made possible by the $SORIENT machine logic function. To compensate the offset between the transducer electrical zero and the spindle physical zero it is possible to define an "Offset for spindle orientation" in the AMP. The orientation cycle is carried out in interpolated mode and requires definition of the following additional parameters to define the execution type. NOTE: The orientation cycle may include the search for the marker and the ensuing reset. This is always so when a channel is opened (SOPEN) or after a SRESET request, provided that the value is greater than 1879048192 transducer pulses. The marker is performed in a speed loop. Speed for Spindle Orientation This parameter defines the threshold of speed below that the control enables spindle positioning. If the orientation request is made when the spindle rotates at a higher speed, the system will take the spindle to a lower speed before enabling the positioning cycle. Acceleration for Orientation This parameter specifies the spindle acceleration during orientation. Since the gears and the loads affect the spindle response, it is advisable to assign to this parameter a value smaller than the result of the following calculation:
Vm 1 * 60 TR*0.5 where: VM TR Is the "Voltage for max RPM" defined for the gear used for setting the "Spindle reversal time". Is the "Spindle reversal time".
NOTE : Speed stop threshold , in position wait and in position window. The orientation phase in which the search for the marker takes place can be performed in two different modes depending on whether these three parameters are set on zero or on.
1-21
If any of them is zero, once the marker has been found the shift from the speed loop to the position loop takes place at once. Otherwise it is possible to have a stop phase between the speed loop (when the marker has been found) and the position loop (when the spindle begins to be positioned according to the orientation angle). This can prevent axle jolts. To this end, the three parameters in question have to be configured correctly: SPEED STOP THRESHOLD (minimum speed threshold below which the spindle is assumed to be stationary during the stop phase after the finding of the marker), IN POSITION WAIT (maximum wait time before the threshold is reached) and IN POSITION WINDOW (time base for the determination of actual spindle speed). If the timeout expires, it is assumed that the spindle has stopped and the spatial positioning stage has started (no emergency is triggered).
Spindle properties
The use of a spindle axis can be reserved for a single process, or shared by several processes, or not associated with any process. These three conditions are referred to as EXCLUSIVE, SHARED and RELEASED, respectively. Shared status makes it possible to perform machining cycles in various processes using the spindle axis in common; tapping (G84) and boring (G86), instead, are fixed cycles requiring exclusive use. By analogy, each process is associated with a specific axis status and hence cannot use the spindle in management mode, it can use it either in shared mode or in exclusive mode. At power-up, the spindle starts in a predetermined status, depending on how it has been configured in AMP. If the axis has been configured for a single process, then it will start out in EXCLUSIVE mode, or, if it has been configured for several processes, it will be SHARED. In order to obtain the latter mode, configure the axis completely in a process (field Spindle = Yes): in the other cases, the axis is declared as shared (field Spindle = Shared) with the same id.
Starting from the initial condition, for each process the status of the axis can be changed by means of the GTS triliteral (Get Spindle). Admissible spindle status transitions include: EXCLUSIVE RELEASED: EXCLUSIVE SHARED: SHARED EXCLUSIVE: the owner process using an axis in exclusive mode releases the axis the owner process using an axis in exclusive mode wants to share it a process becomes the sole owner of an axis and acquires it in exclusive mode; this transition cannot be made on an axis shared by several processes the last co-owner process releases the axis a process acquires an axis for exclusive use a process acquires an axis in shared mode
SHARED RELEASED: RELEASED EXCLUSIVE: RELEASED SHARED:
1-22
When a process acquires a new spindle, the current spindle is automatically released. If a process uses the machining cycles associated with a spindle it must always program the S function, in relation to processing needs; in other words, spindle sharing (whether through AMP or GTS) does not result in the automatic setting of actual axis status. For example, let us assume that S1000 is programmed in process 1 and the spindle is acquired by process 2, in the latter the S function continues to be set on the last value programmed for that process, and the spindle keeps revving at 1000 RPM. The management of spindle sharing by several processes is by the machine logic, which will accept or deny axis programming in a process depending on whether or not the axis is already being controlled by another. In this connection, the GTS command opens the logic filter through which the operation requested can be either confirmed or aborted (for a more detailed explanation see the PLUS and WinPLUS application manual). The filter task is not opened in the following conditions: the axis is in the required mode, the request cannot be met (for instance, if you try to obtain the exclusive use of a spindle which is being shared), or an error has occurred. If it is not enabled by the filter, the entire operation is aborted and a process error message is given out. If no errors occur and the filter enables the operation, the spindle makes the transition to the status programmed in the GTS. Notes on some logic functions. 1) The $PARK_SP function does not work on a spindle in SHARED status. 2) The $GET_SP function forces spindle status to EXCLUSIVE, i.e., reserved for exclusive use by the process specified as input to the function.
Configuring a digital spindle

In addition to the analog spindle, a D.S.I. digital spindle, mated to a Bosch-Rexroth drive, can also be configured. For the configuration in AMP, see the section on the spindle axis in chapter 5; for the application notes, see the PLUS/WinPLUS Application Manual. For the configuration of the drive, see the D.S.I. SPINDLE DRIVER SETUP section in this manual.
1-23
HANDWHEEL
The handwheel is a position transducer connected to one of the encoder inputs of the axes board. By means of the OS-Wire bus it is possible to connect the handwheel to one of the encoder inputs of a Bridge device or to the AUX FEEDBACK input of an OS3 drive. The handwheel makes it possible to move the selected axis by a quantity proportional to the angular variation of the transducer itself. To ensure maximum accuracy, it must comply with the following requirements: 1. The axis to be moved must be a configured axis. 2. The axis and the handwheel must be configured on the same board. 3. The handwheel encoder input must not be associated to any other configured axis. 4. The axis associated to the handwheel must be in idle status, i.e. it cannot be in motion. 5. If the handwheel is active it is not possible to carry out axis motion and axis enable/disable operations directly on the axis. 6. Scale factor, representing the correspondence between handwheel impulses and distance to be covered by the axis, must be chosen correctly. Scale factor in fact, must have a value sufficient to grant the axis a jumpless movement even when the handwheel is moved very fast. For ex.: if the scale factor is very high therefore, if each minimum movement of the handwheel corresponds to a great axis movement, the axis itself could not be able to execute that movement correctly.
A SERVO ERROR may be generated in this situation. Modification of the configured servo error value might be necessary in order to optimize the hamdweel's function (see "POSITION ERROR WITHOUT VFF" description in chapter 5 of this manual)
ENABLE/DISABLE of handwheel is prompted through logic functions (See PLUS Library Manual)
1-24
PART PROGRAM-LOGIC INTERFACE

The dialogue between the part program and the machine logic can be synchronous or asynchronous.
Synchronous mode
In this mode the part program makes a series of requests that must be acknowledged before execution. These functions include: motion start/end M functions spindle S functions tool T functions pseudo axes T and S follow predefined rules, whereas M functions are configurable and can be adapted to more specific requirements (refer to Chapter 4, Section "M Codes").
Asynchronous mode
This mode exploits the possibility to render a series of machine logic variables visible to the part program. In the system configuration (see Chapter 3, Section "Logic Configuration") each variable must be associated to a mnemonics (which will be used by the part program) and to an optional initialization value. These variables do not lose their contents when the system is switched off.
Language expansion
Logic global variables make it possible for the part program to acquire information that is not directly accessible. For example, the part program can learn the axis position by using an M function in order to command the PLUS logic to carry out the acquisition, write the result in a shared variable (GW or GD) and eventually authorize the part program to resume execution. M100 @ COORD_W Part program: N001 M3 X123.4 Y321.5 M100 N002 E10=@COORDINATE_W N003 Y(E10/2) The logic can use global variables also as preset values or as non-volatile memory. To render these variables inaccessible to the part program they must not be associated to a mnemonics. (M to request the position of the W axis) variable shared with PLUS
1-25
PSEUDO AXES
Pseudo axes are written in the program without being associated to actual system axes. They are used for requesting the machine logic to execute specific functions. They have the same functionality of the PRELUDE M function. Among the typical pseudo axes functions are: regulation of the water jet, management of secondary spindles, etc.
VIRTUAL AXES
They are used to define some functionalities in AMP like axes virtualization. The only parameter to be configured is the Axis ID. They don't have neither name nor characteristics.
USER INTERFACE
10 Series CNC provides a series of predefined video pages that can be enlarged to occupy the full screen or reduced to quadrants that display information about one topic. The size and contents of the video pages and the sequence in which they are displayed can be configured in the AMP (refer to the "Human Interface" chapter in this manual).
Logic display
With the $WSCREEN PLUS function it is possible to write alphanumeric and or semigraphic color characters in the display areas reserved for the machine logic. The machine logic can also be used for developing those texts that vary through system operation. The SYNOPTIC EDITOR utility, that is also available in the PLUS environment (see Plus User manual), permits the predefinition for each screen of graphics that will be loaded at system bootstrap.
OEM softkey
The dialogue between the operator and the machine can be facilitated by creating a tree of softkey menus. The meaning of each softkey is application specific and can be established by the machine logic. The softkeys are the tools that permit to give a command, i.e. enable a given machine logic area. Within each area it is therefore necessary to establish the procedures for command recognition and execution. In some cases, activation of the softkey must be accompanied by a data input. The interactions between the system and the operator can be developed by composing the video screens that will be under machine logic control. Such screens prompt the operator to select a course of action by means of the OEM softkeys and/or to input additional bits of information.
1-26
VARIABLE SERVO ERROR

The Variable Servo Error feature consists in a new logic control of the Servo Error during axis moves. Usually the Servo Error is taken as absolute (i.e. it is directly compared with the axis tracking error). This new feature allows to consider the Servo Error as an additional element to be added to the theoretical tracking error, the axis is accumulating during its move based on the programmed parameters (speed, gain, active or inactive VFF and VFF%). During the movement, the algorithm is used to determine the theoretical error of the axis (based on the instantaneous velocity of the axis), to which the configured delta is added. If the movement is of type "without VFF" (e.g., it is a manual movement), the error accumulated during the time delay due to the position loop is also added. Once the threshold value has been obtained, it is compared with the following error. The error accumulated during the feedback delay is calculated on the basis of the rapid acceleration and is equal to: Epsi_delay = rapid acc / (kv * 16.6666)
Here 'rapid acc' and 'kv' are in the measurement units of the AMP. THIS SUM IS ONLY CALCULATED ONCE AT START-UP AND NOT CHANGED THEREAFTER.
In order to enable this feature you have to set the value of the movement Servo Error without VFF so that it is smaller than the theoretical error calculated with maximum speed (the Maximum Feed field in AMP) with VFF at zero. Once enabled, the algorithm becomes active for moves with as well as without VFF and takes the delta value from the pertinent configured Servo Errors. The algorithm becomes active at the start of a move if a comparison shows that the Servo Error value is smaller than the theoretical maximum (which is calculated only once at start-up on the basis of the data configured in AMP). If this condition is not met, the algorithm does not start and the Servo Error is taken as an absolute value in the usual manner. The algorithm does not become active, when a VFF value equal to 100% has been configured on the axis during a VFF move (the theoretical error is then zero, therefore the value of the configured Servo Error is directly applied). For Split axes the feature only works on the master axis. This feature is not activated on spindle type axes and with the Electronic Cam function. Change of parameters by the Servo Monitor may change the Servo Error application algorithm.
1-27
Note on the digital axes. Starting from fixup 1 release 7.3, the activation of the algorithm has been extended to the axes with digital interface. For axes of this kind, consider that: 1. the axis reacts according to the KV and VFF gains set on the drive (SERCOS, MECHATROLINK or OS-Wire). Considering that the theoretical error is determined by the CNC based on the KV and VFF values set in AMP, it would be advisable, to the extent feasible, to set the same values on the drive. 2. The following error determined by the CNC is greater than the real axis error due to the time delay in data transmission. Due to these changing conditions, it is not possible to find a mathematical rule for the determination of the threshold to be set in AMP, as is done for analog axes, and the threshold has to be determined empirically through various movement tests performed with the axis in the conditions requested by the application.
Example 1 : maximum feed acceleration Servo Loop gain Position Error with VFF Position Error without VFF VFF% = = = = = = 4000 mm/min 300 mm/sec 1 5 mm 5 mm 100
The theoretical error for comparison at maximum feed without VFF results as 4 mm. Given that the Position Error without VFF is set to 5, the algorithm is not enabled and Servo Error emergency is triggered, when the error exceeds 5 mm. Example 2 : maximum feed acceleration Servo Loop gain Position Error with VFF Position Error without VFF VFF%
= = = = = =
4000 mm/min 300 mm/sec 1 1.5 mm 2.5 mm 100
As in the previous example the theoretical error is 4 mm. For moves with VFF the Position Error without VFF is set to 1.5, but the algorithm is not enabled, because VFF is equal to 100%. Hence Servo Error emergency is triggered when the error exceeds 1.5 mm.
1-28
For moves without VFF the Position Error without VFF is set to 2.5 (i.e. smaller than 4). Therefore the algorithm is enabled and the error delta is 2.5 plus the delay equal to 300 / (16.666) = 3.58. If the current feed is 2000 mm/min, Servo Error emergency is triggered when the error exceeds 2 + 3.58 = 5.58 mm.
Example 3 : maximum feed acceleration Servo Loop gain Position Error with VFF Position Error without VFF VFF%
= = = = = =
4000 mm/min 300 mm/sec 1 1.5 2.5 50
As before the theoretical error for comparison is 4 mm. For moves with VFF the error delta with VFF is 1.5. Assuming a feed of 2000 mm/min is programmed, the theoretical error is 1 mm (as the current feed will be with VFF at 50%). Therefore the Servo Error emergency triggers when the error exceeds 1 + 1.5 + 300 / (16.666) = 3.58 mm. For moves without VFF the error delta is 2.5. With a feed of 3000 mm/min the Servo Error emergency triggers when the error exceeds 3 + 2.5 +1.08 = 6.58 mm.
1-29
RIGID TAPPING PARAMETER CALCULATIONS

In order to correctly build the rigid tapping cycle (see programming manual) you must look for and save two parameters by using the same configuration as VFF that you use during machining. These are the TKG and TAG parameters which represent the compensation coefficients for the command application delay from the servo system for controlling axes and spindle. In particular the TKG parameter is used for recovering errors in the constant speed feed phases while the TAG parameter is used for recovering errors in the axes acceleration and deceleration phases used in tapping (typically the Z axis) Calculation procedure: Before checking that the parameters are correct in the machine AMP, you must configure a fictitious coordinated axis, without convertors or transducers and residing in the process to which the Z axis and the spindle used for the tapping belong. This axis will obviously have an identifier (IDx). You should make this change on a copy of the machine AMP so that you dont have to change again once you have found the parameter values. After switching on the control you have to enter in Manual Data Input the command TMA=IDx where IDx is the identifier of the fictitious axis previously configured. This command is necessary in order to be able to correlate the configured axis with the characterisation of rigid tapping. At this point the Servo Monitor has to be programmed for monitoring the speed of the axis used in tapping (typically Z) and the speed of the fictitious axis. In this case the phase difference between the physical position of the spindle and the position programmed for the Z axis in millimetres is shown on the fictitious axis. By executing tapping cycles without a work piece and each time modifying the TKG and TAG parameters you can achieve to eliminate or almost eliminate the phase difference shown. Practically it is best to work only with the TKG parameter and to eliminate the constant speed error neglecting the error trend in the acceleration phase. Once you have found the correct value for the TKG parameter you then go over and try to find the optimal value for the TAG parameter.
1-30
The next figure shows an example on how this is displayed on the Servo Monitor
V axis Z
A
V axis IDX
Once you have found the values for the TAG and TKG parameters, these are valid for all types of tapping, also with spindle steps and speed different from those used for the tests. The values found have to be inserted into a routine or a macro which assigns parameters and has to necessarily be called by all programs which carry out tapping operations.
1-31
END OF CHAPTER
1-32
Chapter
AMP
AMP (Adjustable Machine Parameters) is one of the utilities installed in the OEM Utility partition of the system. AMP allows the user to set the parameters that define the various processes to be run by the machining centre. To enter the AMP utility, press the softkey UTILITY in the general 10 Series CNC screen.
HELP OEM SOFTKEYS UTILITY
10 Series CNC general screen
AMP utility selection AMP
Access to the AMP utility is also possible with the system in emergency, i.e. by holding down key [F1].
SOFTKEY
There are seven softkeys to handle the configuration environment: by pressing the right most softkey the operator can select the menu line that contains the desired item with a loop cycle (the selected line is displayed in a different colours) the middle softkeys correspond to the items of the selected line. By pressing one of these softkeys, the operator can access the desired data entry by pressing the left most softkey the operator can always return to the main menu.
2-1
Chapter 2 AMP
AMP main menu

When AMP is activated, the first displayed menu is shown in the following picture:
Adjust Machine Parameters SELECTED AMP 3
date: dd/mm/yy ACTIVATED AMP 0
time: hh:mm:ss RUNNING AMP 0

INFORMATION BOX
-- A M P D I R E C T O R Y L I S T -0 - DEFAULT
Configuration 0-3
COMPILED Y N
CONFIGURATION STATUS
1 - DEFAULT 23-
CURSOR
HELP ACTIVATE SELECT BACKUP EDIT COMMENT DELETE PRINT EXIT
SOFTKEYS
AMP utility allows to manage 4 different configurations; this is very useful to switch from one configuration to another one. The configurations are numbered from 0 to 3 and can associate a comment (that is displayed close the configuration number). The desired configuration can be selected using the arrows keys:
The blue cursor will highlight the request configuration.
2-2
Chapter 2 AMP
INFORMATION BOXES Selected AMP It is the selected configuration to be modified Activated AMP It shows the configuration that will be used on the next power up. Running AMP It shows the configuration that was used during the last (current) power up. CONFIGURATION STATUS Y N (Empty) The AMP configuration has been compiled successfully The AMP configuration has not been compiled or the compilation was not ended successfully The AMP directory is void.
CURSOR AND CONFIGURATION They highlight one of the 4 possible configurations. SOFTKEYS They allows to activate the possible functions. They will be explained in detail in the following pages.
Help
At any moment during the AMP configuration, the user can display additional information about a certain parameter or sub menu by selecting the HELP softkey. This help text is displayed within a window on the right side of the screen and varies according to the context in which it has been activated: if the user has selected the HELP softkey when a menu is on the screen, the help text will contain information about that specific menu (data entries and associated parameters); if Help is activated when a data entry is on the screen, the help text will contain information about parameter values (range, restrictions, measuring, unit, etc.).
2-3
Chapter 2 AMP
Activate
Activates the configuration (0-3) selected via the arrow keys and highlighted by the blue bar. The configuration number is displayed in the central information box. This configuration will be used by 10 Series CNC on the next power up.
Trying to activate a configuration that was not previously compiled, the error "AM155 AMP directory can not be activated: binary file does not exist" is generated. To get information regarding the compilation, see also the section regarding the SELECT softkey.
Select
Opens the characterization, this will be ended pushing the EXIT softkey. See also the "Enter/Exit the characterization" paragraph.
SELEC BACKUP
AMP main menu
first line
HARDWARE SELECT PROCESS GENERAL INFO PROCESS CONFIG LOGIC CONF AXIS CONFIG
Characterization menu
OPTIONS HUMAN INTERF
HELP EXIT
third line second line
2-4
Chapter 2 AMP
Characterization menu softkeys

The first line of the characterization menu included the following softkeys for global parameter configuration (chapter 3). HARDWARE data entry GENERAL INFO data entry Hardware configuration of the system General information for configuration (measuring unit, number of configurable processes, logic variables) LOGIC CONF sub menu BOOLEAN VAR SHORT VAR DOUBLE VAR AUX GEN INFO SELECT AUX AUX CHARACT PHYSICAL CONN AXIS CALIBR Option sub-menu DOS REAL-TIME UND USER DOS DOS GRAPHICS HELP (Real-time DOS Interface) (End User Dos utility) (DOS Graphic Utility Interface) Help text (LOGIC CONFIGURATION) (Booleans variables) (Short variables) (Double variables) (Auxiliary axes general information) (Auxiliary axes selection) (Auxiliary axes characterization) (Physical connection) (Axis calibration)
The second line includes the following softkeys associated to process related functions. SELECT PROCESS data entry (PROCESS SELECT) It is meaningful for multi process systems only and allows to select the process to be configured. All the information that follows is related to the selected process.
2-5
Chapter 2 AMP
PROCESS CONFIG sub-menu GTL VIRTUAL AXES E PARAMETERS USER VARIABLES PRO CHAR PROC VARIABLES PROGR CHAR M CODE G CODE AXIS CONFIG sub-menu AXES GEN INFO PSEUDO AXES SPINDLE PROBING SELECT AXIS AXIS CHARACT AXIS CALIBR PHYSICAL CONN HUMAN INTERF sub-menu HI GEN INFO ADD SCR CONFIG COMMON SCREEN PROCESS SCREEN SELECT MENU OEM SK CONFIG SELECT DE DE CONFIG PPDIR CONFIG
(PROCESS CONFIGURATION) (High level geometry) (Virtual axes) (E variables) (User variables) (Process characterization) (Process variables) (Program characteristics) (M code) (G code) (CO-ORDINATE AXES CONFIGURATION) (Co-ordinate axes general information) (Pseudo axes) (Spindle characterization) (Touch probe) (Axis selection) (Axis characterization) (Axis calibration) (Physical connection) (OPERATOR INTERFACE) (Operator interface general information) (Additional screen configuration) Not available (Process screen cycle) (OEM menu selection) (OEM softkey configuration) (OEM data entry selection) (OEM data entry configuration) (Part program directory configuration)
The third line of the menu includes the EXIT softkey EXIT (Exit for the characterization session).
2-6
Chapter 2 AMP
Operativity notes
When the user has selected the desired data entry with the proper softkeys, he can start defining the associated parameters with the alphanumeric keyboard. The cursor is automatically positioned on the value field of each parameter. The operator can accept the displayed value or he can insert a new one. If necessary, the operator can move the cursor by using the arrow keys. The correct range of values for each parameter is shown in the Help window that the operator can display by pressing the HELP softkey. In some cases the permissible range is displayed as a list (for example, user variable names, coordinate axis names, etc.). For each entered value, AMP performs range and congruency checks. In case of mistakes, the relevant error message is displayed (see Appendix A) and the cursor remains on the wrong parameter. Some data entries can be listed on more than one screen page. The user can display the various pages by using [Pg Dn] and [Pg Up] keys.
Data Entry Storage

Once the data entry has been completed, the user can confirm and store it in the AMP files, by pressing the [Enter] key. To abort a data entry it is possible to press the [Esc] key.
2-7
Chapter 2 AMP
ENTER/EXIT THE CHARACTERIZATION

10 Series CNC manages up to 4 "on line" configurations. When the SELECT softkey is used to modify the selected configuration (0, 1, 2 or 3), this is copied in a work directory. All the changes will be made in the work directory. Following configuration (press EXIT), there are 3 alternatives: 1. Perform the secondary calculations transforming the information entered (source files) into a configuration that may be used by the bootstrap (binary files). 2. Save the data entered without performing the secondary calculations (this may also be useful in cases where errors that cannot be eliminated at the time are signalled during the secondary calculations but you want to save the changes made in any case). In this case, any binary files generated previously are lost and care must be taken because, if the AMP directory was the active one, on rebooting the system will not find the binary configuration files and the control will have to be started in emergency mode to generate and activate an AMP configuration. 3. Do not save the new configuration. In this case any changes made are lost. If there were binary files for the previous configuration, these will be maintained as the source files from which they were generated have not been changed. You are advised to use this exit mode when entering the configuration for consultation to avoid losing the binary files. Remember the meaning of the terms Source and Binary for the AMP utility: SOURCE FILES BINARY FILES contain the information entered with the data entry. files generated by the secondary calculations and actually used by 10 Series CNC to configure the machine on starting (BOOTSTRAP).
Examples: If you press SELECT (see figure) configuration no. 1 becomes the working configuration.
AMP directory
Working directory
AMP0 Select AMP1 EXIT
AMP2
AMP3
2-8
Chapter 2 AMP
After changing the configuration, press EXIT. The system asks if the secondary calculations are to be made. If the answer is "Y", the binary files will be generated (if there are no errors, in which case you stay in the configuration stage); this is the case of alternative 1.
HELP
EXIT
Characterization menu New file generation data entry
-- EXIT -Translate new parameters? (Y/N) Y
On the other hand, if the answer is "N", the system will ask if you want to save the changes to the source files or not.
HELP EXIT Characterization menu New file generation data entry
-- EXIT -Translate new parameters? (Y/N) N
-- SAVE -Save new configuration? (Y/N)
If the answer in the SAVE data entry is "Y", the changes become operative (case 2). If the answer is "N", any changes made will be lost (case 3). If the system is powered off while in the process of configuring a selected AMP directory, any changes made will be lost.
2-9
Chapter 2 AMP
Edit Comment
This softkey in the AMP main menu allows to insert/modify the comment associated to the configuration. This comment must be used to identify a specific configuration (0-3) in the AMP DIRECTORY LIST.
EDIT COMMENT DELETE
AMP main menu Data Entry Edit Comment
-- EDIT AMP DIRECTORY COMMENT --
NOTE: # identifies the number of the current characterization To exit the data-entry, push EDIT COMMENT softkey again.
Backup
This softkey enter in the Backup utility. This utility allows to save, restore or copy an AMP configuration data-entry.
SELECT BACKUP
AMP main menu
Backup Data Entry
-- B A C K U P -From : To :
2-10
Chapter 2 AMP
Where: From: It is the source directory. It is one of the four AMP Directories; in this case it must be a number between 0 and 3. Destination directory: It is one of the four AMP directories (number between 0 and 3) or another directory defined by a complete path (i.e. a:\amp).
To:
Obviously the BACKUP utility can be used to save or restore or copy configuration data.
Delete
DELETE softkey allows to delete an AMP configuration.
EDIT COMMENT DELETE
AMP main menu Data entry delete
-- DELETE -Confirm delete AMP directory

# Y/N) ? N
Print
PRINT
AMP main menu Main screen print utility
This utility is dedicated to printing of various configurations inside AMP memorised in directories: E:\AMP1AMP0,...AMP1,...AMP2,...AMP3. The utility can supply a print of each data-entry (with its frames and data inserted). Possibility to choose directory and process to which printed data must refer to, is envisaged; comments relative to the contents of the various directories are available on the utility's main display.
2-11
Chapter 2 AMP
Data entries selectable in AMP are divided in homogeneous groups and for each of these groups it is possible to confirm or enable printing; the final print out will always be preceded by the hardware and software characteristics of the machine and by the information entered in the "Hardware" and "General" data entries. The utility's output can be memorised in a file (path defined by user) or sent directly to the printer.
AMP
AMP0: AMP1: AMP2: AMP3: ........ ........ ........ ........
DIRECTORIES
Printing amp: # HELP ABORT EXIT
SELECT DIR
SELECT PROCESS
SELECT PATH
PRINT
NOTE: # represents the number of the AMP selected.
2-12
Chapter 2 AMP
Select dir
It is possible to select the directory where the configuration to print resides, through the "SELECT DIR" data-entry. In case no selection is made, data will refer to the last directory configured in amp. Should the selected directory be empty or wrong, an error message is signalled.
AMP
AMP0: AMP1: AMP2: AMP3: ........ ........ ........ ........
DIRECTORIES
-- SELECT DIRECTORY --
- directory to be print:_
SELECT DIR
SELECT PROCESS
SELECT PATH
PRINT
Directory to be print Description: select the AMP directory to be print. Range: 0..3 Default value: none Unit: none On accessing the PRINT utility, the data with which to perform printout of the AMP directory always refer to the AMP number displayed in the "Printing amp" box.
2-13
Chapter 2 AMP
Select process
At the selection of the mentioned data entry panel the number of configured processes is displayed. If the print of the data referring to all configured processes is required, the character '*' must be inserted instead of the number of the process. If no selection is done, the data will refer to the first process.
PROCESS number configured : 1
-- SELECT PROCESS --
- selected process:_
SELECT DIR
SELECT PROCESS
SELECT PATH
PRINT
Select process Description: select process (or processes) whose data must be printed. Range: from 1 up to the maximum number of configured processes Default value: none Unit: none
2-14
Chapter 2 AMP
Select path
Using the "Select path" data-entry, the set of information to be printed can be defined. The various data-entry that can be configured in AMP have been subdivided in the following groups: - PROCESS PATH - HUMAN PATH - AXIS PATH - OPTIONALS PATH - USER VARIABLES - E PARAMETERS - M CODES - PLUS VARIABLES - AXIS CALIBRATION
-- PATH SELECTION -- process path - human path - axis path - optional path - user variables - E parameters - M codes - plus variables - axes calibration : : : : : : : : :
SELECT DIR
SELECT PROCESS
SELECT PATH
PRINT
HELP ABORT EXIT
The above-mentioned groups respectively include: - PROCESS PATH: - Process characterization - User variables definition - Process variables - Program characterization - G codes - Pseudo axes - Virtual axes configuration - Probing - Geometrical Technological Language
2-15
Chapter 2 AMP
- HUMAN PATH: - Hi general information - Process screen loop - Additional screen configuration - PPDIR configuration - Select OEM SK menu - SK configuration - Select OEM data entry - OEM data entry configuration - AXIS PATH - Auxiliary axis general information - Auxiliary axis characterization - Physical connections - Co-ordinate axes general information - Slave axes general information - Spindle - Coordinate axis characterization - Coordinate digital axis characterization - Physical connections - Slave axis characterization - Slave digital axis characterization - Physical connections - OPTIONALS PATH: - Dos Real-Time - Dos Graphics - End User Dos - USER VARIABLES: - User variables set up - E PARAMETERS - E parameters set up - M CODES: - M codes - PLUS VARIABLES: - Boolean variables set up - Short variables set up - Double variables set up - AXES CALIBRATION: - Axis calibration NOTE: The wording digital axis refers to axes with either D.S.I. or OS-Wire interface.
2-16
Chapter 2 AMP
Print
The print starts when the "SELECT DEVICE" data-entry is confirmed (PRINT softkey): The name of the device to which direct the output of the utility must be introduced using this dataentry: this output device can be a file or a printer, both local or remote. A:, E:, PRN are admitted as local devices; H:,....Z:, LPT1, LPT2, LPT3, if connected, are admitted as remote devices. If the remote printer LPT1 is not connected, it coincides with PRN.
AMP
AMP0 : AMP1 : AMP2 : AMP3 : ........ ........ ........ ........
DIRECTORIES
-- SELECT DEVICE --
- device:
a:\prt\printfil.asc
SELECT DIR
SELECT PROCESS
SELECT PATH
PRINT
HELP ABORT EXIT
NOTE: In this case the directory PRT on floppy must already exist, otherwise an error will be returned.
Abort
Pressing the ABORT softkey an already started printing process can be interrupted. If the selected device is a file, the data referring to the data-entries read before this softkey pressing will be stored in the file.
2-17
Chapter 2 AMP
AMP print utility error messages

_______________________________________________________________________________ Code Message description and recovery action
_______________________________________________________________________________ PR024 Seek error It is generated when a positioning error occurs during a file reading or waiting phase. PR025 Open file error It is generated when an anomaly occurs during the opening phase of a file used by the print utility. PR026 Read file error It is generated when a reading operating in one of the AMP data base files is not successful. PR027 Write file error It is generated when a writing operation on an output file is not successful. PR028 Memory allocation error It is generated when an internal dynamic memory allocation fails. PR030 Data-entry not found It is generated when the information related to a data-entry to be printed are not found in the AMP files. PR03 Unknown device It is generated when the name of the output device selected with the "SELECT DEVICE" data-entry in not of the admitted devices. PR032 Empty directory It is generated when the AMP directory selected through the "SELECT DIRECTORY" data-entry is empty. PR033 Process not configured It is generated when the process selected in the "SELECT PROCESS" dataentry is not configured. PR034 Output file not found It is generated when an anomaly occurs opening the output print utility file, or when its path name is wrong.
2-18
Chapter 2 AMP
_______________________________________________________________________________ Code Message description and recovery action
_______________________________________________________________________________ PR035 Protected diskette It is generated when the output device is a floppy and is write protected. PR036 Driver not ready It is generated when the output floppy is not inserted. PR037 Print fault It is generated when the output printer is not connected. PR038 Print out of paper It is generated when the output printer is out of paper. PR040 Value out of range Value out of permissible range PR041 AMP configuration can not be read It is generated when a process has been declared in AMP but is not configured: i.e. its presence has been set in the "GENERAL INFO" AMP data-entry, but it has been selected using the "SELECT PROCESS" AMP data-entry.
2-19
Chapter 2 AMP
END OF CHAPTER
2-20
Chapter
GLOBAL PARAMETERS CONFIGURATION
This chapter describes all the parameters related to the general system configuration: peripherals, memory, devices, processors, Logic information, optional features in the OEM partition, program verification, etc.. This aspect of the configuration is divided into four sections: Hardware, General Information, Logic Axis, Options configuration. NOTE: The parts described in this chapter are those that can be accessed from the first line of the characterization menu and are common to all the systems comprising the 10 Series CNC. An exception to this is the data entry for the Hardware configuration of the 10/110 and 10/510 systems, on account of this, a distinction will be made between this systems and the 10/565 and 10/585 systems.
SELECT BACKUP
AMP main menu
HARDWARE SELECT PROCESS
GENERAL INFO PROCESS CONFIG
LOGIC CONF AXIS CONFIG
HELP EXIT
After the selection, the screen shows a characterization menu which allows the operator to access the desired parameters list. NOTE: For each parameter a brief description is provided, with the range, unit of measurement and the default value.
3-1
Chapter 3 Global Parameters Configuration
HARDWARE 10/110 AND 10/510 SYSTEM

Status :
-- H A R D W A R E
- board code number - position loop clock
C O N F I G U R A T I O N -: 11 : 5.0
- serial line device (port 1) - serial line device (port 2) - system clock - broken wire - DSI baud rate - TX power
:0 :0 :5 : Disable :2 :6
(Mbit/s)
LOCAL CONFIG AXIS CONFIG
OPTIONS
HELP EXIT
HUMAN INTERFACE
Board code number Description: determines code number of the board. Range: min 11 / max 36 Default value: 11 (depends on system type) Board codes and description: Board code no. 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 Board type 3-axis analog interface 4-axis analog interface Reserved 6-axis analog interface 3-axis analog interface 8-axis DSI interface 8-axis DSI interface 5-axis DSI interface 15-axis Mechatrolink interface 6-axis Mechatrolink interface 4-axis analog interface 3-axis analog interface 10/510 with OS_8510 or OS_8511 10/510 with OS_8510/1 or OS_8511/1 10/510 with OS_8510/2 or OS_8511/2 10/510 with OS_8510/3 or OS_8511/3 10/510 with OS_8510/4 10/510 with OS_8521 10/510 with OS_8520/1 10/100 with OS_8510/5 or OS_8511/5 10/100 with OS_8510/6 or OS_8511/6 Sistem type 10/110 10/110 Unit type: none
3-2
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37
OS-Wire interface OS-Wire interface OS-Wire interface 15-axis Mechatrolink interface 30-axis Mechatrolink interface 15-axis Mechatrolink interface 15-axis Mechatrolink interface 30-axis Mechatrolink interface OS-Wire interface 30-axis Mechatrolink interface 15-axis Mechatrolink interface 15-axis Mechatrolink interface 32-axis DSI interface 32 axis DSI interface 4-axis Mechatrolink interface
10/510 with OS_8531 10/510 with OS_8532 10/510 with OS_8532/2 10/110 10/510 with OS_8515 10/510 with OS_8515/1 10/510 with OS_8515/2 10/510 with OS_8515/3 10/110 10/510 with OS_8516 or OS_8517 10/510 with OS_8516/1 10/510 with OS_8516/2 10/510 with OS_8512 10/510 with OS_8512/1 10/510 with OS_8516/3 or OS_8517/3
Description of main resources: Board code no. 11 12 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 Number of resources 3 transducers + 4 converters 4 transducers + 6 converters 6 transducers + 8 converters 3 transducers + 4 converters no transducers no converters 2 transducers + 2 converters no transducers, no converters 1 converter 1 converter 4 transducers + 8 converters 3 transducers + 4 converters no transducers, no converters 1 transducer + 2 converters 1 converter 1 converter 4 transducers + 5 converters 1 converter transd. id from 1 to 3 from 1 to 4 from 1 to 6 from 1 to 3 5 and 6 from 1 to 4 from 1 to 3 1 from 1 to 4 14 bit conv. id from 1 to 4 from 1 to 6 from 1 to 8 from 1 to 4 1 and 2 from 1 to 8 from 1 to 4 1 from 1 to 4 8 bit conv. id 1 1 5 1 1 5 5
3-3
29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37
1 transducer + 2 converters 1 converter 1 converter 1 transducer + 2 converters 1 converter 1 transducer + 2 converters 2 transducers + 2 converters 1 converter 1 converter
4 1 1 1 and 2 -
4 1 1 1 -
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
Position loop clock Description: specifies the amount of time before the position loop is closed. Range: min 0.2/max 10 (with DSI systems min 2/max 10). Default value: 5.0 Unit type: msec. For OS-Wire the value could be 1,2,4,8. In Mechatrolink systems the value configured must be 2.
NOTE: The value set for "Position loop clock" must be a multiple of the value assigned the "System clock". Serial line device (port 1) Description: it determines the driver type which can handle the serial port 1. Currently only the driver for handling the Teach Pendant (1), the asynchronous serial driver (2) or the serial driver for the DAC drives (3) are available. Range: min 0/max 3 Default value: 0 Unit type: none
3-4
Serial line device (port 2) Description: determines the type of driver that can manage serial port 2. Currently available are the driver for handling the Teach Pendant (1), the Serial Asynchronous Driver (2), the Serial Driver for the DAC drives (3) and the driver handling the Remote Operator Panel (4). Range: min 0/max 3 Default value: 0 Unit type: none
If the driver a for the Teach Pendant (1) is enabled for both serial lines, the driver will only be mounted on serial line 1.
If the driver for the DACs (3) is enabled for both serial lines, the driver will only be mounted on serial line 1.
System clock Description: the system clock. Range: min 2/max 10 Default value: 5.0 with resolution 0.1 Unit type: msec. In DSI and Mechatrolink systems set same value as for POSITION LOOP CLOCK.
Broken wire Description: allows you to enable or disable broken wire control on all axes. Range: ENABLE/DISABLE Default value: DISABLE Unit type: none
3-5
DSI baud rate (communication speed of the standard digital interface) Description: defines the transmission speed for the boards 8510/2 /3 /4 and 8511/2 /3. Otherwise this value is ignored. Range: 2 or 4 for 8510 and 8511 boards; 2, 4, 8, 16 for 8512 boards. Default Value: 2 Units: Mbit/s. Tx power (transmission power) Description: defines the transmission power of the optical signal in output of the boards 8510/2 /3 /4 and 8511/2 /3. Otherwise this value is ignored. Range: min 1 max 6 Default Value: 6 Units: none
3-6
HARDWARE (10/565 AND 10/585 SYSTEMS)

Status :
-- H A R D W A R E
C O N F I G U R A T I O N --
- I/O board code number - axes board 0 - axes board 1 - axes board 2 - axes board 3 code number code number code number code number
:4 :1 :0 :0 :0 :0 :0 : 10 position loop clock position loop clock position loop clock position loop clock : 5.0 : 5.0 : 5.0 : 5.0
- serial line device (port 1) - serial line device (port 2) - system clock
1 of 2 HARDWARE SELECT PROCESS GENERAL INFO PROCESS CONFIG LOCAL CONFIG AXIS CONFIG OPTIONS HELP EXIT
HUMAN INTERFACE
In this data entry, users can define the system's hardware configuration data.
Status :
-- D. S. I.
HARDWARE
- axes board 0 D.S.I. baud rate (Mbit/s): 2 - axes board 1 D.S.I. baud rate (Mbit/s): 2 - axes board 2 D.S.I. baud rate (Mbit/s): 2 - axes board 3 D.S.I. baud rate (Mbit/s): 2
Tx power: 6 Tx power: 2 Tx power: 2 Tx power: 2
2 of 2 HARDWARE SELECT PROCESS GENERAL INFO PROCESS CONFIG LOCAL CONFIG AXIS CONFIG OPTIONS HELP EXIT
HUMAN INTERFACE
3-7
I/O board code number Description: characterises the I/O board. The board is integrated, therefore any value from 1 to 4 will be accepted. Range: 1/2/3/4 Default value: 2 Unit type: none Axes board # code number (# = 0..10) Description: it defines the axes board code: Axes board code 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 9 10 None Reserved OS 8020/5 (4 axes, 3 trasducers, 4 converters) OS 8020/6 (6 axes, 6 trasducers, 6 converters) Reserved OS 8025/2 (6 axes, 6 trasducers, 6 converters) OS 8025/3 (4 axes, 3 trasducers, 4 converters) OS 8026 (D.S.I., 0 trasducers, 0 converters) OS 8026/2 (D.S.I., 3 trasducers, 1 converter) Board type
Range: 0/1/2/3/4/5/6/9/10 Default value: 1 (axes board 0), 0 (axes board 1..10) Unit type: none Position loop clock Description: it specifies how many times it takes for position loop clock. Range: min 0.2/max 10 Default value: 5 with resolution 0.1 Unit type: msec Serial line device (port 1) Description: it determines the driver type which can handle the serial port 1. Currently only the driver for handling the Teach Pendant (1), the asynchronous serial driver (2) or the serial driver for the DAC drives (3) are available. Range: min 0/max 3 Default value: 0 Unit type: none
3-8
Serial line device (port 2) Description: it determines the driver type that handles serial port 2. Currently available are the driver for handling the Teach Pendant (1), the Serial Asynchronous Driver (2), the Serial Driver for the DAC drives (3) and the driver handling the Remote Operator Panel (4). Range: min 0/max 4 Default value: 0 Unit type: none
If the driver a for the Teach Pendant (1) is enabled for both serial lines, the driver will only be mounted on serial line 1.
If the driver for the DACs (3) is enabled for both serial lines, the driver will only be mounted on serial line 1. System clock Description: it is the system clock. Range: min 1/max 10 Default value: 10 with resolution 0.1 Unit type: msec. Axes board (0..3) D.S.I. baud rate (Dialog speed of the standard digital interface) Description: defines the transmission speed of the board (0..3), only if a D.S.I. board. The value is ignored otherwise. Range: 2 or 4 Default value: 2 Unit type: Mbit/s Tx power (Transmission power) Description: it defines the strength of the optical signal coming out of the D.S.I. boards Range: min. 1/max. 6 Default value: 6 Unit type: none
3-9
GENERAL INFORMATION
Status :
-- G E N E R A L
I N F O R M A T I O N --
- configuration measuring unit
: MM
- Number of process
:1
- Search in memory - Logic Boolean variables num. - Logic short variables num. - Logic double variables num. - Tool preset modality
:0 :0 :0 :0 :0
OPTIONS
HELP EXIT
HUMAN INTERFACE
This data entry allows the user to define general information such as measuring unit (millimeters or inches), number of processes (only for the multi-process unit), number of variables involved in the communication between the part program and the logic, etc. Configuration measuring unit Description: It is the measuring unit of the parameters marked with " * " in the subsequent data entries. It is also the default measuring unit of the control. Range: INCHES/MM Default value: MM Unit type: none Number of process Description: It defines the number of processes to be configured. In mono-process systems, only the first process can be configured. In the multi process system, processes must be configured in sequential mode, starting from process 1. Range: from 1 to 20 for multi process systems Default value: 1 Unit type: none
3-10
Search in memory Description: It allows you to enable or disable the search in memory feature. Range: 0 disabled, 1 enabled Default value: 0 Unit type: none Logic Boolean variables number Description: It defines the number of Boolean type variables that will be used to achieve the handshaking between the part program and the logic. According to this number, the system will ask for the name and value of each variable. Range: min 0/max 128 Default value: 0 Unit type: none Logic short variables number Description: It defines the number of Short type variables that will be used to achieve the handshaking between the part program and the logic. According to this number, the system will ask for the name and value of each variable. Range: min 0/max 128 Default value: 0 Unit type: none Logic double variables number Description: It defines the number of Double type variables that will be used to achieve the handshaking between the part program and the logic. According to this number, the system will ask for the name and value of each variable. Range: min 0/max 64 Default value: 0 Unit type: none Tool preset modality Description: It indicates how the tool offsets are calculated during the preset operation: if it is 0 the offset value is always positive; if it is 1 the offset is calculated as a positive or negative value depending on the set preset value and the axis position. Range: 0/1 Default value: 0 Unit type: none
3-11
LOGIC CONFIGURATION
By selecting this softkey, the operator can access the following submenu:
Logic configuration sub menu
BOOLEAN VAR AUX GEN INFO
SHORT VAR SELECT AUX
DOUBLE VAR AUX CHARACT
PHYSICAL CONN
HELP AXIS CALIBR EXIT
This submenu allows the user to configure all the logic related information. The following pages illustrate each submenu and data-entry which is presented in the logic configuration.
Boolean Variables
Status :
-- B O O L E A N
name (max 11 ch.) -0 : -1 : -2 : -3 : -4 : -5 : -6 : -7 : -8 : -9 : - 10 : - 11 :
VARIABLES
index (0-15) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
SET
U P --
address (0-255) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
value (0-1)
*
Page 1 of n HELP AXIS CALIBR EXIT
PHYSICAL CONN
NOTE:
"n" varies in function of the number of Boolean variables configured.
3-12
This data entry allows the configuration of the boolean type variables used by the part program to communicate with the logic. Each variable is defined by means of a logical name (whose first character must be " @ "), the address and index values and an initial value. If the logical name is only "@", the boolean variable is initialized but it is not known by the part program. The number of variables depends on the related value set in the "General Info" data entry. Name Description: it contains the name of a boolean type variable. The first character must be " @ ". Range: 11 char. Default value: none Unit type: none Address Description: it is the boolean variable number. Range: min 0/max 255 Default value: 0 Unit type: none Index Description: it is the bit number inside the boolean variable. Range: min 0/max 15 Default value: 0 Unit type: none Value Description: it is the initial value of a boolean type variable. This value will be assigned to the associated variable at each power up. Range: 0/1 Default value: none Unit type: none
3-13
Short Variables
Status :
-- S H O R T
name (max 11 ch.) -0 : -1 : -2 : -3 : -4 : -5 : -6 : -7 : -8 : -9 : - 10 : - 11 :
VARIABLES
SET
U P --
address (0-255) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
value (-32768+32767)
Page 1 of n BOOLEAN VAR AUX GEN INFO SHORT VAR SELECT AUX DOUBLE VAR AUX CHARACT HELP AXIS CALIBR EXIT
PHYSICAL CONN
NOTE:
"n" varies in function of the number of short variables configured.
This data entry allows the configuration of the short type variables used by the part program to communicate with the logic. Each variable is defined by means of a logical name (whose first character must be " @ "), an address value (defined in the symbol adapter package) and an initial value. If the logical name is only "@", the short variable is initialized but it is not known by the part program. The number of variables depends on the related value set in the "General Info" data entry.
3-14
Name Description: it contains the name of a logic short type variable. The first character must be "@". Range: 11 char. Default value: none Unit type: none Address Description: it is the index of the short variable. Range: min 0/max 255 Default value: 0 Unit type: none Value Description: it is the value of a logic short type variable. This value will be assigned to the associated variable at each power up. Range: min -32768/max +32767 Default value: none Unit type: none
Be careful at the address overlap between boolean and short variables. The initial value of a short variables overlaps the boolean variables at the same address.
3-15
Double Variables
Status :
-- D O U B L E
name (max 11 ch.) -0 : -1 : -2 : -3 : -4 : -5 : -6 : -7 : -8 : -9 : - 10 : - 11 :
VARIABLES
SET
U P --
address (0-63) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
value (-99999 99999+99999 99999)
PHYSICAL CONN
NOTE:
"n" varies in function of the number of double variables configured.
This data entry allows the configuration of the double type variables used by the part program to communicate with the logic. Each variable is defined by means of a logical name (whose first character must be " @ "), an address value and an initial value. If the logical name is only "@" the double variable is initialized but it is not known by the part program. The number of variables depends on the related value set in the "General Info" data entry.
3-16
Name Description: it contains the name of a double type variable. The first character must be "@". Range: 11 characters Default value: none Unit type: none Address Description: it is the index of the double variable. Range: min 0/max 63 Default value: 0 Unit type: none Value Description: it is the value of a double type variable. This value will be assigned to the associated variable at each power up. Range: min 99999 99999/max +99999 99999 Default value: none Unit type: none
3-17
Auxiliary Axis General Information

Status :
-- A U X I L I A R Y
AXES
GENERAL
I N F O --
axis identifier - id 1 : 6 - id 2 : - id 3: - id 4: - id 5 : - id 6 : - id 7 : - id 8 :
axis name - axis 1 : a - axis 2 : - axis 3 : - axis 4 : - axis 5 : - axis 6 : - axis 7 : - axis 8 :
interp. clock - clock 1 (ms): 20 - clock 2 (ms): 20 - clock 3 (ms): 20 - clock 4 (ms): 20 - clock 5 (ms): 20 - clock 6 (ms): 20 - clock 7 (ms): 20 - clock 7 (ms): 20
Page 1 of 4 BOOLEAN VAR AUX GEN INFO SHORT VAR SELECT AUX DOUBLE VAR AUX CHARACT HELP AXIS CALIBR EXIT
PHYSICAL CONN
The 10 Series CNC system can manage up to 32 auxiliary axes, not used in coordinate mode. This data entry consisting of 4 screen pages, allows you to configure its name, identifier and interpolation time..
3-18
Axis identifier # (# = 1..32) Description: it is a user defined number, unique in the system, used by the logic program to identify an axis. Range: min 1/max 32 Default value: none Unit type: none Auxiliary axis name # (# = 1..32) Description: it defines the name of the auxiliary axis. Range: from a z and from A Default value: none Unit type: none Interpolator clock # (# = 1..32) Description: it gives the interpolator sampling rate for the auxiliary axis. Range: min 2/max 200 Default value: 20 Unit type: msec Z excluding S
3-19
Select Auxiliary
Status :
AXIS
S E L E C T I O N --
aux 1 : aux 2 : aux 3 : aux 4 : aux 5 : aux 6 : aux 7 : aux 8 :
- select axis
:a
PHYSICAL CONN
This data entry allows the user to select an auxiliary axis. The configuration parameters are available with the "AUX CHARACT" data entry. Select axis Description: It allows the user to select the auxiliary axis name. Range: depends on configured auxiliary axes Default value: none Unit type: none
3-20
Auxiliary Axis Characterization

The "Auxiliary Axis Characterization" data-entry is split into 4 pages (5 pages if the answer in the "digital axis" field is "Y"). The following figures illustrate the contents.
Status :
Axis name: a
AXIS
C H A R A C T E R I Z A T I O N --
- axis type - rollover - digital axis - linear optical encoder - channel A polarity inversion - channel B polarity inversion - channel Z polarity inversion - direction count - marker detection
: LINEAR :N :N :N :N :N :N : POSITIVE : LEVEL
PHYSICAL CONN
Status :
Axis name: a
(*) Measuring unit = mm
- rapid traverse feed - rapid acceleration - manual feed - manual acceleration - electrical pitch - mechanical pitch - rollover pitch - rapid traverse voltage - maximum feed - home position feed - null offset value - home position value - homing direction - percent of VFF - upper software overtravel - lower software overtravel BOOLEAN VAR AUX GEN INFO
AXIS
(*/min) : 4000.00000 (*/s x s) : 300.00000 (*/min) : 3000.00000 (*/s x s) : 300.00000 (pulses/rev) : 5000 (*) : 1.00000 (*) : 360.00000 (Volt) : 7.500 (*/min) : 4000.00000 (*/min) : 50.00000 (*) : 0.00000 (*): 0.00000 : POSITIVE (%): 100 (*) : 0.00000 (*) : -0.00000 DOUBLE VAR AUX CHARACT
Page 2 of n HELP AXIS CALIBR EXIT
PHYSICAL CONN
3-21
Status :
Axis name: a
- display pitch - servo loop gain - stand still servo loop gain - position error at stand still - position error with VFF - position error without VFF - in position band - in position wait (time out) - in position window
AXIS
(*) : 1.00000 : 1.00 : 1.00 (*) : 0.00000 (*) : 0.00000 (*) : 0.00000 (*) : 0.00000 (s) : 0.000 (s) : 0.000
- axis backlash - dead zone -null-motion threshold
(*) : 0.00000 (*) : 0.00000 (*) : 0.00000
PHYSICAL CONN
Status :
Axis name: a
AXIS
- axis calibration points number - calibration points from file (Y/N) ?
:2 :N
PHYSICAL CONN
3-22
Status :
Axis name: a
-- D I G I T A L A U X I L I A R Y
A X I S C H A R A C T E R I Z A T I O N --
- driver address - standard telegram - homing type - additional services - drive use motor transducer (Y/N) ? - probing configuration
:1 :3 :1 :0 :Y :0
Page 5 of 5 BOOLEAN VAR AUX GEN INFO SHORT VAR SELECT AUX DOUBLE VAR AUX CHARACT HELP AXIS CALIBR EXIT
PHYSICAL CONN
NOTE:
"n" depends on whether the answer in the "digital axis" field is "Y" or not; the fifth auxiliary axis characterization page will be opened only if it was "Y".
Axis type Description: It defines the axis type. Range: LINEAR/ROTARY Default value: LINEAR Unit type: none Rollover Description: It defines whether the axis is cyclic or not. In order to fully configure a rollover axis, a further parameter, "rollover pitch", is required to be configured. Range: YES/NO Default value: N Unit type: none
3-23
Digital axis (Drive with standard digital interface) Description: determines whether the current axis is governed by a D.S.I., an OS-Wire or a Mechatrolink digital drive. Range: YES/NO Default: N Unit type: none Linear optical encoder Description: it defines whether the current axis has a linear optical encoder that being the case, it assumes that only one marker is detected along the full stroke. Range: YES/NO Default value: N Unit type: none Channel A polarity inversion Description: it defines the polarity for channel A. When this parameter is set to YES, the logic signal presented to the channel A input will be inverted. Range: YES/NO Default value: N Unit type: none Channel B polarity inversion Description: it defines the polarity for channel B. When this parameter is set to YES, the logic signal presented to the channel B input will be inverted. Range: YES/NO Default value: N Unit type: none Channel Z polarity inversion Description: it defines the polarity for channel Z. When this parameter is set to YES, the logic signal presented to the channel Z input will be inverted. Range: YES/NO Default value: N Unit type: none
3-24
Direction count Description: It defines whether the positive counting of the transducer corresponds to the positive direction of the axis. Range: POSITIVE/NEGATIVE Default value: POSITIVE Unit type: none Marker detection Description: it defines the marker detection. If it is set to LEVEL, the axis position register is cleared whenever the prescribed logic levels are present on the channels A, B, Z. If it is set to EDGE, the register will be cleared whenever the Z marker has a valid transition.
If LEVEL the polarity of the channel syncronized with Z MUST NOT BE inverted..
See also the axis board section in the "10 Series CNC & GP Installation Guide" to select the marker selection correctly Range: EDGE/LEVEL Default value: LEVEL Unit type: none Rapid traverse feed Description: It is the maximum allowable feed of the axis in G0/1/2/3 (value >= Manual Feed). Range: min 0/max 999999999 Default value: 4000 Unit type: mm/min or inches/min for linear axes (or deg/min for rotary axis)
3-25
Rapid acceleration Description: It is the axis acceleration during rapid motion (value >= manual acceleration). Range: min 0/max 99999.99999 Default value: 300 Unit type: mm/sec or inches/sec for linear axes (or deg/sec for rotary axes) Manual feed Description: It represents the maximum speed of the axes in manual mode (jog) (value <= rapid traverse). Range: min 0/max 999999999 Default value: 3000 Unit type: mm/min or inches/min for linear axes (or deg/min for rotary axes) Manual acceleration Description: It is the acceleration rate used during feedrate movements (i.e. G01) and during manual mode movements (value <= Rapid Acceleration). Range: min 0/max 99999.99999 Default value: 300 Unit type: mm/sec or inches/sec for linear axes (or deg/sec for rotary axes) Electrical pitch Description: it is the number of pulses per revolution supplied by the transducer. For analog axes, the value to be entered is multiplied by 4. For example, if the encoder supplies 1250 pulses/rev., the resulting value will be 5000 pulses. With a linear transducer, it represents the number of pulses/rev., multiplied by 4, generated by the transducer over the distance declared as mechanical pitch. For digital axes, whether D.S.I. or OS_Wire, see the Notes on the characterization of digital drives at the end of this paragraph. Range: min 4/max 999999999 Default value: 5000 Unit type: pulses
2 2 2 2 2 2
3-26
Mechanical pitch Description: It is the distance covered by the axis per each revolution of the related transducer. With linear transducer, it represents the distance covered by the axis resulting from the number of pulses declared as electrical pitch (Note: the ratio between mechanical pitch and electrical pitch gives the axis resolution value). Range: min 0.001/max 99999.99999 Default value: 1 Unit type: mm or inches for linear axes (or deg for rotary axes) NOTE: The relationship between mechanical pitch and electrical pitch is the axis's resolution value. Rollover pitch Description: It is the maximum count for a rollover axis. When this value is exceeded, the position display is reset to zero. For rotary axes, this parameter is generally set to 360. Range: min 0.0001/max 99999.99999 Default value: 360 Unit type: mm or inches for linear axes (or deg for rotary axes) Rapid traverse voltage Description: It is the voltage applied to the drive that corresponds to the maximum feed. The default value 7.5 avoids linearity problems of the D/A converter. Range: min -10/max +10 Default value: 7.5 Unit type: volts Maximum feed Description: It defines the axis feed when the rapid traverse voltage is applied to the drive. Range: min 1/max 999999999 Default value: 4000 Unit type: mm/min or inches/min for linear axes (or deg/min for rotary axes)
3-27
Home position feed Description: It defines the axis feed, in the homing cycle, during the marker position search. This speed must be low to prevent missing the marker transition. Range: min 1/max 99999.99999 Default value: 50 Unit type: mm/min or inches/min for linear axes (or deg/min for rotary axes) Null offset value Description: It allows an axis, during homing, to automatically move to the exact mechanical home position rather than to the marker of the axis' transducer. The difference between the marker position and the required mechanical home position is the null offset value. After completion of the homing cycle (including the null offset motion) the position of the axis will be zero. Range: min -99999.99999/max +99999.99999 Default value: 0 Unit type: mm or inches for linear axes (or deg for rotary axes) Home position value Description: It represents the zero position of the axis referred to the null offset position. Range: min -99999.99999/max +99999.99999 Default value: 0 Unit type: mm or inches for linear axes (or deg for rotary axes) Homing direction Description: It represents the axis direction during the home switch search. Range: POSITIVE/NEGATIVE Default value: POSITIVE Unit type: none Percent of VFF Description: It represents the percent of VFF to be used during the movement of an axis with VFF enabled. Range: 0 100 Default value: 100 Unit type: none
3-28
Upper software overtravel Description: It is the positive operating limit of the axis measured from its home position (value > Lower Software Overtravel). Range: min -99999.99999/max +99999.99999 Default value: 0.00000 Unit type: mm or inches for linear axes (or deg for rotary axes) Lower software overtravel Description: It is the negative operating limit of the axis measured from its home position (value < Upper Software Overtravel). Range: min -99999.99999/max +99999.99999 Default value: -0.00000 Unit type: mm or inches for linear axes (or deg for rotary axes) Display pitch Description: it represents the distance between two steps in an axis, programmed as number of steps. Range: min 0/max +99999.99999 Default value: 1 Unit type: mm or inches for linear axes (or deg for rotary axes) Servo loop gain Description: It is the servo loop gain constant for the proportional control of the axis. Setting this parameter to 1 and moving the axis at 1000 mm/min, the following error will be 1 mm. If the feed is 1 ipm, the following error will be 0.001 inch. Changing the value of the constant determines a variation of the following error (fe) depending on the equation fe = feed/(constant x 1000). If the velocity feed forward (VFF) is enabled, the above equation is no longer valid. Setting the servo loop gain to 0 determines an open loop condition of the axis. Range: min 0/max 10 Default value: 1 Unit type: IPM/mil alias 16.6/sec
3-29
Stand still servo loop gain Description: It is the servo loop gain when the axis is centering the "In position band". Range: min 0/max 10 Default value: 1 Unit type: IPM/ml alias16.6/sec Position error at stand still Description: It is the maximum error allowed when the axis is in a standstill. Range: min 0/max 99999.99999 Default value: 0 Unit type: mm or inches for linear axes (or deg for rotary axes) Position error with VFF Description: if the value declared in the field Position error without VFF is greater than the theoretical value calculated at the set highest feed and without VFF, it is the maximum admitted tracking error when the axis moves with VFF. If the value declared in the field Position error without VFF is smaller than the theoretical value calculated at the set highest feed and without VFF, the "Variable Servo Error" feature described in Chapter 1 is applied. Range: min 0/max 99999.99999 Default value: 0 Unit type: mm or inches for linear axes (or deg for rotary axes) NOTE FOR ROLLOVER AXES: If the value entered exceeds the maximum admissible threshold, the latter is automatically forced. The threshold is determined as: (rollover pitch / 2) - space covered in a servo tick at max. speed.
3-30
Position error without VFF Description: if the declared value is greater than the theoretical value calculated at the set highest feed and without VFF, it is the maximum admitted tracking error when the axis moves without VFF. If the declared value is smaller than the theoretical value calculated at the set highest feed and without VFF, the "Variable Servo Error" feature described in Chapter 1 is applied. Range: min 0/max 99999.99999 Default value: 0 Unit type: mm or inches for linear axes (or deg for rotary axes) NOTE FOR ROLLOVER AXES: If the value entered exceeds the maximum admissible threshold, the latter is automatically forced. The threshold is determined as: (rollover pitch / 2) - space covered in a servo tick at max. speed. In position band Description: It is the tolerance around the programmed end-point within which the motion is considered finished. A null value disables the tolerance check. Range: min 0/max 99999.99999 Default value: 0 Unit type: : mm or inches for linear axes (or deg for rotary axes) In position wait Description: It is the maximum time allowed for the axis to be brought within and to stay inside the "in position band" tolerance (value >= In Position Window). Range:min 0/max 65.535 Default value: 0 Unit type: sec In position window Description: it is the time that the axis must remain within the "position tolerance area". It will be rounded to a multiple of the corresponding position loop clock for that axis (value <= In Position Wait) Range: min 0/max 65.535 Default value: 0 Unit type: sec
3-31
Axis backlash Description: It defines the total amount of the axis backlash to be compensated for by the system. It is also possible to define the period of time in which the backlash is actualised. To activate this algorithm called soft, it is necessary to set the value in the following way: in the first figure at the left of the decimal point and in the decimals you will declare the value of the backlash; The remaining figures on the left represent the requested time in milliseconds for the backlash application: -axis backlash : where: the figures represented by T are the time, the figures B are the backlash value. If TTTT corresponds to 0 it will not be activated and the backlash will be activated in standard modality. For example, if a BACKLASH value corresponds to 500,01 the application of an axis backlash will be 0,01 in 50 milliseconds. The sign determines the direction of application of the backlash. If the sign is positive, the backlash is applied when the axis moves in the negative direction, if it is negative, the backlash is applied when the axis moves in the positive direction Range: min -99999.99999/max +99999.99999 Default value: 0 Unit type: mm or inches for linear axes (or deg for rotary axes) Important notes on the use of the algorithm soft: 1. The algorithm divides the axis backlash in different parts considering the set time and the associated interpolator clock and applies the parts to each interpolator click. If the set time is lower then the interpolator clock the algorithm will not be activated. 2. If the backlash is already applied (the last axis movement was in negative direction) and it should be suddenly interrupted, for example writing 0 from Servo Monitor, it will be taken away all in once, so the performance will not take place. 3. If the set backlash is negative the performance will not be activated. 4. It may happen in some situations that the movement ends before the servoloop has had the time to apply (or takeaway) all the backlash, for example when there is a minim inversion of the axis and then the stop; in these cases, at the end of the movement, the servoloop applies or (takes away) all the backlash, for example when there is a minimum inversion of the axis and then the stop; in these cases, at the end of the movement, the servoloop applies (or takes away) all in once the remaining backlash that could not be applied. Dead zone Description: It defines a position window around the end-point in which the servo control module will not output any voltage to the axis drive. As long as the axis remains in the dead zone the command to the drive will have a null value. Range: min 0/max 99999.99999 TTTTB,BBBB
3-32
Default value: 0 Unit type: : mm or inches for linear axes (or deg for rotary axes) Null-motion threshold Description: It indicates the threshold under which, during the movement, the axis dynamic is not considered. Range: min 0/max +99999.99999 Default value: 0 (deactivated) Unit type: mm or inches per linear axis, degrees for rotary axis Axis calibration points number Description: It defines the number of calibration points to be set to calibrate the axis. This parameter must be configured also when calibration points from file need to be introduced. Range: min 0/max 1000 Default value: 0 Unit type: none Calibration points from file (Y/N) Description: answer Y if a file including calibration points for the axis exists (File E:\OEM\AMPx\CLB_FILE.Id). Answer N if calibration points are introduced through data entry. For calibration file format see appendix C in this manual. Range: YES/NO Default value: N Unit type: none Driver address Description: this is the address set on a drive to be associated with an axis having a (D.S.I., OSWire or Mechatrolink) digital interface. This address identifies the drive univocally within the communication system (fibre optic ring for D.S.I., OS-Wire bus or Mechatrolink bus). Notes on systems with double Mechatrolink channel. On each individual channel, the addresses of the drives range from 1 to 15. The axes mapped on the first channel must have an address between 1 and 15. The axes mapped on the second channel must have an address between 16 and 30. Range: 0/254 Default value: 1 Unit type: none
3-33
Standard telegram Description: identifies the type of axis and and servo mode of the motor connected to D.S.I. type digital drivers. Range: 1/6 where: 1 = reserved 2 = reserved 3 = Speed drive only spindle (without transducer feedback). This configuration is the equivalent of an analog type spindle configure with converter only 4 = Normal or point-to-point axis 5 = Speed and/or position drive spindle. This configuration is the equivalent of a spindle driven with converter and transducer 6 = reserved Default value: 4 Unit type: none Homing type Description: defines the axis homing cycle for type D.S.I., OS-Wire or Mechatrolink digital axes. Range: 0/7. For D.S.I. digital axes homing modes are as follows: 0 = Homing managed by CNC: the physical switch must be connected to the CNC. 1 = Homing cycle with absolute transducer: a movement (twice as long as the BACKLASH) is performed in a direction opposite to the Homing Direction; in this manner, mechanical backlash is neutralised and the position is rated as valid. After that, the axis is set on the machine zero position. 2 = Homing cycle for axes with absolute transducer: a movement similar to mode 1 is performed, but the final movement to the machine zero position is not performed. 3 = Homing managed by drive: the physical switch must be connected to the drive. 4= 5= reserved Homing managed by the CNC, the zero microswitch must be connected to the CNC. This mode applies solely if the drive connected to the axis is an OSAI DAC with digital interface and the position transducer selected is the one on the motor (absolute SinCos within a revolution). It does apply to rollover axes. reserved Same as mode 3, but return to zero movement is not performed.
6= 7=
3-34
For OS-Wire digital axes the homing cycle is always managed by the CNC, the following modes are used to specify type of microswitch and the transducer selected on the OS3 drive: 0 = Physical switch connected to the I/Os and feedback active on Aux Feedback 1 = Homing cycle with absolute transducer: a movement (twice as long as the BACKLASH) is performed in a direction opposite to the Homing Direction; in this manner, mechanical backlash is neutralised and the position is rated as valid. After that, the axis is set on the machine zero position. 2 = Homing cycle for axes with absolute transducer: a movement similar to mode 1 is performed, but the final movement to the machine zero position is not performed. 3 = reserved. 4= 5= 6= Physical switch connected to the drive and feedback active on Aux Feedback Physical switch connected to the I/Os and feedback active on Motor Feedback Physical switch connected to the drive and feedback active on Motor Feedback
7 = reserved. For Mechatrolink digital axes the modes are: 0 = Homing managed by the CNC with physical switch connected to the I/Os of the CNC (as for the analog axes). 1 = Homing cycle with absolute transducer: a movement (twice as long as the BACKLASH) is performed in a direction opposite to the Homing Direction; in this manner, mechanical backlash is neutralised and the position is rated as valid. After that, the axis is set on the machine zero position. 2 = Homing cycle for axes with absolute transducer: a movement similar to mode 1 is performed, but the final movement to the machine zero position is not performed. 3 = Homing managed by drive: the physical switch must be connected to the drive. 4= Homing managed by the CNC with physical switch connected to the drive. The microswitch signal polarity sign must be set on the drive. The CNC interprets the DEC signal (see Mechatrolink description) as follows: 0 is perceived as microswitch not pressed (OPEN) and 1 as microswitch pressed (CLOSE). reserved. reserved.
5= 6=
7 = reserved. Default value: 3 Unit type: none
3-35
Additional Services Description: additional services for OSAI D.S.I. (DAC/DSC series) and Mechatrolink digital axes. Range: 0/7 For D.S.I. axes the following values apply: 0 = no special function activated 1 = new axis stop algorithm activated if reset command is given during homing process. This algorithm must be activated when OSAI DAC/DSC D.S.I. drives are used in homing type = 3 mode (homing managed by drive). For Mechatrolink axes, the range is interpreted in bits and it is used to set the acceleration/deceleration filters and drive speed loop control type. The first three bits affect the OPTION field included in the Mechatrolink movement commands (third and fourth bytes) according to the following scheme: OPTION first byte ((Acceleration/Deceleration Filter Selection) bit 0 bit 1 bit 2 Default value: 0 Unit type: none bit 3 bit 4 OPTION second byte (Speed Loop P/PI Control Switching) bit 4
Additional Services
3-36
Drive uses motor transducer (Y/N)? Description: the OS3 digital drive can use either the transducer built into the motor or an external one (e.g., an optical ruler). If you want to use the motor transducer (Motor Feedback), answer Y to this question, if you want to use the external one (Aux Feedback), answer N. This choice also applies to the axes with D.S.I. interface. Range: YES/NO Default value: Y Unit type: none Probing Configuration Description: determines probing mode for D.S.I. digital drives. Range: 0/2 where: 0 = the CNC programs the drive for probing on the positive ramp 1 = the CNC programs the drive for probing on the negative ramp 3 = the CNC does not program the drive assuming it has been set for probing on the positive ramp Default Value: 0 Units: none
Notes on characterization of D.S.I digital drivers

List of parameters with no effects CHANNEL A, CHANNEL B, CHANNEL Z, DIRECTION COUNT, MARKER DETECTION, RAPID TRAVERSE VOLTAGE, SERVO LOOP GAIN, STAND STILL SERVO LOOP GAIN, DEAD ZONE, MAXIMUM FEED , PERCENT OF VFF. Parameters with effect in cases of homing microswitch managed by CNC LINEAR OPTICAL ENCODER, HOME POSITION FEED, HOMING DIRECTION. ELECTRICAL PITCH parameter The parameter ELECTRICAL PITCH, (characterised with the default parameters), must be declared in the following way: Linear axes: 10.000 X 1mm. Rotary axes: 3.600.000 x rev (360)
3-37
Notes on the characterization of OS-Wire digital drivers

List of parameters with no effects CHANNEL A, CHANNEL B, CHANNEL Z, DIRECTION COUNT, MARKER DETECTION, RAPID TRAVERSE VOLTAGE, SERVO LOOP GAIN, STAND STILL SERVO LOOP GAIN, DEAD ZONE , MAXIMUM FEED. ELECTRICAL PITCH parameter For OS-Wire digital axes consider the position feedback selected on the drive. If motor Feedback is active, the value to be entered is 524288 (constant value equivalent to the resolution of the SinCos Stegmann transducer), otherwise, if Aux Feedback is active, the rules governing analog axes shall apply.
Notes on the characterisation of Mechatrolink digital drives

List of parameters with no effect. CHANNEL A, CHANNEL B, CHANNEL Z, DIRECTION COUNT, MARKER DETECTION, RAPID TRAVERSE VOLTAGE, SERVO LOOP GAIN, STAND STILL SERVO LOOP GAIN, DEAD ZONE, MAXIMUM FEED, PERCENT OF VFF. List of parameters with effect in the case of homing microswitch managed by CNC LINEAR OPTICAL ENCODER, HOME POSITION FEED, HOMING DIRECTION. ELECTRICAL PITCH PARAMETER Set as usual, keeping in mind that in this case the values NEED NOT be multiplied by four as in the analog interface, because the CNC interprets them directly as encoder pulses / motor revs.
Parameters: POSITION ERROR AT STAND STILL, POSITION ERROR WITH VFF, POSITION ERROR WITHOUT VFF and IN WAIT POSITION For reasons to do with the exchange of data, the following error calculated by the NC is nearly doubled. As a result, when setting the motor it is necessary to read the actual error from the drive using an ad hoc utility and to configure a double value, plus an error margin, in AMP. For the same reason, the entry into tolerance at movement end may last a few more sampling cycles than is customary. Moreover, we recommend filling all the entry into tolerance fields to ensure a finer synchronisation with the drive during movement starts and stops.
3-38
Physical Conn
Status :
Axis name a
-- P H Y S I C A L
C O N N E C T I O N S --
- board number - transducer - converter
:0 :0 :0
PHYSICAL CONN
This data entry allows to enter the information necessary for axis connection configuration. Board number (Board no. or Bridge address) Description: determines which board or OS-Wire Bridge device will control the axis. Range: min -1/max 61 Default value: 0 Unit type: none NOTE: A value of 1 is used to configure axes with local analog interface on OS8532 and 10/110 OS-Wire boards.
3-39
Transducer number Description: indicates the number of the transducer associated with the current axis, i.e., the number of the connector of the plate to which the axis is connected. To determine the correct value, see the table of resources in Chapter 3. Range: min 0/max 6 Default value: 0 Unit type: none NOTE: Zero means no transducer. For the axes controlled by a digital drive enter 0.
Converter number Description: indicates the number of the converter associated with the current axis. To determine the correct value, see the table of resources in Chapter 3. Range: min 0/max 8 Default value: 0 Unit type: none NOTE: Zero means no transducer. For the axes controlled by a digital drive enter 0.
3-40
Axis Calibration
Status :
Axis name a
(*)
Measuring unit = mm
Theoretical position (*) - 0 :0.00000 - 1 :0.00000
C A L I B R A T I O N -error (*) - 0 :0.00000 - 1 :0.00000
Page 1 of n BOOLEAN VAR AUX GEN INFO SHORT VAR SELECT AUX DOUBLE VAR AUX CHARACT PHYSICAL CONN HELP AXIS CALIBR EXIT
NOTE:
"n" depends on the number of calibration points configured.
This data entry allows the definition of the values required to calibrate the axis. For each point, a theoretical position and an error have to be fixed. For the intermediate positions, the system interpolates the error. For adjusting for the geometrical errors see the specific paragraph in Chapter 5. Theoretical position # (# = depends on axis calibration points) Description: determines the theoretical axis position Range: - linear axes: min -99999.99999/max +99999.99999 - rotational axes: min 0/max 359.99999 Default Value: 0 Units: - linear axes: mm or inch - rotational axes: degrees
3-41
Error # (# = depends on axis calibration points) Description: It defines the pitch compensation related to the theoretical position.. Range: Default value: 0 Unit type: - Linear axes: min -99999.99999/max +99999.99999 for linear axes - Rotary axes: min -359.99999/max + 359.99999 for rotary axes - Linear axes: mm or inches - Rotary axes: degrees
3-42
OPTIONS
By selecting this softkey, the operator can access the following sub-menu:
OPTIONS
Options sub menu
DOS REAL-TIME
END USER DOS
DOS GRAPHICS
HELP EXIT
These features are optional and will be enabled when the options are installed.
3-43
DOS Real-time
Status :
-- D O S
REAL
T I M E --
-Enable DOS REAL-TIME partition: N
DOS REAL TIME
END USER DOS
DOS GRAPHIC
HELP EXIT
Enable DOS REAL - TIME partition Description: lets you configure the optional software, that will be executed in the DOS REAL-TIME partition. Range: YES/NO Default: N Unit type: none See also the DOS REAL - TIME manual.
3-44
END User Dos

Status :
-- E N D
USER
D O S --
-Enable END USER DOS partition: N
DOS REAL TIME
END USER DOS
DOS GRAPHIC
HELP EXIT
Enable END USER DOS partition Description: lets you configure a Dos partition where the user can execute his own programs. Range: YES/NO Default value: N Unit type: None See also END USER DOS manual.
This partition can be configured, if the option is enabled, only for systems with 8 Mbyte of memory and standard operator panel. In all other cases, the softkey is not enabled.
3-45
DOS Graphics
Status :
-- D O S
G R A P H I C S -softkey label (max 24 alphanum.) -1 : -2 : -3 : -4 : -5 : -6 : -7 : -8 : -9 : - 10 :
program name (max 24 alphanum.) -1 : -2 : -3 : -4 : -5 : -6 : -7 : -8 : -9 : - 10 :
DOS REAL TIME
END USER DOS
DOS GRAPHIC
HELP EXIT
This option allows entry of user programs which will be executed as utilities when the corresponding softkey is pressed (under the utility menu). Program (#) name (# = 1..10) Description: It identifies the program name of the utility developed by the OEM (the extension can be COM, EXE or BAT. The name can contain also the path) that will be executed in DOS Graphics partition. Range: 24 char. Default value: none Unit type: none Softkey label # (# = 1..10) Description: It identifies the softkey that activates a program utility. Range: 14 char. Default value: none Unit type: none
END OF CHAPTER
3-46
Chapter
PROCESS CONFIGURATION
This chapter describes all the parameters used for the process configuration of the system. The operator can access this configuration environment by pressing the appropriate softkey in the main menu. After this selection, the screen will show the process configuration submenu with the corresponding list of parameters.
SELECT PROCESS
PROCESS CONFIG
Characterization process Data entry Select Process Sub menu Process Configuration
For each parameter we provide a short description, the permitted range, unit type and default value is provided. On multi-process systems, it is necessary to write the process number before accessing the process configuration submenu.
4-1
Chapter 4 Process Configuration
SELECT PROCESS
Status :
-- P R O C E S S
S E L E C T I O N --
process configured
:5
- select process (type code)
:1
OPTIONS
HELP EXIT
HUMAN INTERFACE
Select process Description: It is the number that identifies the process to be configured. Range: from 1 up to the maximum number of configured processes (see General Information) Default value: none Unit type: none
4-2
PROCESS CONFIG
Configuration process menu
GTL PROC CHAR
VIRTUAL AXES PROC VARIABLES
E PARAMETERS PROGR CHAR
USER VARIABLES M CODES
HELP G CODES EXIT
Process configuration submenu
Proc Char
Status : Process number 1 (*) measuring unit = mm
-- P R O C E S S
- process type - probing cycles - homing cycle type - E parameters number - M codes number - tool path optimization - Dynamic Modality - Velocity Factor - Jerk Time Constant - Circle Reduction Threshold - Circle Reduction Constant - Movement Modality - High Speed Machine - Alternative Interp. plane - Multi-Block Aux Function GTL PROC CHAR VIRTUAL AXES PROC VARIABLES
: MILL : DISABLE : MANUAL : 40 :0 :0 :0 : 0.80000 : 1.00000 : 0.00000 : 1.00000 :0 :N : : DISABLE E PARAMETERS PROGR CHAR USER VARIABLES M CODES
PROC CHAR (PAG. 1/3)
Page 1 of 3
HELP G. CODES EXIT
4-3
Status : Process number 1
-- U S E R
-1: -2: -3: -4: -5: -6: -7: -8: -9: - 10 : - 11 : - 12 : - 13 : - 14 : - 15 : - 16 : GTL PROC CHAR
VARIABLES
D E F I N I T I O N -elements number (0...1024) -1:0 -2:0 -3:0 -4:0 -5:0 -6:0 -7:0 -8:0 -9:0 - 10 : 0 - 11 : 0 - 12 : 0 - 13 : 0 - 14 : 0 - 15 : 0 - 16 : 0
name (max 11 alphanum.)
Page 2 of 3 USER VARIABLES M CODES HELP G. CODES EXIT
-- U S E R V A R I A B L E S D E F I N I T I O N -name (max 11 alphanum.) - 17 : - 18 : - 19 : - 20 : elements number (0...1024) - 17 : 0 - 18 : 0 - 19 : 0 - 20 : 0
Page 3 of 3 GTL PROC CHAR VIRTUAL AXES PROC VARIABLES E PARAMETERS PROGR CHAR USER VARIABLES M CODES HELP G. CODES EXIT
This data entry allows to define all the process-related parameters.
4-4
Process type Description: It defines whether the process is of the machining type (lathe, mill or grinding). Range: MILL/GRIND Default value: MILL Unit type: none Probing cycles Description: It enables or disables the probing cycles. Range: ENABLE/DISABLE Default value: DISABLE Unit type: none Homing cycle type Description: It specifies how to manage the homing cycle on the selected axes. In manual mode, the user must keep the cycle start key pressed until the end of the cycle. In automatic mode the user must press the cycle start key once and the homing cycle automatically continues until the end. Range: MANUAL/AUTOMATIC Default value: MANUAL Unit type: none
4-5
Number of E parameters Description: It defines how many E parameters are available for the selected process. E parameters allow geometrical and technological data to be programmed in machining cycles and are used in mathematical and trigonometric operations. Range: min 0/max 8000 Default value: 40 Unit type: none
A high value signifies a large amount of memory occupied
Number of M codes Description: It defines how many M codes are available for the selected process. Range: min 0/max 200 Default value: 0 Unit type: none
4-6
Tool path optimization Description: allows optimization of the tool path with G41 or G42 active. For further information on the functions of this algorithm see the Programming Manual. Range: 0/255 bit 0 bit 1 bit 2 bit 3 and 4 bit 5 bit 6 Default value: 0 Unit type: none Dynamic Modality (choice of calculation modalities of the exit speed in G27) Description: allows to choose one of the two calculation modalities of the exit speed for each movement in a profile executed in G27. For further information see the Programmer Guide. Range: 03 Default value: 0 Unit type: none Velocity Factor Description: It defines a factor for calculating the speed on the edges, if G27 mode is enabled. Range: min 0.001/max 99999.99999 Default value: 0.8 Unit type: none Jerk Time Constant Description: it determines how to manage acceleration during the non linear ramps (MOV=2). If the field is set to 1 the acceleration is kept as precisely as possible equal to the acceleration configured for the axis. By diminishing this value you increase acceleration and reduce feed execution time. If you increase this value you diminish acceleration but increase the execution time of the feed which is then softer. This value is also used for managing the speed variation with the Feed Override selector (MOV=2 and MOV=8). Range: min 0.5/max 50 Default value: 1.0 Unit type: none = insertion of join movements between bodies = profile tangent entry/exit = enabling profile inversion = enabling the algorithm for keeping the machining speed constant in G41/G42. = enters circular movements linking the entities. = enters circular movements on the inner corner
4-7
Circle Reduction Threshold Description: defines the value of the radius to be applied in speed reduction algorithms on circular entities. The sign of the radius determines the type of algorithm used. Range: min 99999.99999/max 99999.99999 Default value: 0 Unit type: mm/inches Circle Reduction Constant Description: It is a constant used for calculating the speed on circles if speed reduction on circular entities is requested (Circle Reduction Threshold >0) Range: min 0/max 99999.99999 Default value: 1 Unit type: none Movement Modality Description: It defines the mode for executing movements. For more information see the Programming Manual. Range: min 0/max 255 Default value: 0 Unit type: none High Speed Machine (High speed interpolation) Description: enables the use of the high speed interpolation algorithms. Variation field: Y/N Default value: N Unit type: none Alternative Interpolation Plane Description: this uses the indicated axes to define the default interpolation plane to be used instead of the one defined by G17, G18 or G19. In this case the system forces G16 at start-up and uses as axes those defined in this field ignoring G17/G18/G19 (present in the G codes section). Multi-Block Aux Function (Auxiliary Functions during Multi-Block Retrace) Description: enables the issuing of auxiliary functions during Multi-Block Retrace in the forward phase Variation field: ENABLE/DISABLE Default value: DISABLE
4-8
Name # (# = number of user variables) Description: It defines the name of the user variable. The format is !NNNNNNN.TT, where !NNNNNNN is the actual name and TT is the type (LR, Long real, or CH, Character). User variables can be adopted by the user instead of E parameters in order to render the program easier to understand. Range: 11 char. Default value: none Unit type: none Elements number # (# = number of user variables) Description: It defines the number of elements associated with each configured user variable. It is mandatory when the variable is used as an array. Range: min 0/max 1024 Default value: 0 Unit type: none
Proc Variables
-- P R O C E S S
- Decelerat. Look-Ahead - Velocity Feed Forward - Block delete - Optional Stop - Rapid Override Control - Program Scroll - Max Deviation Angle - Dwell Time - Spindle Speed Limit - Tapping Return - Circle EndPoint Toler. - Full Circle Threshold - Arc Modality - Calculation accuracy - Tool optimization threshold - Null motion threshold GTL PROC CHAR
V A R I A B L E S -- DLA - VFF - DSB : ENABLE : ENABLE : DISABLE : DISABLE : DISABLE : ENABLE - MDA (degr) : 90.00000 - DWT (s) : 0.00000 - SSL (RPM) : 0.00000 - TRP (%) : 100 - CET : 0.01000 - FCT : 0.00100 - ARM :0 (*) : 0.00100 (*) : 0.10000 (*) : 0.0010000 E PARAMETERS PROGR CHAR USER VARIABLES M CODES
PROC CHAR (PAGE 1/2)
Page 1 of 2 HELP G. CODES EXIT
This data entry allows the user to set the default values of the system variables.
4-9
Status :
-- P R O C E S S
- G Paramacro - S Paramacro - T Paramacro - M Paramacro - Thoroidal radius enable - Tapping constant vel. gain - Tapping acceleration gain - Tool path angle - Curve optimization time -Max error form -Manual operating modality -Motion aux parameter -Tool contact mode -Tool contact orientation
V A R I A B L E S -:N :N :N :N :N : 1.0000 : 1.0000 : 90 : 0.0 : 0.0 :0 :0 :0 : 90.0 Page 2 of 2
- PMS - PMT - PMM - TTR - TKG - TAG - TPA - CRV - ERF - MOM - MOA
GTL PROC CHAR
HELP G. CODES EXIT
4-10
Deceleration look ahead (DLA) Description: It enables/disables the look ahead function, that allows the part program to test profile and perform the necessary deceleration. Range: ENABLE/DISABLE Default value: ENABLE Unit type: none Velocity feed forward (VFF) Description: it enables/disables velocity feed forward. Range: ENABLE/DISABLE Default value: ENABLE Unit type: none Block delete (DSB) Description: It enables/disables the execution of program blocks preceded by "/" Range: ENABLE/DISABLE Default value: DISABLE Unit type: none Optional stop Description: It enables/disables the execution of condition cycle stop configurable in M codes. Range: ENABLE/DISABLE Default value: DISABLE Unit type: none Rapid override control Description: It enables/disables the rapid feed override during movements in rapid mode (G0). Range: ENABLE/DISABLE Default value: DISABLE Unit type: none Program scroll Description: It enables/disables the part program scrolling on the main screen. Range: ENABLE/DISABLE Default value: ENABLE Unit type: none
4-11
Max deviation angle (MDA) Description: It is the maximum angular axis departure in which G27 is active. The selected value is a numeric value (angle or direction cosine) that represents the operation limit for G27. An angle departure greater than this angle will be executed in G29 or point-to-point mode. For more information see the Programming Manual. Range: min 0/max 180 Default value: 90 Unit type: deg or direction cosine (according to the mode selected). Dwell time (DWT) Description: It assigns a dwell time at the end of the block (it is the dwell time used for G04 and in fixed cycle blocks). Range: min 0/max 60 Default value: 0 Unit type: sec Spindle speed limit (SSL) Description: It is used in G96 to define the maximum RPM for the spindle rotating at constant surface speed. Range: min 0/max 99999.99999 Default value: 0 Unit type: rpm Tapping return (TRP) Description: It is the percentage of feedrate variation used in the return phase of the tapping cycle. Range: min 0/max 125 Default value: 100 Unit type: % Circle endpoint toler. (CET) Description: It defines the precision within which must be the absolute difference between the initial and final radius of the programmed arc of circle. Range: min 0.00001/max 99.99999 Default value : 0.01 Unit type: mm/inches (depends on the configured unit of measurement)
4-12
Full circle threshold (FCT) Description: It defines threshold of the distance between initial and final point of an arc of circle. Range: min 0.00001/max 99.99999 Default value: 0.001 Unit type: mm/inches (depends on the configured unit of measurement) Arc modality (ARM) Description: It defines 4 different modality to apply to a programmed arc to make it valid for a circular interpolation. Range: min 0/max 3 Default value: 0 Unit type: none Calculation accuracy Description: It is the precision used for the calculus of the tool path (i.e. Intersection of geometrical elements in radius compensation). Range: min 0.00001/max 10 Default value: 0.001 Unit type: mm/inches (depends on the configured measuring unit) Tool optimization threshold Description: It is the minimum allowed distance between the tool cutter and the workpiece. Range: min 0.0/max 99999.99999 Default value: 0.1 Unit Type: mm/inches (depends on the configured measuring unit) Null motion threshold Description: It is the minimum possible movements on profile. Programmed values below this threshold do not generate any movements. Range: min 0.0000001/max 99.99999 Default value: 0.001 Unit type: mm/inches (depends on the configured measuring unit)
4-13
Paramacro G Description: Enables/disables the use of standard type paramacros. The paramacros are subroutines of the part program, defined by the OEM, which can be recalled by the part program through parameters, as if they were fixed cycles. Variation range: YES/NO Default value: N Unit type: none Paramacro S (PMS) Description: Enables/disables the use of the paramacros associated with the S functions. The paramacros are sub-routines of the part program, defined by the OEM, which can be recalled by the part program through parameters, as if they were fixed cycles. Variation range: YES/NO Default value: N Unit type: none Paramacro T (PMT) Description: Enables/disables the use of the paramacros associated with the T functions. The paramacros are sub-routines of the part program, defined by the OEM, which can be recalled by the part program through parameters, as if they were fixed cycles. Variation range: YES/NO Default value: N Unit type: none Paramacro M (PMM) Description: Enables/disables the use of the paramacros associated with the M functions. The paramacros are sub-routines of the part program, defined by the OEM, which can be recalled by the part program through parameters, as if they were fixed cycles. Variation range: YES/NO Default value: N Unit type: none Toroidal radius enable (Enables toroidal tool edge radius) Description: Enables/disables the use of length 2 in the offset table as edge radius of a toroidal tool (see TCP). Variation range: YES/NO Default value: N Unit type: none
4-14
Curve optimization time (CRV) Description: time to calculate the radius of curvature of a contour defined by points. Range: min 0/max 20 Default value: 0 (deactivated) Unit type: milliseconds Max error form (ERF) Description: maximum error accepted during a movement with media mobile filter active. Range: min 0/max 99999.99999 Default value: 0 (deactivated) Unit type: mm/inches (according to the measure set) Manual operating modality (MOM) Description: defines bit by bit several manual movements modes. Range: min 0/max 255 Default value: 0 (deactivated) Unit type: none Motion aux parameter (MOA) Description: defines bit by bit general options for movements Range: min 0/max 255 Default value: 0 (deactivated) Unit type: none Tool contact mode Description: sets the tool compensation used by G41/G42 codes and can have the following values: 0 = tool diameter compensation, default 1 = thickness tool compensation Range: min 0/max 1 Default value: 0 (diameter compensation active) Unit type: none
4-15
Tool contact orientation Description: with Tool contact mode = 1, is the angle (a) between the tool and the abscissa of the interpolation plane. The default value is 90, it means when the tool is vertical with the head down.
Ordinate
Tool versor
Sin(a) a Abscissa Cos(a)

Variation range: min 0/max 360 Default value: 90 Unit type: degrees
Tapping Constant velocity gain (TKG) for rigid tapping Description: gain to be applied during rigid tapping. This is used to ensure correct axis synchronization with spindle rotation during the tapping process. For further details, see also "Rigid tapping parameter calculations" in Chapter 1. Variation range: min -99999.99999/max 99999.99999 Default value: 1 Unit type: none Tapping acceleration gain (TAG) for rigid tapping Description: gain to be applied during rigid tapping. This is used to ensure correct axis synchronisation with spindle rotation during the acceleration (approach) stages. For further details, see also "Rigid tapping parameter calculations" in Chapter 1. Variation range: min -99999.99999/max 99999.99999 Default value: 1 Unit type: none Tool path angle (TPA) (Maximum angle for the management of the corner)
4-16
Description: angle below which the tool path optimisation strategy is applied. Variation range: 1-179 default 90 Type of unit: degrees
4-17
Progr Char
-- P R O G R A M
C H A R A C T E R I S T I C S -:8 :0 : 10 : 10 :0 :0
- number of precalculated blocks - number of retrace blocks - number of sub-program - number of labels - number of contouring blocks - number of extra blocks
GTL PROC CHAR
HELP G. CODES EXIT
This data entry allows the user to configure the size of the internal buffers used for precalculation, multiblock retrace, subroutines called by part program, and labels in part program. Number of precalculated blocks Description: It is the number of blocks processed in continuous motion. Range: min 2/max 64 Default value: 8 Unit type: none
In case of the use of non linear ramps it is advised to use a value >=8. For
lower values there could be some misfunctioning during the continuing movement.
Number of retrace blocks Description: It is the maximum number of motion blocks executable with multiblock retrace. A null value disables the function. Range: min 0/max 64 Default value: 0 Unit type: none
4-18
Number of sub-programs Description: It is the maximum number of different sub-programs that it is possible to call within a part program. Range: min 1/max 900 Default value: 10 Unit type: none
A high value implies a large amount of memory occupied
Number of labels Description: It is the maximum number of labels present in a part program (including subroutines). Range: min 1/max 5000 Default value: 10 Unit type: none
Number of contourning blocks Description: It defines the number of blocks for a profile that can be used for automatic contourning o for rough-shaping macro-cycles. Range: min 0/max 1400. Default value: 0 Unit type: none
4-19
Number of extra blocks Description : defines the number of blocks to be added to those entered in the Number of precalculated blocks field. The resulting total represents the number of blocks processed during continuous movement and can vary from 2 to 128 . Range: min 0/ max 126 Default Value: 0 Units: none
A high value entails a high memory occupancy
4-20
M Codes
-- M
C O D E S -: M0 : POSTLUDE :Y :Y :N :N :N :Y :Y :N :N :0 :0 :N :N
- M code number - activation mode - allowed in hold - visualization - display of modal function - display after reset - forced conditional blk/blk - forced blk/blk - stop block calculation - tool offset change - reset after execution - display class number - search in memory class - allowed in continuos - paramacro execution
*
Page 1 of n
GTL PROC CHAR
HELP G. CODES EXIT
This data entry allows the user to configure each M code allowed by the system and all the parameters related to the M code management. NOTE:
"n" represents the number of M functions declared in PROC CHAR. (Each M function is displayed on one video page)
M code number Description: It defines the configured M code number. Range: min 0/max 999 Default value: 0 Unit type: none
4-21
Activation mode Description: It defines one of three types of activation mode: PRELUDE (M code activated at the beginning of the axes motion), POSTLUDE (M code activated at the end of the axes motion) or EXPEDITE (M code activated immediately after it has been decoded during the axis movement) Range: PRELUDE/POSTLUDE/EXPEDITE Default value: POSTLUDE Unit type: none Allowed in hold Description: It indicates whether the M code is accepted by the system in hold status. Range: YES/NO Default value: Y Unit type: none Visualization Description: It tells whether the M code must be displayed. Range: YES/NO Default value: Y Unit type: none Display of modal function Description: It defines whether the M code must remain on the screen after the execution of the block where it is programmed. If not the M code disappear at the end of the block execution. It must be NO if the activation mode is EXPEDITE. Range: YES/NO Default value: N Unit type: none Display after reset Description: It defines whether the M code has to be displayed after a reset. It must be set to NO if the activation mode is EXPEDITE. Range: YES/NO Default value: N Unit type: none
4-22
Forced conditional blk/blk Description: It defines whether the M code has to force optional program stop conditioned by "Optional stop" enable/disable in the process variables configuration. It can be set to YES if the activation mode is POSTLUDE. Range: YES/NO Default value: N Unit type: none Forced blk/blk Description: It defines whether the M code has to force program stop at the end of the block. It can be set to YES only if the activation mode is POSTLUDE. Range: YES/NO Default value: Y Unit type: none Stop block calculation Description: When it is set to YES, the M code stops the internal calculation of forthcoming blocks.It can be set to YES only if the activation mode is POSTLUDE. Range: YES/NO Default value: Y Unit type: none Tool offset change Description: It allows the tool offset change cycle. It can only be set to YES when "Stop block calculation" is set to YES. Range: YES/NO Default value: N Unit type: none
4-23
Reset after execution Description: When it is set to YES, the M code allows an automatic reset after it has been executed. It can be set to YES only if the activation mode is POSTLUDE. Range: YES/NO Default value: N Unit type: none Display class number Description: It defines how to group M functions for visualization on the screen. Range: min 0/max 15 Default value: 0 Unit type: none Search in memory class Description: determines how to group the M functions for the search in memory feature. Range: min 0/max 15 Default value: 0 Unit type: none Allowed in continuous Description: allows accepted or otherwise of the M function in continuous mode. Range: YES/NO Default: N Unit type: none Paramacro execution Description: makes it possible to run function M as a paramacro. Variation range: YES/NO Default value: N Unit type: none
4-24
G Codes
-- G
C O D E S -: G0 : G17 : G27 : G71 : G90 : G94 : G97
- type of motion - interpolation plane - dynamic mode - measuring units - axes position programming mode - feed programming mode - spindle programming mode
GTL PROC CHAR
HELP G. CODES EXIT
This data entry allows the user to configure the power turn on default G codes for recalling the correspondent paramacro sub routines. Types of motion Description: The G functions in this class make it possible to define the basic types of movement: G0 G1 rapid axis positioning; linear interpolation.
Range: G0/G1 Default value: G0 Unit type: none
4-25
Interpolation plane Description: It defines the active interpolation plane. G17 G18 G19 1 and 2 axis 3 and 1 axis 2 and 3 axis (Typically XY) (Typically ZX) (Typically YZ)
If the alternative interpolation plane is present, this field will be ignored (see Alternative Interpolation Plane).
Range: G17/G18/G19 Default value: G17 Unit type: none Dynamic mode Description: It defines the characteristics of axis motion at the intersection of the elements of a profile. G27 G28 G29 continuous motion with automatic speed reduction on corners continuous motion without speed reduction point to point motion.
Range: G27/G28/G29 Default value: G27 Unit type: none Measuring units Description: It defines the power TURN ON default programming unit of the process: G70 inches G71 mm Range: G70/G71 Default value: G71 Unit type: none
4-26
Axes Position Programming mode Description: It defines the power TURN ON default programming mode of the process: G90 G91 absolute mode incremental mode (movements referred to the current origin) (movements referred to the position reached with the previous movement).
Range: G90/G91 Default value: G90 Unit type: none Feed programming mode Description: It defines the feedrate units: G93 defines feedrate as the velocity/distance ratio (expressed in minutes) G94 defines feedrate in mm/min, inches/min or degrees/min G95 defines feedrate in mm/rev or inches/rev. NOTE: Typically G94 is used for milling processes and G95 for turning processes. Range: G93/G94/G95 Default value: G94 Unit type: none Spindle programming mode Description: It defines the modality for spindle programming mode at system power up G96 G97 activates constant surface speed programming (CSS) for the S function (typically for turning processes); activates RPM programming for the S function (typically for milling processes).
Range: G96/G97 Default value: G97 Unit type: none
4-27
GTL (Geometrical Technological Language)

This data entry is used to configure the maximum number of objects that can be defined in GTL language.
-- G E O M E T R I C A L
- number of definible origins - number of definible points - number of definible lines - number of definible circles
TECHNOLOGICAL
:0 :0 :0 :0
L A N G U A G E --
GTL PROC CHAR
HELP G. CODES EXIT
Number of definible origins Description: identifies the number of origins that can be defined in GTL. Range: min 0/ max 100 Default value: 0 Unit type: none Number of definible points Description: identifies the number of points that can be defined in GTL. Range: min 0/ max 1000 Default value: 0 Unit type: none
4-28
Number of definible lines Description: identifies the number of lines that can be defined in GTL. Range: min 0/ max 1000 Default value: 0 Unit type: none Number of definible circles Description: identifies the number of circles that can be defined in GTL. Range: min 0/ max 1000 Default value: 0 Unit type: none
4-29
Virtual Axes
-- V I R T U A L
- first virtual axis id - second virtual axis id - third virtual axis id - fourth virtual axis id - tool direction axis name
AXES
:0 :0 :0 : :
GTL PROC CHAR
HELP G. CODES EXIT
This data entry allows to configure the virtual axes. Data entry is active only on the first four processes. First virtual axis id Description: identifier of the first virtual axis. If the value is 0, the process has no virtual axes. Range: 032 Default value: 0 Unit type: none Second virtual axis id Description: identifier of the second virtual axis. If the value is 0, the process does not have the second virtual axis. Range: 032 Default value: 0 Unit type: none
4-30
Third virtual axis id Description: identifier of the third virtual axis. If the value is 0, the process does not have the third virtual axis Range: 032 Default value: 0 Unit type: none Fourth virtual axis Description: identifier of the fourth virtual axis. If the value is 0, the process does not have the fourth virtual axis. Range: 032 Default value: 0 Unit type: none Tool direction axis name Description: It is the virtual axis name connected to the movements along the tool direction. Range: Capital letter chosen between XYZABCUVWPQD. The name must be different from all the other coordinated axis of the selected process. Default value: none Unit type: none
4-31
E Parameters
-- E
PARAMETERS
SET
UP --
value (-99999.99999...+99999.99999) - 0 :0.00000 - 1 :0.00000 - 2 :0.00000 - 3 :0.00000 - 4 :0.00000 - 5 :0.00000 - 6 :0.00000 - 7 :0.00000 - 8 :0.00000 - 9 :0.00000 - 10 :0.00000 - 11 :0.00000 - 12 :0.00000 - 13 :0.00000 - 14 :0.00000 - 15 :0.00000 GTL PROC CHAR VIRTUAL AXES PROC VARIABLES
value (-99999.99999...+99999.99999) - 16 :0.00000 - 17 :0.00000 - 18 :0.00000 - 19 :0.00000 - 20 :0.00000 - 21 :0.00000 - 22 :0.00000 - 23 :0.00000 - 24 :0.00000 - 25 :0.00000 - 26 :0.00000 - 27 :0.00000 - 28 :0.00000 - 29 :0.00000 - 30 :0.00000 - 31 :0.00000 Page 1 of n E PARAMETERS PROGR CHAR USER VARIABLES M CODES HELP G. CODES EXIT
This data entry allows the E parameters to be configured. NOTE:
"n" depends on the number of E parameters configured in PROC CHAR.
E # (# = 0..8000) (E # [# = 0..8000]) Description: It defines the value of the E parameters . Range: min -99999.99999/max +99999.99999 Default value: 0 Unit type: none
4-32
User Variables
Status : name 1 name 2 name 3 name 4 name 5 name 6 name 7 name 8 name 9 name 10 name 11 name 12 name 13 name 14 name 15 Process number 1
-- U S E R
: !UV1.LR : !UV2.CH : : : : : : : : : : : : :
VARIABLES
S E L E C T I O N -elements 1 elements 2 elements 3 elements 4 elements 5 elements 6 elements 7 elements 8 elements 9 elements 10 elements 11 elements 12 elements 13 elements 14 elements 15 : 10 : 10 :0 :0 :0 :0 :0 :0 :0 :0 :0 :0 :0 :0 :0 Page 1 of 2 E PARAMETERS PROGR CHAR USER VARIABLES M CODES HELP G. CODES EXIT
- select variable name : !UV1.LR GTL PROC CHAR VIRTUAL AXES PROC VARIABLES
-- U S E R
name 16 name 17 name 18 name 19 name 20 : : : : :
VARIABLES
S E L E C T I O N -elements 16 elements 17 elements 18 elements 19 elements 20 :0 :0 :0 :0 :0
- select variable name : GTL PROC CHAR VIRTUAL AXES PROC VARIABLES E PARAMETERS PROGR CHAR USER VARIABLES M CODES
Page 2 of 2 HELP G. CODES EXIT
4-33
Status : Process number 1 User Variable name !UV1.LR
-- U S E R
VARIABLES
SET
U P --
value (-99999.99999...+99999.99999)
- 0 : 0.00000 - 1 : 0.00000 - 2 : 0.00000 - 3 : 0.00000 - 4 : 0.00000 - 5 : 0.00000 - 6 : 0.00000 - 7 : 0.00000 - 8 : 0.00000 - 9 : 0.00000
*
Page 1 of n GTL PROC CHAR VIRTUAL AXES PROC VARIABLES E PARAMETERS PROGR CHAR USER VARIABLES M CODES HELP G. CODES EXIT
Status :
Process number 1 User Variable name !UV2.CH
-- U S E R
VARIABLES
SET
U P --
value (character or value < = 255)
-0: -1: -2: -3: -4: -5: -6: -7: -8: -9:
*
Page 1 of n GTL PROC CHAR VIRTUAL AXES PROC VARIABLES E PARAMETERS PROGR CHAR USER VARIABLES M CODES HELP G. CODES EXIT
NOTE:
"n" depends on the number of elements configured in "PROC CHAR".
4-34
These data entries allow to configure the user-defined variables. Select variable name Description: It requests the operator to enter the desired variable name, defined in PROC CHAR data entry. If the extention is "LR" or "CH" it will open the appropriate data entry, as in previous figure. Range: depends on configured user variables Default value: none Unit type: none
4-35
END OF CHAPTER
4-36
Chapter
AXIS CONFIGURATION
This chapter describes all the parameters for axis configuration of the system. The user can access the axis configuration environment by pressing the appropriate softkey in the main menu. For each parameter a short description, of the permitted range, the units and the default value is provided.
AXIS CONFIGURATION
Characterisation menu Men di caratterizzazione
Axes configuration sub-menu Sotto men configurazione asse
AXES GEN INFO SELECT AXIS
PSEUDO AXES AXIS CHARACT
SPINDLE AXIS CALIBR
PROBING
HELP PHYSICAL CONN EXIT
Axis Configuration Submenu
5-1
Chapter 5 Axis Configuration
Axis General Information

-- C O O R D I N A T E
axis identifier - id 1 : 1 - id 2 : 2 - id 3 : 3 - id 4 : - id 5 : - id 6 : - id 7 : - id 8 : - id 9 : - spindle (Y/N/S) : y - spindle identifier : 4
AXES
GENERAL
I N F O -tool offset - offset 1 : - offset 2 : - offset 3 : - offset 4 : - offset 5 : - offset 6 : - offset 7 : - offset 8 : - offset 9 :
coordinate name - axis 1 : X - axis 2 : Y - axis 3 : Z - axis 4 : - axis 5 : - axis 6 : - axis 7: - axis 8 : - axis 9 :
parametric name - axis 1 : X - axis 2 : Y - axis 3 : Z - axis 4 : - axis 5 : - axis 6 : - axis 7: - axis 8 : - axis 9 :
- interpolar clock (ms) : 10
page 1 of 2 AXES GEN INFO SELECT AXIS PSEUDO AXES AXIS CHARACT SPINDLE AXIS CALIBR PROBING HELP PHYSICAL CONN EXIT
-- S L A V E
axis identifier - id 1 : 5 - id 2 : - id 3 : - id 4 : - id 5 : - id 6 : - id 7 : - id 8 : - id 9 :
AXES
GENERAL
I N F O --
slave name - axis 1 : x - axis 2 : - axis 3 : - axis 4 : - axis 5 : - axis 6 : - axis 7: - axis 8 : - axis 9 :
page 2 of 2 AXES GEN INFO SELECT AXIS PSEUDO AXES AXIS CHARACT SPINDLE AXIS CALIBR PROBING CROSS COMP HELP PHYSICAL CONN EXIT
5-2
This data entry allows the user to declare the coordinated axes with their parametric name, the slave axes, the spindle, the relationship between tool length and axis, and the interpolator period. Axis identifier # (# = 1..9) Description: it is a user defined number, unique in the system, used by the logic program to identify an axis. Range: min 1/max 32 Default value: 1 (axis 1)/2 (axis 2)/3 (axis 3)/none (axes 4..9) Unit type: none Coordinate name # (# = 1..9) Description: it allows the user to define the name of the coordinated axes and their order. Range: X/Y/Z/A/B/C/U/V/W/P/Q/D Default value: X (axis 1)/Y (axis 2)/Z (axis 3)/none (axes 4..9) Unit type: none Parametric name # (# = 1..9) Description: it is a name that sets a correspondence between the physical axis name, configured in the same row as "coordinate axis name", and the axis name used in the part program. It is not allowed to assign the same parametric name to move than one coordinate axis. Range: X/Y/Z/A/B/C/U/V/W/P/Q/D Default value: X (axis 1)/Y (axis 2)/Z (axis 3)/none (axes 4..9) Unit type: none Tool offset Description: It defines the relationship between the configured axis and the tool lenght (1 or 2) stored in the tool offset table. When the tool offset is activated, its lenght (1 or 2) is applied to the axis. The sign "_" before the number (-1, -2) means that the lenght must be applied to the axis in the opposite direction. Range: 1/2 Default value: none Unit type: none
5-3
Spindle Description: It defines whether there is a spindle or not and whether it is shared with other processes (field = S). If the spindle is shared, it must be declared with Yes in one process and with Shared in the other processes. Range: YES/NO/SHARED Default value: Y Unit type: none Spindle identifier Description: It is a user defined number used by the logic program to identify a spindle. If the spindle is shared, the same identifier which is used in the process where Spindle = Yes has been declared must be used. Range: min 1/max 32 Default value: 4 Unit type: none Interpolator clock Description: it supplies the sampling rate of the interpolator for the group of coordinate axes. The interpolator clock pulse must be equal to or a multiple of the position loop clock. Range: min 2/max 200 Default value: 10 Unit type: msec Axis identifier # (#=1..9) Description: It is a user defined number, unique in the system and used by the logic program to identify an axis. Range: min 1/max 32 Default value: none Unit type: none Slave names # (#=1..9) Description: It lets the user define the name of a slave axis. This is simply a symbolic name used to identify the slave axes during axis configuration with AMP. Range: x/y/a/b/c/u/v/w/p/q/d/ Default value: none Unit type: none
5-4
Pseudo Axes
-- P S E U D O
pseudo axis name - axis 1 : - axis 2 : - axis 3 : - axis 4 : - axis 5 : - axis 6 :
A X E S --
SPINDLE AXIS CALIBR
PROBING
This data entry allows the user to configure the pseudo axes used in a part program to transfer data directly to the logic. Pseudo axis # name (# = 1..6) Description: it is the pseudo axis identifier (these names must be different from those assigned to coordinate axes). Range: X/Y/Z/A/B/C/U/V/W/P/Q/D Default value: none Unit type: none
5-5
Spindle
-- S P I N D L E -- spindle board number - spindle transducer number - offset for spindle orient. - position error ad stand still - in position band - in position wait (time out) - in position window - spindle converter number - spindle with acc/dec ramp - max spindle reversal time - gear used for reversal time - electrical pitch - mechanical pitch - master axis for CSS - speed for orientation - accelerat. for orient. : : (deg) : (deg) : (deg) : (s) : (s) : : : (s) : : (pulses/rev) : (rev) : : (RPM) : (rev/s x s) : 0 0 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0 N 1 1 5000 1.00000 60.00 60.00 page 1 of n AXES GEN INFO SELECT AXIS PSEUDO AXES AXIS CHARACT SPINDLE AXIS CALIBR PROBING HELP PHYSICAL CONN EXIT
-- S P I N D L E -- channel A polarity inversion - channel B polarity inversion - channel Z polarity inversion - direction count - marker detection - Digital axiss - speed stop threshold (RPM) :N :N :N : POSITIVE : LEVEL :N : 0.00
page 2 of n AXES GEN INFO SELECT AXIS PSEUDO AXES AXIS CHARACT SPINDLE AXIS CALIBR PROBING HELP PHYSICAL CONN EXIT
5-6
-- S P I N D L E -max speed - gear 1 (RPM): 4000.00000 - gear 2 (RPM): 4000.00000 - gear 3 (RPM): 4000.00000 - gear 4 (RPM): 4000.00000 - stand still servo loop gain : 1.00 voltage for max RPM gear 1 (Volt): 7.500 gear 2 (Volt): 7.500 gear 3 (Volt): 7.500 gear 4 (Volt): 7.500 servo loop gain gear 1 : 1.00 gear 2 : 1.00 gear 3 : 1.00 gear 4 : 1.00
-- D I G I T A L S P I N D L E C H A R A C T E R I ZA T I O N --
- driver address - standard telegram - homing type - additional services - drive use motor transducer (Y/N) - probing configuration
:1 :5 :1 :0 :Y :0
page 4 of 4 BOOLEAN VAR AUX GEN INFO SHORT VAR SELECT AUX DOUBLE VAR AUX CHARACT HELP AXIS CALIBR EXIT
PHYSICAL CONN
NOTE: "n" depends on whether or not the answer in the "digital axis" field was "Y"- page 4 of spindle characterization will be opened only if it was. These data entries allow the configuration of the spindle with/without transducer and with/without ramp.
5-7
Spindle board number Description: it defines the number of the spindle board. Range: min -1/max 3 Default value: 0 Unit type: none NOTE: Set a value of 1 to configure a spindle with local analog interface on boards OS8532 and 10/110 OS-Wire. Spindle transducer number Description: it defines the spindle transducer number that is the connector number of the board which the spindle is connected to. (0 means that no transducer is present). For spindles controlled by D.S.I. digital drives, enter the value 0. Range: min 0/max 6 Default value: 0 Unit type: none NOTE: To determine the correct value, see the table of resources in Chapter 3. Offset for spindle orientation Description: it is the distance between the spindle marker position and the orient position 0. Range: min -359.99999/max +359.99999 Default value: 0 Unit type: deg Position error at stand still Description: it is the maximum position error allowed when the spindle is oriented. Range: min 0/max 359.99999 Default value: 0 Unit type: deg
5-8
In position band Description: it is the tolerance around the programmed end-point within which the spindle motion is considered finished. A null value disables the tolerance check. Range: min 0/max 359.99999 Default value: 0 Unit type: deg In position wait Description: it is the maximum time allowed for the spindle starting from the end of theoretical moviment, to be brought within and to stay inside the "in position band" area. This parameter could be used during orientation phase (see chap. 1). (value <= In position window). Range: min 0/max 65.535 Default value: 0 Unit type: sec In position window Description: it is the time for the spindle to remain within the "In position band" (position tolerance) to consider the movement completed. Range:min 0/max 65.535 Default value: 0 Unit type: sec Spindle converter number Description: it defines the number of the spindle converter. For spindles controlled by D.S.I. digital drives, enter the value 0. To determine the correct value, see the table of resources in Chapter 3. Range: min 0/max 6 Default value: 0 Unit type: none Spindle with acc/dec ramp Description: it allows control of the change of speed through an acceleration/deceleration ramp. Range: YES/NO Default value: N Unit type: none
5-9
Max spindle reversal time Description: it defines the maximum time allowed for the spindle to change from the maximum CW speed to the maximum CCW speed. Range: min 0.001/max 99999.99999 Default value: 1 Unit type: sec Gear used for reversal time Description: it defines the gear used during the maximum spindle reversal time. Range: min 1/max 4 Default value: 1 Unit type: none Electrical pitch Description: it is the number of pulses per revolution supplied by the transducer. In the case of analog spindles, the value to be entered is multiplied by 4. For example, if the encoder supplies 1250 pulses/rev, the value to be entered will be 5000 pulses. In the case of D.S.I. digital spindles, see Notes on the characterisation of digital drives at end of paragraph. Range: min 1/max 100000 Default value: 5000 Unit type: pulses Mechanical pitch Description: it is the distance covered by the spindle for each electrical cycle of the relevant transducer. Range: min 0.001/max 99999.99999 Default value: 1 Unit type: rev Master axis for CSS Description: it is the name of the axis to which the spindle is related for Constant Surface Speed. Example: x-axis on a lathe. Range: X/Y/Z/A/B/C/U/V/W/P/Q/D Default value: none Unit type: none
5-10
Speed for orientation Description: it is the spindle speed threshold (expressed in RPM ) below which the orientation algorithm is activated. Range: min 0.1/max 9999.99 Default value: 60 Unit type: rpm Acceleration for orientation Description: it defines the maximum acceleration of the interpolator during orientation. Range: min 0.1/max 9999.99 Default value: 60 2 Unit type: rev/sec Channel A polarity inversion Description: it is the polarity select parameter for channel A (encoder mode only). When this parameter is set to YES, the logic signal presented to the channel A input will be inverted. Range: YES/NO Default value: N Unit type: none Channel B polarity inversion Description: it is the polarity select parameter for channel B (encoder mode only). When this parameter is set to YES, the logic signal presented to the channel B input will be inverted. Range: YES/NO Default value: N Unit type: none
5-11
Channel Z polarity inversion Description: it is the polarity select parameter for channel Z. When this parameter is set to YES, the logic signal presented to the channel Z input will be inverted. Range: YES/NO Default value: N Unit type: none Direction count Description: it defines the counting direction of the counter. Range: POSITIVE/NEGATIVE Default value: POSITIVE Unit type: none Marker detection Description: it defines the marker detection. If it is set to LEVEL, the axis position register is cleared whenever the prescribed logic levels are present on the channels A, B, Z. If it is set to EDGE, the register will be cleared whenever the Z marker has a valid transition. Warning: if LEVEL the polarity of the channel syncronized with S MUST NOT BE INVERTED.
See also the Axis board section in the "10 Series CNC Installation Guide" to select the marker defection correctly. Range: EDGE/LEVEL Default value: LEVEL Unit type: none Digital Axis Description: determines whether the current axis is driven by a D.S.I. digital drive. Range: YES/NO Default: N Unit type: none
5-12
Speed stop threshold (RPM) Description: it is the speed value below which the spindle is considered stopped. It is advisable to set a value other than 0 in this field, for instance 1, to ensure a smoother transition when shifting from speed to position control. Range: 0/9999.99 Default value: 0 Unit type: RPM Max speed for gear # (# = 1..4) Description : it defines the maximum speed when the spindle rotates at gear # (the first value must not be equal to zero). Range: min 0.1/max 99999.99999 Default value: 4000 Unit type: rpm Voltage for max RPM gear # (# = 1..4) Description: it defines the voltage output to the drive corresponding to the maximum spindle speed for gear # (value <> 0). Range: min -10/max +10 Default value: 7.5 Unit type: volts Servo loop gain for gear # (# = 1..4) Description: it is the gain applied during spindle orientation. Range: min 0/max 10 Default value: 1 Unit type: IPM/mil alias 16.6/sec Stand still servo loop gain Description: it is the servo loop used by the system when the spindle is stopped. Range: min 0/max 10 Default value: 1 Unit type: IPM/mil alias 16.6/sec
5-13
Driver address Description: it is the address set on a drive to be associated with an axis having a D.S.I. digital interface. This address identifies the drive univocally within the communication system (fiber optic ring). Range: 1/254 Default value: 1 Unit type: none Standard telegram Description: identifies axis type and servo mode of the motor connected to a D.S.I. digital driver. Range: 1/6 where: 1 = reserved 2 = reserved 3 = Spindle speed drive only (without transducer feedback). This configuration is equivalent to an analog type spindle configured with converter only. 4 = Normal or point-to-point type axis 5 = Spindle speed and/or position drive. This configuration is equivalent to a spindle driven with converter and transducer 6 = reserved Default value: 5 Unit type: none Homing type Description: defines the axle reset cycle for D.S.I. digital spindles. Range: 0/8 0=reserved 1=reserved 2=reserved 3=reserved 4=reserved 5=reserved 6=reserved 7=reserved 8= Reset mode for Bosch-Rexroth drives Additional Services Description: provides additional performances for D.S.I. digital axes. Range: 0/255
5-14
If you want the spindle to be rendered fictitious at CNC power-up, set bit 3 on 1 (value 8). Default value: 0 Unit type: none
Drive use motor transducer (Y/N)? Description: the digital driver can use the transducer incorporated in the motor or an external use (e.g. optival encoder). If you intend using the motor's transducer, answer Y to this prompt. Range: YES/NO Default value: Y Unit type: none Probing Configuration Description: function not available
Notes on the characterization of D.S.I digital drivers

List of parameters with no effects CHANNEL A, CHANNEL B, CHANNEL Z, DIRECTION COUNT, MARKER DETECTION, VOLTAGE FOR MAX RPM. ELECTRICAL PITCH parameter The parameter ELECTRICAL PITCH, whenever D.S.I. digital drives are used, must have the same value of drive parameter S-0-0079.
For further configurations see drive manual.
5-15
Probing
Status : Process number 1 (*) measuring unit = mm
-- P R O B I N G --
- probe approach distance - probe safety distance - probe speed measurement - touch probe state - probing modality
(*) : (*) : (*/min) : : :
5.00000 5.00000 100.00 CLOSE 0
SPINDLE AXIS CALIBR
PROBING
In a machine, the touch probe is a device allowing a very accurate position measurement. Generally, it can be mounted either in a fixed position or as a tool. In both cases, the target is to move the touch probe towards the part (or the tool) until they come into contact. When in contact with the surface, the touch probe sends the information to the system and the transducer position is immediately stored. The entire cycle is done automatically by the system using G72, G73, G74 measurement cycles. For safety and precision, Probe approach distance and Probe safety distance are covered at low feed. The motion in the programmed direction continues until the touch probe contacts the target surface or the "probe safety distance" is completed. At the cycle completion, the axis goes back to the initial position at rapid feed. Probe approach distance Description: it is the distance from the theoretical touch point programmed in the measurement cycle that allows to determine the probe approach distance. Range: min 0/max 99999.99999 Default value: 5 Unit type: mm (or inches)
5-16
Probe safety distance Description: distance from the theoretical point programmed in the measurement cycle that allows to determine safety distance. Range: min 0/max 99999.99999 Default value: 5 Unit type: mm (or inches) Probe measurement speed Description: touch probe speed during measurement. Range: min 0/max 9999.999 Default value: 100 Unit type: mm/min (or inches/min) Touch probe state Description: this is the status of the probe when pressed. Range: OPEN/CLOSE Default value: CLOSE Unit type: none When DSI axes are used, the value considered is the one set in the PROBING CONFIGURATION field in the characterisation of the axis in page 5.
When Mechatrolink axes are used, the field is not significant and the logic level assumed is 1 for a touch probe and for a free probe. The physical signal from the probe must be connected to the EXT1 input of all the drives involved in the probe cycle.
Probing modality 0: goes back to the initial position. 1: does not go back to the initial position Range: min 01 Default value: 0 Unit type: none
5-17
Select Axis
-- C O O R D I N A T E / S L A V E
AXIS
S E L E C TI O N --
coordinate 1 : X coordinate 2 : Y coordinate 3 : Z coordinate 4 : coordinate 5 : coordinate 6 : coordinate 7 : coordinate 8 : coordinate 9 :
slave 1 : x slave 2 : slave 3 : slave 4 : slave 5 : slave 6 : slave 7 : slave 8 : slave 9 :
- select axis : X
SPINDLE AXIS CALIBR
PROBING
This data entry allows the selection of a coordinate axis. Select axis Description: it selects the coordinate axis name or the slave axis name to be configured. Range: One of the name displayed in the data entry. Default value: none Unit type: none
5-18
Axis Characterization
These data entries allow access to the configuration data of the selected coordinate axis or slave axis previously chosen in the "Select Axis" data entry.
Status : Process number 1 Axis name X
AXIS
- axis display format - axis type - diametral - rollover - digital axis - linear optical encoder - channel A polarity inversion - channel B polarity inversion - channel Z polarity inversion - direction count - marker detection
: 5.5 : LINEAR :N :N :N :N :N :N :N : POSITIVE : LEVEL page 1 of n
*
SPINDLE AXIS CALIBR
PROBING
- rapid traverse feed - rapid acceleration - manual feed - manual acceleration - electrical pitch - mechanical pitch - rollover pitch - rapid traverse voltage - maximum feed - home position feed - null offset value - home position value - homing direction - percent of VFF - upper software overtravel - lower software overtravel AXES GEN INFO SELECT AXIS PSEUDO AXES AXIS CHARACT
AXIS
(*/min) : 4000.00000 (*/sxs) : 300.00000 (*/min) : 3000.00000 (*/sxs) : 300.00000 (pulses/rev) : 5000 (*) : 1.00000 (*) : 360.00000 (Volt) : 7.500 (*/min) : 4000.00000 (*/min) : 50.00000 (*) : 0.00000 (*): 0.00000 (*) : POSITIVE (%) : 100 (*) : 0.00000 (*) . -0.00000 SPINDLE AXIS CALIBR PROBING
page 2 of n HELP PHYSICAL CONN EXIT
5-19
Axis name X
AXIS
- servo loop gain - stand still servo loop gain - position error at stand still - position error with VFF - position error without VFF - in position band - in position wait (time out) - in position window - rapid jerk - working jerk - rapid minimum ramp time - working minimum ramp time - axis backlash - dead zone -null-motion threshold
: 1.00 : 1.00 (*) : 0.00000 (*) : 0.00000 (*) : 0.00000 (*) : 0.00000 (s) : 0.000 (s) : 0.000 (*/S^3): 0.0 (*/S^3): 0.0 (msec): 0.0 (msec): 0.0 (*) : 0.00000 (*) : 0.00000 (*) : 0.00000 page 3 of n
SPINDLE AXIS CALIBR
PROBING
Status :
Process number 1 Axis name X
AXIS
- axis calibration points number - calibration points from file (Y/N)?
:2 :N
5-20
-- D I G I T A L C O O R D I N A T E
A X I S C H A R A C T E R I Z A T I O N --
- driver address - standard telegram - homing type - additional services - drive use motor transducer (Y/N) - probing configuration
:1 :3 :1 :0 :Y :0
NOTE:
"n" depends on whether or not the answer in the "digital axis" field was "Y"- page 5 of axis characterization will be opened only if it was.
Axis display format Description: it defines the display format of axis parameters. If the format is 0.0 the axis is not displayed. Range: 0.0/5.5/4.6/3.7/5.3 Default value: 5.5 Unit type: None Axis type Description: it defines the type of axis . Range: LINEAR/ROTARY Default value: LINEAR Unit type: none
5-21
Diametral Description: it defines whether the current axis is diametral or not. This coordinate axis moves half the programmed distance and is most commonly used on the X axis of a lathe. It allows diametrical instead of radial programming. Range: YES/NO Default value: N Unit type: none Rollover Description: it defines whether the axis is cyclic or not. In the first case, the axis position will be reset after each complete revolution. A further parameter, "rollover pitch", is required to obtain a complete rollover axis configuration. Range: YES/NO Default value: N Unit type: none Digital Axis (Drive with digital interface) Description: determines if the current axis is controlled by a D.S.I., an OS-Wire or a Mechatrolink digital drive. Range: YES/NO Default value: N Unit type: none Linear optical encoder Description: the current axis has a "LINEAR OPTICAL ENCODER" type transducer. This type of transducer has only one marker all over the stroke. Range: YES/NO Default value: N Unit type: none Channel A polarity inversion (master and slave) Description: it is the polarity select parameter for channel A. When this parameter is set to YES, the logic signal presented to the channel A input will be inverted. Range: YES/NO Default value: N Unit type: none
5-22
Channel B polarity inversion (master and slave) Description: it is the polarity select parameter for channel B. When this parameter is set to YES, the logic signal presented to the channel B input will be inverted. Range: YES/NO Default value: N Unit type: none Channel Z polarity inversion (master and slave) Description: it is the polarity select parameter for channel Z. When this parameter is set to YES, the logic signal presented to the channel Z input will be inverted. Range: YES/NO Default value: N Unit type: none Direction count (master and slave) Description: it defines whether the positive counting of the transducer corresponds to the positive direction of the axis. Range: POSITIVE/NEGATIVE Default value: POSITIVE Unit type: none Marker detection (master and slave) Description: it defines the marker detection. If it is set to LEVEL, the axis position register is cleared whenever the prescribed logic levels are present on the channels A, B, Z. If it is set to EDGE, the register will be cleared whenever the Z marker has a valid transition. If LEVEL the polarity of the channel syncronized with Z MUST NOT BE inverted. See also the axis board section in the "10 Series CNC Installation Guide" to select the marker defection correctly.
Range: EDGE/LEVEL Default value: LEVEL Unit type: none
5-23
Rapid traverse feed Description: it is the maximum allowable axis feed in G0/1/2/3. (value >= Manual feed). Range: min 0/max 999999999 Default value: 4000 Unit type: mm/min or inches/min for linear axes (or deg/min for rotary axes) Rapid acceleration Description: it is the axis acceleration during rapid motion (value >= Manual acceleration). Range: min 0/max 99999.99999 Default value: 300 Unit type: mm/sec or inches/sec for linear axes (or deg/sec for rotary axes) Manual feed Description: it represents the maximum axis feed in manual mode (value <= Rapid traverse feed). Range: min 0/max 999999999 Default value: 3000 Unit type: mm/min or inches/min for linear axes (or deg/min for rotary axes) Manual acceleration Description: it is the acceleration rate used during non-rapid motion as in manual mode (value <= Rapid acceleration). Range: min 0/max 99999.99999 Default value: 300 Unit type: mm/sec or inches/sec for linear axes (or deg/sec for rotary axes)
2 2 2 2 2 2
5-24
Electrical pitch Description: it is the number of pulses per revolution supplied by the transducer. For analog axes, the value to be entered is multiplied by 4. For example, if the encoder supplies 1250 pulses/rev., the resulting value will be 5000 pulses. With a linear transducer, this parameter represents the number of pulses/rev., multiplied by 4, generated by the transducer over the distance declared as mechanical pitch. For digital axes, whether D.S.I. or OS_wire, see the Notes on the characterization of digital drives at the end of this paragraph. Range: min 1/max 999999999 Default value: 5000 Unit type: pulses Mechanical pitch Description: it is the distance covered by the axis per each revolution of the related transducer. With linear transducer, it represents the distance to be covered within the number of pulses declared in "electrical pitch". NOTE: the ratio mechanical pitch/electrical pitch represents the axis resolution. Range: min 0.001/max 99999.99999 Default value: 1 Unit type: mm or inches for linear axes (or deg for rotary axes) Rollover pitch Description: it specifies the maximum count for a rollover axis. When this value is exceeded, the position display is reset to zero. For rotary axes, this parameter is generally set to 360. Range: min 0.0001/max 99999.99999 Default value: 360 Unit type: mm or inches for linear axes (or deg for rotary axes) Rapid traverse voltage (master and slave) Description: it is the output voltage to the drive corresponding to the maximum feed. The default value 7.5 avoids linearity problems with the D/A converter. A slave axis can have opposit sign respect to its master but it must have the same value. Range: min -10/max +10 Default value: 7.5 Unit type: volts
5-25
Maximum feed Description: it is the axis feed when the rapid traverse voltage is output to the drive. Range: min 1/max 999999999 Default value: 4000 Unit type: mm/min inches/min for linear axes (or deg/min for rotary axes) Home position feed Description: it defines the axis feed in the homing cycle during the search for the marker position. This speed must be low to prevent missing the marker transition . Range: min 1/max 99999.99999 Default value: 50 Unit type: mm/min inches/min for linear axes (or deg/min for rotary axes) Null offset value Description: it allows an axis, during homing, to automatically move to the exact mechanical home position rather than to the marker of the axis transducer. The difference between the marker position and the required mechanical home position is the null offset value. After completion of the homing cycle (including the null offset motion) the position of the axis will be zero. Range: min -99999.99999/max +99999.99999 Default value: 0 Unit type: mm or inches for linear axes (or deg for rotary axes) Home position value Description: it represents the zero position of the axis referred to the null offset position. Range: min -99999.99999/max +99999.99999 Default value: 0 Unit type: mm or inches for linear axes (or deg for rotary axes) Homing direction Description: it represents the axis direction during the home switch search. Range: POSITIVE/NEGATIVE Default value: POSITIVE Unit type: none
5-26
Percent of VFF Description: It represents the percent of VFF to be used during the movement of an axis with VFF enabled. Range: 0 100 Default value: 100 Unit type: none Upper software overtravel Description: it is the positive operating limit of the axis, measured from its home position (value > Lower software overtravel). Range: min -99999.99999/max +99999.99999 Default value: 0.00000 Unit type: mm or inches for linear axes (or deg for rotary axes) Lower software overtravel Description: it is the negative operating limit of the axis measured from its home position (value < Upper software overtravel). Range: min -99999.99999/max +99999.99999 Default value: -0.00000 Unit type: mm or inches for linear axes (or deg for rotary axes) Servo loop gain Description: it is the servo loop gain constant for the proportional control of the axis. Setting this parameter to 1 and moving the axis at 1000 mm/min, the following error will be 1 mm. If the feed is 1 ipm, the following error will be 0.001 in. Changing the value of the constant determines a variation of the following error (fe) depending on the equation fe = feed/(constant x 1000). If the velocity feed forward (VFF) is enabled, the above equation is no longer valid. Setting the servo loop gain to 0 determines an open loop condition of the axis. Range: min 0/max 10 Default value: 1 Unit type: IPM/mil alias 16.6/sec
5-27
Stand still servo loop gain Description: it is the servo loop gain when the axis is stopped. It is applied at the end of a movement during the entrance in position band phase. Range: min 0/max 10 Default value: 1 Unit type: IPM/mil alias 16.6/sec Position error at stand still Description: it is the maximum error allowed when the axis is in standstill condition. Range: min 0/max 99999.99999 Default value: 0 Unit type:mm or inch for linear axis,deg for rotary axis Position error with VFF Description: if the value declared in the field Position error without VFF is greater than the theoretical value calculated at the set highest feed and without VFF, it is the maximum admitted tracking error when the axis moves with VFF. If the value declared in the field Position error without VFF is smaller than the theoretical value calculated at the set highest feed and without VFF, the "Variable Servo Error" feature described in Chapter 1 is applied. Range: min 0/max 99999.99999 Default value: 0 Unit type: mm or inch for linear axis, deg for rotary axis NOTE FOR ROLLOVER AXES; If the value entered exceeds the maximum admissible threshold, the latter is automatically forced. The threshold is determined as: (rollover pitch / 2) - space covered in a servo tick at max. speed. Position error without VFF Description: if the declared value is greater than the theoretical value calculated at the set highest feed and without VFF, it is the maximum admitted tracking error when the axis moves without VFF. If the declared value is smaller than the theoretical value calculated at the set highest feed and without VFF, the "Variable Servo Error" feature described in Chapter 1 is applied. Range: min 0/max 99999.99999 Default value: 0 Unit type: mm or inch for linear axis, deg for rotary axis NOTE FOR ROLLOVER AXES; If the value entered exceeds the maximum admissible threshold, the latter is automatically forced. The threshold is determined as: (rollover pitch / 2) - space covered in a servo tick at max. speed.
5-28
In position band Description: it is the tolerance around the programmed end-point within which the motion is considered finished. A null value disables the tolerance check. Range: min 0/max 99999.99999 Default value: 0 Unit type: mm or inches for linear axes (or deg for rotary axes) In position wait Description: it is the maximum time allowed for the axis to be brought within and to stay inside the "In position band" tolerance (value >= "In position window"). Range: min 0/max 65.535 Default value: 0 Unit type: sec In position window Description: it is the time for the axis to remain within the "In position band"to consider the movement completed (value <= In position wait). Range: min 0/max 65.535 Default value: 0 Unit type: sec Rapid Jerk Description: it is the axis jerk for fast moves and is used by the High Speed and the Jerk Limitation (MOV = 8 and 32) algorithms Range: min 0/max 999999.9999 Default Value: 0 Units: mm/sec or inches/sec for linear axes resp. degrees/sec for rotational axes Working Jerk Description: this is the axis jerk for work feeds (manual and in work G1/2/3) used by the algorithm for High Speed machining and Jerk Limitation (MOV = 8 and 32). Range: min 0/max 999999.9999 Default Value: 0 Units: mm/sec or inches/sec for linear axes resp. degrees/sec for rotational axes Rapid minimum ramp time (Minimum ramp time for rapid movements) Description: this is the minimum time it takes the axis to reach maximum acceleration (jerk application time) and it is used by High Speed Machining algorithms and the movements using non linear ramps. Variation range: min 0/max 999.99
5-29
Default value: 0 (Minimum time algorithm deactivated) Type of unit: milliseconds Working minimum ramp time (Minimum ramp time for working movements) Description: this is the minimum time it takes the axis to reach maximum acceleration (jerk application time) and it is used by High Speed Machining algorithms and the movements using non linear ramps. Variation range: min 0/max 999.99 Default value: 0 (Minimum time algorithm deactivated) Type of unit: milliseconds Axis backlash (master and slave) Description: it defines the total amount of mechanical play to be compensated by the system. It is also possible to define the period of time in which the backlash is actualised. To activate this algorithm called soft, it is necessary to set the value in the following way: in the first figure at the left of the decimal point and in the decimals you will declare the value of the backlash; The remaining figures on the left represent the requested time in milliseconds for the backlash application: -axis backlash : where: the figures represented by T are the time, the figures B are the backlash value. If TTTT corresponds to 0 it will not be activated and the backlash will be activated in standard modality. For example, if a BACKLASH value corresponds to 500,01 the application of an axis backlash will be 0,01 in 50 milliseconds. The sign determines the direction of application of the backlash. If the sign is positive, the backlash is applied when the axis moves in the negative direction, if it is negative, the backlash is applied when the axis moves in the positive direction. Range: min -99999.99999/max +99999.99999 Default value: 0 Unit type: mm or inches for linear axes (or deg for rotary axes) NOTE: Important notes on the use of the algorithm soft: 1. The algorithm divides the axis backlash in different parts considering the set time and the associated interpolator clock and applies the parts to each interpolator click. If the set time il lower then the interpolator clock the algorithm will not be activated. 2. If the backlash is already applied (the last axis movement was in negative direction) and it should be suddenly interrupted, for example writing 0 from Servo Monitor, it will be taken away all in once, so the performance will not take place. 3. If the set backlash is negative the performance will not be activated. TTTTB,BBBB
5-30
4. It may happen in some situations that the movement ends before the servoloop has had the time to apply (or takeaway) all the backlash, for example when there is a minim inversion of the axis and then the stop; in these cases, at the end of the movement, the servoloop applies or (takes away) all the backlash, for example when there is a minimum inversion of the axis and then the stop; in these cases, at the end of the movement, the servoloop applies (or takes away) all in once the remaining backlash that could not be applied. Dead zone Description: it defines a position window around the end-point in which the servo control module will not output any voltage to the axis drive. As long as the axis remains in the dead zone the command to the drive will have a null value. Range: min 0/max 99999.99999 Default value: 0 Unit type: mm/inch for linear axis, degrees for rotary axis Null-motion threshold Description: It indicates the threshold under which, during the movement, the axis dynamic is not considered. Range: min 0/max +99999.99999 Default value: 0 (deactivated) Unit type: mm or inches per linear axis, degrees for rotary axis Axis calibration points number (master and slave) Description: it defines the number of points to be set to calibrate the axis. It is necessary to configure this parameter also to introduce calibration points from a file. Range: min 0/max 1000 Default value: 0 Unit type: none Calibration points from file Description: Answer Y if one file with calibration points for the axis exists. (File: E:\OEM\AMPx\CLB_FILE.id). Answer N if calibration points will be introduced from data entry. Range: YES/NO Default value: N Unitt type: none NOTE: For the format of calibration file, see Appendix C in this manual. Master axis name (only slave) Description: it defines the master axis name asoociated to the selected slave axis.
5-31
Range: X/Y/Z/A/B/C/U/V/W/P/Q/D Default value: none Unit type: none
5-32
Offset between markers (only slave) Description: for split axes, it is the physical distance between the markers of master axis and slave axis. The maximum value is electrical pitch. This value is used to compensate the skew determined by inaccuracy during the mechanical installation of split axis position transducer. Range: min -2147483647/max +2147483647 Default value: 0 Unit type: pulses Skew error (only slave) Description: it is the maximum allowed skew between split axes during motion. A null value disable the skew error check. Range: min 0/max 99999.99999 Default value: 0 Unit type: mm or inches for linear axes (or deg for rotary axes) Max skew error (only slave) Description: it is the maximum allowed skew between split axis at power-up before the home position cycle. A null value disable the skew error check at power-up. Range: min 0/max 99999.99999 Default value: 0 Unit type: mm or inches for linear axes (or deg for rotary axes) Skew gain (only slave) Description: it is the gain constant applied to skew error correction. For split axis, the servo software calculates the skew making the difference between the master axis following error (fem) and the slave axis following error (fes). The resulting value is multiplied by the skew gain value to obtain the output voltage value on the D/A converter (VOUT) in the following way: Skew = fem - fes VOUT MASTER = (fem + skew x skew_gain) x K VOUT SLAVE = (fes - skew x skew_gain) x K where K is a constant including the servo loop gain value and other conversion factors, and V OUT is the output voltage. The above equations do not include the VFF algorithm. Range: min 0/max 2 Default value: 0 Unit type: none
5-33
Driver address Description: this is the address set on the drive to be associated with an axis with (D.S.I. , OS-Wire or Mechatrolink) digital interface. This address identifies the drive univocally within the communication system (fibre optic ring for D.S.I., OS-Wire bus or Mechatrolink bus). Notes on systems with double Mechatrolink channel. On each individual channel, the addresses of the drives range from 1 to 15. The axes mapped on the first channel must have an address between 1 and 15. The axes mapped on the second channel must have an address between 16 and 30. Range: 0/254 Default value: 1 Unit type: none Standard telegram (Master and slave) (Interface characteristic) Description: identifies axis type and servo mode of the motor connected to a D.S.I. digital driver. Range: 1/6 where: 1 = reserved 2 = reserved 3 = Spindle speed drive only (without transducer feedback). This configuration is equivalent to an analog type spindle configured with converter only. 4 = Normal or point-to-point type axis 5 = Spindle speed and/or position drive. This configuration is equivalent to a spindle driven with converter and transducer 6 = reserved Default value: 4 Unit type: none
5-34
Homing type (Master and slave) Description: defines the axis homing cycle for type D.S.I., OS-Wire or Mechatrolink digital axes. Range: 0/7. For D.S.I. digital axes homing modes are as follows: 0 = Homing managed by the CNC: the physical microswitch must be connected to the CNC. This mode applies solely if the drive connected to the axis is an OSAI DAC with digital interface and the position transducer selected is external (incremental encoder), furthermore, the axis must be linear type. 1 = Homing cycle with absolute transducer: a movement (twice as long as the BACKLASH) is performed in a direction opposite to the Homing Direction; in this manner, mechanical backlash is neutralised and the position is rated as valid. After that, the axis is set on the machine zero position. 2 = Homing cycle for axes with absolute transducer: a movement similar to mode 1 is performed, but the final movement to the machine zero position is not performed. 3 = Homing managed by the drive: the physical microswitch must be connected to the drive. 4 = Reserved 5 = Homing managed by the CNC, the zero microswitch must be connected to the CNC. This mode applies solely if the drive connected to the axis is an OSAI DAC with digital interface and the position transducer selected is the one on the motor (absolute SinCos within a revolution). It does apply to rollover axes. 6 = Reserved 7= Same as in mode 3, but the final return to zero position is not performed. For OS-Wire digital axes the homing cycle is always managed by the CNC, the following modes are used to specify type of microswitch and the transducer selected on the OS3 drive: 0 = Physical switch connected to the I/Os and feedback active on Aux Feedback 1 = Homing cycle with absolute transducer: a movement (twice as long as the BACKLASH) is performed in a direction opposite to the Homing Direction; in this manner, mechanical backlash is neutralised and the position is rated as valid. After that, the axis is set on the machine zero position. 2 = Homing cycle for axes with absolute transducer: a movement similar to mode 1 is performed, but the final movement to the machine zero position is not performed. 3 = Reserved 4 = Physical switch connected to the drive and feedback active on Aux Feedback 5 = Physical switch connected to the I/Os and feedback active on Motor Feedback 6 = Physical switch connected to the drive and feedback active on Motor Feedback 7 = Reserved.
5-35
For Mechatrolink digital axes the modes are: 0 = Homing managed by the CNC with physical switch connected to the I/Os of the CNC (as for the analog axes). 1 = Homing cycle with absolute transducer: a movement (twice as long as the BACKLASH) is performed in a direction opposite to the Homing Direction; in this manner, mechanical backlash is neutralised and the position is rated as valid. After that, the axis is set on the machine zero position. 2 = Homing cycle for axes with absolute transducer: a movement similar to mode 1 is performed, but the final movement to the machine zero position is not performed. 3 = Homing managed by drive: the physical switch must be connected to the drive. 4= Homing managed by the CNC with physical switch connected to the drive. The microswitch signal polarity sign must be set on the drive. The CNC interprets the DEC signal (see Mechatrolink description) as follows: 0 is perceived as microswitch not pressed (OPEN) and 1 as microswitch pressed (CLOSE). reserved. reserved.
5= 6=
7 = reserved. Default value: 3 Unit type: none Additional Services Description: additional services for OSAI D.S.I. (DAC/DSC series) and Mechatrolink digital axes. Range: 0/7 For D.S.I. axes the following values apply: 0 = no special function activated 1 = new axis stop algorithm activated if a reset command is given during homing process. This algorithm must be activated when OSAI DAC/DSC D.S.I. drives are used in homing type = 3 mode (homing managed by drive). For Mechatrolink axes, the range is interpreted in bits and it is used to set the acceleration/deceleration filters and drive speed loop control type. The first three bits affect the OPTION field included in the Mechatrolink movement commands (third and fourth bytes) according to the following scheme: Additional Services OPTION first byte (Acceleration/Deceleration Filter Selection) bit 0 bit 1 bit 2 Default value: 0 Unit type: none bit 3 bit 4 OPTION second byte (Speed Loop P/PI Control Switching) bit 4
5-36
Drive uses motor transducer (Y/N)? Description: the OS3 digital drive can use either the transducer built into the motor or an external one (e.g., an optical ruler). If you want to use the motor transducer (Motor Feedback), answer Y to this question, if you want to use the external one (Aux Feedback) answer N. This choice also applies to the axes with D.S.I. interface. Range: YES/NO Default value: Y Unit type: none Probing configuration Description: determines the sensing mode for D.S.I. digital drives. Range: 0/2 where: 0 = CNC programs the drive for sensing on the positive front. 1 = CNC programs the drive for sensing on the negative front. 2 = CNC does not execute any drive programming and presumes that it is already set for sensing on the positive front. Default value: 0 Unit type: none
Notes on the characterization of D.S.I. digital drivers

List of parameters with no effects CHANNEL A, CHANNEL B, CHANNEL Z, DIRECTION COUNT, MARKER DETECTION, RAPID TRAVERSE VOLTAGE, SERVO LOOP GAIN, STAND STILL SERVO LOOP GAIN, DEAD ZONE , MAXIMUM FEED, PERCENT OF VFF. List of parameters with effects in the presence of zero micros managed by the CNC LINEAR OPTICAL ENCODER, HOME POSITION FEED, HOMING DIRECTION. ELECTRICAL PITCH parameter The parameter ELECTRICAL PITCH, whenever D.S.I. digital drives are used (characterised with the default parameters), must be declared as follows: Linear axes: 10.000 x mm. Rotary axes: 3.600.000 x rev (360)
5-37
Notes on the characterization of OS_wire digital drivers

List of parameters with no effects CHANNEL A, CHANNEL B, CHANNEL Z, DIRECTION COUNT, MARKER DETECTION, RAPID TRAVERSE VOLTAGE, SERVO LOOP GAIN, STAND STILL SERVO LOOP GAIN, DEAD ZONE, MAXIMUM FEED . ELECTRICAL PITCH parameter For OS_wire digital axes consider the position feedback selected on the drive. If Motor Feedback is active, the value to be entered is 524288 (constant value equivalent to the resolution of the SinCos Stegmann transducer), otherwise, if Aux Feedback is active, the rules governing analog axes shall apply.
Notes on the characterisation of Mechatrolink digital drives

List of parameters with no effect. CHANNEL A, CHANNEL B, CHANNEL Z, DIRECTION COUNT, MARKER DETECTION, RAPID TRAVERSE VOLTAGE, SERVO LOOP GAIN, STAND STILL SERVO LOOP GAIN, DEAD ZONE, MAXIMUM FEED, PERCENT OF VFF. List of parameters with effect in the case of homing microswitch managed by CNC LINEAR OPTICAL ENCODER, HOME POSITION FEED, HOMING DIRECTION. ELECTRICAL PITCH parameter Set as usual, keeping in mind that in this case the values NEED NOT be multiplied by four as in the analog interface, because the CNC interprets them directly as encoder pulses / motor revs.
Parameters: POSITION ERROR AT STAND STILL, POSITION ERROR WITH VFF, POSITION ERROR WITHOUT VFF and IN POSITION WAIT For reasons to do with the exchange of data, the following error calculated by the NC is nearly doubled. As a result, when setting the motor it is necessary to read the actual error from the drive using an ad hoc utility and to configure a double value, plus an error margin, in AMP. For the same reason, the entry into tolerance at movement end may last a few more sampling cycles than is customary. Moreover, we recommend filling all the entry into tolerance fields to ensure a finer synchronisation with the drive during movement starts and stops.
5-38
Axis Charact (Slave axis selected with "Select Axis")

Status : Process number 1 Axis name X (*) Measuring unit = mm
-- S L A V E
AXIS
C H A R A C T E R I Z A T I O N -:N :N :N : POSITIVE : LEVEL (Volt) : 7.500 : (pulse) : 0 (*) : 0.00000 (*) : 0.00000 : 0.00 (*) : 0.00000 :0 :N :Y page 1 of n
- channel A polarity inversion - channel B polarity inversion - channel Z polarity inversion - direction count - marker detection - rapid traverse voltage - master axis name - offset between markers - skew error - max skew error - skew gain - axis backlash - axis calibration points number - calibration points from file (Y/N)? - digital axis
SPINDLE AXIS CALIBR
PROBING
-- D I G I T A L S L A V E
AXIS
- driver address - standard telegram - homing type - additional services - drive use motor transducer (Y/N)
:1 :3 :1 :0 :Y
NOTE: "n" depends on whether or not the answer to the "digital axis" field was "Y" - page two of axis characterization will only be opened if it was. For a full account of the Slave axis parameters, see the preceding pages.
5-39
Axis Calibration
(*) Measuring unit = mm error (*) -0 : 0.00000 -1 : 0.00000
-- A X I S
C A L I B R A T I O N --
theoretical position (*) -0 : 0.00000 -1 : 0.00000
*
NOTE:
"n" depends on how many calibration points were declared.
This data entry allows the definition of the values required to calibrate the axis. For each point, a theoretical position and an error have to be fixed. For the intermediate positions, the system interpolates the error. The following figure describes an example of the proceeding of the axis error.
5-40
The correct procedure for detecting geometrical errors on the axes stroke is as follows: 1. Set the values for NULL OFFSET and HOME POSITION to 0. 2. Executed the axes homing cycles. 3. Position on the desired points, which thus are referred to the electrical axis homing position (marker) and write down the corresponding errors. 4. Enter the values found. 5. Switch the machine off and on again. Home the axes and check that the compensation is correct. 6. If you want, insert the values for NULL OFFSET and HOME POSITION. Switch the machine off and on. 7. Before using the machine again, home the axes. The rules for defining the points to be corrected are: The points have to be defined from the most negative point to the most positive point. As no compensation is possible out of range for linear axes, you should set zero error for the first and last point in order to also obtain uniform compensation at the ends of the range. Rotational axes are only compensated, if the first and last point coincide. Rotary axes are considered to be 0-360 degrees whether they are in fact capable of complete rotation or not. If an axis has an actual operating range from 0 to -90 degrees then it must be calibrated as follows: Actual position 0 -90 -65 -25 -5 Calibration position 0 270 295 335 355 Correction value 0 As reqd As reqd 0 As reqd
Alternatively for an axis with an operating range of +/- 20 degrees:

0 -20 (340)
+20
5-41
The calibration should be as shown: Actual position 0 10 15 20 -20 -18 -7 -2 Calibration position 0 10 15 20 340 342 353 358 Correction value 0 As reqd As reqd 0 0 As reqd As reqd As reqd
Theoretical position # (# = depends on axis calibration points) Description: it defines the configured axis theoretical position. Range: min -99999.99999/max +99999.99999 for linear axes min 0/max 359.99999 for rotary axes Default value: 0 Unit type: none Error # (# = depends on Axis calibration points) Description: it defines the pitch compensation in the relevant table. Range: min -99999.99999/max +99999.99999 for linear axes min. -359.99999/max +359.99999 for rotary axes Default value: 0 Unit type: mm or inches for linear axes (or deg for rotary axes)
5-42
Physical Connection
-- P H Y S I C A L
C O N N E C T I O N S --
- board number - transducer - converter
:0 :0 :0
SPINDLE AXIS CALIBR
PROBING
This data entry allows the user to define the information necessary for the configuration of the axis connection. Board number Description: determines which board or OS_wire Bridge device will control the axis. Range: min -1/max 61 Default value: 0 Unit type: none NOTE: A value of 1 is used to configure axes with local analog interface on OS8532 and 10/100 OS-Wire boards.
5-43
Transducer Description: it defines the number transducer number associated with the current axis, i.e., the number of the connector. Range: min 0/max 6 Default value: 0 Unit type: none NOTE: Zero means no transducer. For the axes controlled by a digital drive enter 0. To determine the correct value, see the table of resources in Chapter 3. Converter Description: it defines the converter number associated with the current axis. Note: zero means no converter. Range: min 0/max 8 Default value: 0 Unit type: none NOTE: Zero means no converter. For the axes controlled by a digital drive enter 0. To determine the correct value, see the table of resources in Chapter 3.
5-44
END OF CHAPTER
5-45
Chapter
HUMAN INTERFACE CONFIGURATION
This chapter describes all the parameters used for configuring the human interface of the system. The user can access this configuration environment by pressing the appropriate softkey in the softkey main menu. After this selection, the screen will show the submenu that allows the user to access the desired list of parameters. For each parameter we provide a short description, the allowed range, the unit type and the default value.
HUMAN INTERFACE
By selecting this softkey, the user can access the following submenu:
Human interface characterization sub-menu

H I GEN INFO SELECT MENU ADD SCR CONFIG OEM SK CONFIG COMMON SCREEEN SELECT D E PROCESS SCREEN D E CONFIG HELP PPDIR CONFIG EXIT
Human Interface Submenu
6-1
Chapter 6 Human Interface Configuration
H.I. Gen Info

-- H. I.
GENERAL
I N F O R M A T I O N --
- process main screen - logic main screen - large axes position - logic screen 1 - logic screen 2 - logic screen 3 - logic screen 4
(code 1) (code 2) (code 3) (code 4) (code 5) (code 6) (code 7)
:Y :Y :Y :N :N :N :N
- # of configurable screens (8..12) - number of OEM softkey menus - label of main OEM menu
:0 :0 :
H I GEN INFO SELECT MENU
ADD SCR CONFIG OEM SK CONFIG
COMMON SCREEN
SELECT D E
PROCESS SCREEN
D E CONFIG
HELP PPDIR CONFIG EXIT
This data entry allows up to 12 screens to be configured: 3 pre-defined screens (PROCESS_MAIN, LOGIC_MAIN and LARGE AXIS POSITION), 4 logic-defined screens LOG_SCR1...LOG_SCR4) and 5 additional screens. Process main screen Description: it enables/disables the full screen that contains process information. Range: YES/NO Default value: Y Unit type: none Logic main screen Description: it enables/disables the full screen that contains the main logic information. Range: YES/NO Default value: Y Unit type: none
6-2
Large axes position Description: it enables/disables the full screen that displays the axis position in a large format and some system parameters (i.e. speed, feed, etc). Range: YES/NO Default value: Y Unit type: none Logic screen # (# = 1..4) Description: it enables/disables the configuration of one of the four logic screens for PLUS applications.. Range: YES/NO Default value: N Unit type: none # of configurable screens Description: it defines the number of configurable additional screens subdivided into four quadrants. The video screens (quadrants) can be configured only for the first 4 processes. Range: min 0/max 5 Default value: 0 Unit type: none Number of OEM softkey menus Description: it specifies how many levels of menu are needed for the OEM softkeys. OEM softkeys menus are globals to all processes and must be configured selecting the process number 1. Range: min 0/max 6 Default value: 0 Unit type: none Label of main OEM menu Description: it is the label of the softkey for the first OEM menu selection. Range: 14 alphanumeric characters Default: none Unit type: none
6-3
Example: Softkey menu structure
HELP OEM SOFTKEY UTILITY
MAIN MENU
MENU NUMBER = 1
SK1 MENU N
SK2 SK7
SK3 SK8
SK4 SK9
SK5 EXIT
MENU NUMBER = N
SK10 SK15
SK11 SK16
SK12 SK17
SK13 SK18
SK14 EXIT
6-4
Add Scr Config

Status : Process number 1 Additional Screen code 8
-- A D D I T I O N A L
SCREEN
- quadrant 1 process - elementary screen 1 type - quadrant 2 process - elementary screen 2 type - quadrant 3 process - elementary screen 3 type - quadrant 4 process - elementary screen 4 type
:1 : SYS_STAT :1 : SYS_STAT :1 : SYS_STAT :1 : SYS_STAT
Page 1 of n H I GEN INFO SELECT MENU ADD SCR CONFIG OEM SK CONFIG
COMMON SCREEN
SELECT D E
PROCESS SCREEN
D E CONFIG
An additional screen is a 4-quadrant screen. Each quadrant can be configured as a pre-defined quadrant or as logic-defined one. In the system, eight pre-defined quadrants and up to four logicdefined ones are available ("elementary screens"). The quadrant order is CW, with the top-left one as quadrant number 1. NOTE:
"n" depends on the number of additional screens configured.
Quadrant # process (# = 1..4) Description: it identifies the process to which the quadrant # of the configured screen will refer to. The process must be one of the configured processes (see general information). It is meaningless if type = LOGQUAD 1..4. Range: 1/2/3/4 Default value: 1 Unit type: none
6-5
Elementary screen # type (# = 1..14) Description: it defines the type of information to be displayed. SYS_STAT AXES_POS PRG_DISP PROC_STA CODE_STA AXIS_OFF : Global status of all processes : Actual and programmed end point for each axis : Part program list during execution : Process status : Status of M and G codes : Axes related information (origins, scale factors, ...)
LOGQUAD# (# = 1..4) : Screens available for PLUS application. Range: SYS_STAT/ AXES_POS / PRG_DISP / PROC_STA / CODE_STA / AXIS_OFF LOGQUAD1...LOGQUAD4
Default value: SYS_STAT Unit type: none
Common Screen
Function not available.
6-6
Process Screen
-- P R O C E S S
SCREEN
L O O P --
default screen sequence - screen sequence
:1 2 3 0 0 0 0 8 9 0 0 0 :1 2 3 8 9 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
COMMON SCREEN
SELECT D E
PROCESS SCREEN
D E CONFIG
This data entry allows the sequence of screens for each process to be defined. Screen sequence Description: it defines the sequence of screens managed by NEXT DISPLAY softkey. In "Default screen sequence" the numbers associated to the screens configured in the HI GEN INFO data entry are reported if a screen has not been configured, a zero is displayed. The "User screen sequence" field allows to modify the screen sequence managed by NEXT DISPLAY softkey. Range: depends on configured process screens Default value: none Unit type: none
6-7
Select Menu
Status : Process number 1 OEM menu number 1
-- S E L E C T
OEM
SK
M E N U --
number of OEM softkey menus - menu number
:1 :1
Page 1 of 2 H I GEN INFO SELECT MENU ADD SCR CONFIG OEM SK CONFIG
COMMON SCREEN
SELECT D E
PROCESS SCREEN
D E CONFIG
-- S E L E C T
OEM
SK
M E N U --
- parent number - help code
:0 : M00*
COMMON SCREEN
SELECT D E
PROCESS SCREEN
D E CONFIG
6-8
This data entry allows one of the menus previously configured in "H I Gen Info" to be selected and to assign the "Parent menu number" in order to define which menu contains the softkey allowing access to the selected menu. Furthermore, it is possible to define a Help code. Menu number Description: it depends on the configured OEM menu level number (see Human Interface General Information in the AMP main screen). Range: min 1/max 6 Default value: 1 Unit type: none Parent number Description: it is the number of the menu containing the softkey for accessing a menu. Zero indicates the Main Menu that contains the softkey to access the OEM Panel. Range: min 0/max 6 Default value: 0 Unit type: none Help code Description: it is the code of the global help text to be displayed when the HELP softkey is pressed at this softkey menu level. See appendix B for detailed information about help file. Range: M00*/M99* Default value: M00* Unit type: none
6-9
OEM SK Config
-- S K C O N F I G U R A T I O N --
- softkey type - softkey code - sub-menu code - label
: NORMAL :0 :0 :
COMMON SCREEN
SELECT D E
PROCESS SCREEN
D E CONFIG
This data entry allows characterization of the OEM softkeys. These softkeys form a tool that the user can use to communicate with the logic. The communication can be performed either by means of commands (pressing or releasing a softkey issues a command) or by data (each softkey can be referred to a data entry). The OEM softkeys are menu-organized: each menu can contain up to 10 softkeys and a help. Each softkey is identified by means of a label (note that not all the softkeys have to be dedicated for communication with the logic, as some of them can be used to select the various menus). Softkey type Description: it indicates the logic handling of the softkey. Range: MAINTAINED/ON_OFF/NORMAL/DATA_ENTRY/MENU Default value: NORMAL Unit type: none
6-10
Softkey Types Characteristics
6-11
Softkey code Description: the following function codes are available: 1000 - 1099 1100 - 1199 1200 - 1399 MENU MAINTAINED, ON_OFF, NORMAL DATA_ENTRY
These function codes are those passed to the logic program. Range: min 1000/max 1399 Default value: 0 Unit type: none Softkey sub-menu code Description: it defines the number of the softkey menu that appears when a given MENU softkey is pressed. This value must be setted to zero if the OEM softkey is not MENU type. Range: min 0/max 6 Default value: 0 Unit type: none Label Description: it is the name assigned to the softkey. Range: 14 alphanumeric char. Default value: none Unit type: none
6-12
Select DE
-- S E L E C T
OEM
DATA
E N T R Y --
D.E. code (0=null code) D.E. code (0=null code) D.E. code (0=null code) D.E. code (0=null code) D.E. code (0=null code) D.E. code (0=null code) D.E. code (0=null code) D.E. code (0=null code) D.E. code (0=null code) D.E. code (0=null code)
: 1220 :0 :0 :0 :0 :0 :0 :0 :0 :0
- select code
: 1220 Page 1 of 2
COMMON SCREEN
SELECT D E
PROCESS SCREEN
D E CONFIG
Data entry code 1220
-- S E L E C T
OEM
DATA
E N T R Y --
- help code - field number - title
: P00* :1 :
COMMON SCREEN
SELECT D E
PROCESS SCREEN
D E CONFIG
6-13
This data entry contains all the softkeys, of data entry type, configured (page 1) and the related help code (page 2). Select code Description: it selects the data entry related to the softkey in the selected menu. Range: min 1200/max 1399 Default value: none Unit type: none Help code Description: it is the code of the parameter help text to be displayed on this data entry. See appendix B for detailed information about help file. Range: P00*/P99* Default value: P00* Unit type: none Field number Description: it defines the number of fields in a data entry. Range: min 1/max 8 Default value: 1 Unit type: none Title Description: it defines the title of the data entry . Range: 40 alphanumeric char. Default value: none Unit type: none If the Data Entry has the select code between 1200 and 1299 then the $OEMSFTK routine is called only after the Data Entry is closed. If the Data Entry has the select code between 1300 and 1399 then the $OEMSFTK routine is called after the Data Entry is open.
6-14
DE Config
Data entry code 1220
-- O E M
DATA
ENTRY
- string test - field format - field entry - field hidden - field default - field length - field max value - field min value
: : INTEGER : OPTIONAL :N : : : :
*
Page 1 of n H I GEN INFO SELECT MENU ADD SCR CONFIG OEM SK CONFIG
COMMON SCREEN
SELECT D E
PROCESS SCREEN
D E CONFIG
This data entry allows the configuration of the data entries. A data entry is a window of fixed dimensions, with a title and up to 8 configurable fields. Each field has a label, identifying the data, and an input/output data that the user can modify. At the bottom of the window there is a field reserved for error display. The allowed data can be integer type, decimal type or string type. When a data is defined as "numeric" (integer or decimal), prior of being issued to the logic it is rangeverified and if its value is out of the range an error is generated. The whole set of data is issued to the logic only if the entered values are correct. As additional features, the data entry gives the capability to set default values for input/output data or to disable the echo for the entered data (this feature can be used to control a password). NOTE:
"n" depends on the value declared in the "field number" field..
String text Description: it specifies the text of the fixed frame. Range: 18 alphanumeric char. Default value: none Unit type: none
6-15
Field format Description: it specifies the type of entry allowed for this field. Only one of the eight fields can be of ALPHANUMERIC type. DECIMAL INTEGER ALPHANM = = = floating point number ( 99999.99999) integer number ( 32767) alphanumeric charact.
Range: DECIMAL/ALPHANM/INTEGER Default value: INTEGER Unit type: none Field entry Description: it specifies whether the user may omit the entry (only for ALPHUNUM type). Range: OPTIONAL/MANDATORY Default value: OPTIONAL Unit type: none Hidden field Description: it specifies whether the entry is echoed (a hidden entry can be used as a password). Range: YES/NO Default value: N Unit type: none Field default value Description: it allows the operator to define a default value for that specific field. Range: depends on field length Default value: none Unit type: none
6-16
Field length Description: it specifies the maximum number of characters that the user can enter in the field. It must be set according to the field type (1-6 = integer; 1-12 = decimal; 1-20 = alphanumeric). Range: depends on the field format Default value: none Unit type: none Field max value Description: it specifies the maximum value allowed as an entry. It is meaningless for alphanumeric entries. For DECIMAL type field, the maximum allowed value is +99999.99999 For INTEGER type field, the maximum allowed value is + 32767 Range: depends on the field format Default value: none Unit type: none Field min value Description: it specifies the minimum value allowed as an entry. It is meaningless for alphanumeric entries. For DECIMAL type field, the minimum allowed value is -99999.99999 For INTEGER type field, the minimum allowed value is - 32767 Range: depends on the field format Default value: none Unit type: none
6-17
PPDIR Config
-- P P D I R
Logical Name 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: 8: 9: 10 :
C O N F I G U R A T I O N -Physical position Editor name Graphic Editor N N N N N N N N N N N N
Program utility : Program utility softkey label : H I GEN INFO SELECT MENU ADD SCR CONFIG OEM SK CONFIG
Needs program name?
COMMON SCREEN
SELECT D E
PROCESS SCREEN
D E CONFIG
This data entry allows characterization of the logical directories in which the part programs, identified by 10 Series or DOS names, will be stored. A physical name (with DOS path) must be associated to each logical directory. In the directories containing 10 Series names, the system forces a physical name coincident with the logical name. This name must not be modified. If you use only DOS directories, you must cancel the system directories (PROGRAM, SYSTEM, USER, OEM). For more details, read the 10 Series User Manual. Logical name Description: it specifies the directory logical name. Range: 8 alphanumeric characters Default value: none Unit type: none
6-18
Physical position Description: it specifies the physical position of the directory that should be PROGRAM, SYSTEM, USER, OEM or a DOS directory (E: and F:). Range: 30 alphanumeric characters Default value: none Unit type: none Editor name Description: it specifies the editor name (executable file) associated to the part program stored in that directory. If omitted, the editor name is associated, by default, to the file relating to the 10 Series standard editor "OSAIEDIT.EXE". Range: 30 alphanumeric characters Default value: OSAIEDIT.EXE Unit type: none Graphic editor Description: it defines if the editor associated to the directory uses the screen in graphic mode. Range: YES/NO Default value: NO Unit type: none Program utility Description: it specifies the complete path and the user program name (.EXE) actionable by a softkey in the PART PROGRAM of the HUMAN INTERFACE. Range: 30 alphanumeric characters Default value: none Unit type: none
6-19
Needs program name? Description: it specifies if during the activation, the user program requires an input the name of the selected part program. The activation of the PROGRAM UTILITY can be executed in two ways: with file name in input or without it, consequently the following information is passed to the user program: 1. The complete path name of the user program (in C language it corresponds to argv [0]). if the name of the part program has been required 2. The complete path name of the part program, if it is a file contained into the dos directory defined by the user, or the logic name of the part program, if it is a file contained into one among the four system directories: USER, PROGRAM, SYSTEM, OEM. In both cases, the maximum lenght of this information is 48 + 1 characters (in C language it corresponds to argv [1]). 3. The number in the ASCII range 14 (3134 Hex) indicating the active process (in C language it corresponds to argv [2]). if the name of the part program has not been required 2. The number in the ASCII range 14 (3134 Hex) indicating the active process (in C language it corresponds to argv [1]). Program utility softkey label Description: LABEL of the softkey of the PART PROGRAM menu which enables the Program Utility. If not specified, the PROGRAM UTILITY label will be visualized. Range: 30 alphanumeric characters Default value: none Unit type: none
END OF CHAPTER
6-20
Chapter
THE SERVO MONITOR
The 10 Series CNC has a Servo Monitor utility that allows to set up the system axes easily. It is a particularly useful tool during both system installation and part program development. The Servo Monitor allows run-time modification of some of the axes parameters as well as run-time evaluation of the effects of these modifications. With the Servo Monitor, it is unnecessary to make further modifications in the AMP environment or to reset the system each time the parameter values are altered. The oscilloscope function available with the Servo Monitor permits the monitoring of the following parameters: feedrate on the profile calculated by the interpolator (one track) feedrate calculated by the interpolator for one or two axes (one or two tracks) lagging error for one or two axes (one or two tracks) feedrate calculated by the interpolator and lagging error for the same axis (two tracks) The monitored parameters are displayed on a graphics page for visual inspection and evaluation of the input values.
7-1
Chapter 7 The Servo Monitor
USING THE SERVO MONITOR

The change parameters and oscilloscope functions can be used independently of each other. Axes parameter values can be modified through appropriate data-entry windows equipped with a contextual help function that supplies on-line help information about the various data entry fields. Parameter modification does not affect those parameters in AMP, once the correct parameters have been identified, therefore, they must be inserted into AMP to take effect at the next system start-up. In order to use the oscilloscope function, it must be configured, i.e. its sampling tick must be defined and the variables to be monitored (feedrate on profile, feedrate of one axis, feedrate of two axes or lagging error) must be selected. The oscilloscope provides two control modes: continuous mode trigger mode. The data sampled by the oscilloscope are stored in a dedicated cyclic buffer. When the data buffer is full and the oscilloscope operates in continuous mode, new data are overwritten upon old values. If the buffer is full but the oscilloscope is operating in trigger mode, storage of new data is interrupted. The user has the possibility to switch the oscilloscope configuration to the mode that best suits his accuracy requirements. In continuous mode, new values are usually generated and substituted for old values at a fast pace, even before they can be examined. For a more detailed analysis it may be preferable to select a lower sampling tick and operate in trigger mode. The graphic analysis of the buffer data can be made more accurate by using the zoom option. Sampled data may be stored in files for further analysis and/or re-processing.
7-2
ENABLING THE SERVO MONITOR

To enable the Servo Monitor, display the main menu, press the DIAGNOSTICS softkey and then select the SERVO MONITOR softkey. The following submenu will appear:
SELECT PROCESS PART PROGRAM DIAGNOSTICS
10/Series CNC main screen
SERVO MONITOR
Diagnostics Menu
Servo Monitor Sub-menu
CHANGE PARAM.
CONFIG.OSCILL.
CLEAR SCREEN OSCILL.CONTIN.
TRIGGER
HELP EXAME DATA EXIT
7-3
CHANGE PARAM
The CHANGE PARAM softkey permits to access the menu for run-time modification of the axes parameters. Modifications made in this environment are put into effect without rebooting the system.
CHANGE PARAM
Servo monitor sub-menu Change param sub-menu
NULL OFFSET KC KV VFF SPLIT PARAM.
TOLERANCE SERVO ERROR BROKEN WIRE
DEAD ZONE FEED/ACC/JRK RAMP TIME
BACKLASH SPLINDLE
HELP OPER.LIMITS EXIT
Each of the softkeys in this submenu permits to access a data entry window for inputting new parameter values. DEFAULT VALUES The first field in all the data entries is the logic identifier of the axis to be modified. The logic identifier is an integer in the 1-32 range that is configured in the AMP. By default, the first identifier is that of the first axis (id = 1). Every time this value is modified, the last input identifier will become the default value in all the subsequent data entry windows. This permits the operator to constantly check which axis is being configured. The remaining fields display the values that have been configured for the selected axis. If the axis identifier is modified, the default values displayed in the other fields will be automatically updated to show the configuration of the new axis. NOTE: The default values reported as an example in this manual section correspond to the axes default configuration created by the system. ALTERING A VALUE To alter the value displayed in a data entry field, use the arrow keys to position the cursor on the field, key in the new value and confirm it by pressing [Enter] or the corresponding softkey (The label of the softkey that has been pressed in order to open the current data entry window also appears on the display). If any format errors are detected or if the value is out of the allowed range, the system displays an error message but the cursor remains on the data entry window. To remove the error, key in a correct value and re-confirm it. When the input value is correct, the alteration may be put into effect either immediately or when the system complies with certain conditions; this depends on the type of parameter. The session can be aborted at any moment by pressing [Esc]. This will leave the current values unchanged.
7-4
Null Offset
NULL OFFSET
- axis id - null offset value (*)
:1 : 0.00000
NULL OFFSET KC KV VFF SPLIT PARAM
BACKLASH SPINDLE
HELP OPER. LIMITS EXIT
Axis id Description: it is the axis identifier Range: min 1/max 32 Default: 1 Unit type: none Null offset value Description: it specifies the difference between the marker position and the machine home position. When this value is modified, the new value will be put into efffect by the subsequent homing cycle. Range: -99999.99999/+99999.99999 Default: 0 Unit type: mm or inch for linear axes, degrees for rotary axes.
7-5
Tolerance
TOLERANCE
- axis id - in position board - in position wait (time out) - in position band :1 (*) : 0.00000 (S) : 0.000 (S) : 0.000
BACKLASH SPINDLE
Axis id Description: it is the axis identifier. Range: min 1/max 32 Default: 1 Unit type: none In position band Description: it specifies the tolerance interval for the end point. When the axes enter this band the move is considered terminated. Range: 0/99999.99999 Default value: 0.00000 Unit type: mm or inch for the linear axes, degrees for the rotary axes. In position wait Description: it specifies the maximum time (time out) for the axis to remain in the "In position band" (value >=In position window). Range: 0/65.535 Default: 0 Unit type: seconds.
7-6
In position window Description: it specifies the minimun time (time out) for the axis to stay within the "In position band" (value <=In position wait). Range: 0/65.535 Default: 0 Unit type: seconds. NOTE: Depending on the machine coinditions, the new values for these parameters will be put into effect at the end of the current or of the next move.
7-7
Dead Zone
DEAD ZONE
- axis id - axis dead zone (*)
:1 : 0.00000
BACKLASH SPINDLE
Axis id Description: it is the axis identifier. Range: min 1/max 32 Default value: 1 Unit type: none Axis dead zone Description: it is the zone around the end point inside which no voltage is output to the axis. Range: 0/99999.99999 Default value: 0 Unit type: mm or inch for linear axes, degrees for rotary axes. NOTE: The modified values will be immediately put into effect.
7-8
Backlash
BACKLASH
- axis id - axis backlash (*)
:1 : 0.00000
BACKLASH SPINDLE
Axis id Description: it is the axis identifier Range: min 1/max 32 Default value: 1 Unit type: none Axis backlash Description: it is the total amount of mechanical axis backlash to be compensated by the system. Range: -9.99999/+9.99999 Default: 0 Unit type: mm or inch for linear axes, degrees for rotary axes. NOTE1: The new value will be immediately put into effect. NOTE2: With this data-entry it is not possible to activate or deactivate the application algorithm soft for the mechanic backlash; In order to do this it is necessary use the machine logic using the F.B. $AX_PUT1.
7-9
KC KV VFF
KC KV VFF
- axis id - maximun feed - rapid traverse voltage - servo loop gain - stand still servo loop gain - VFF percentage NULL OFFSET KC KV VFF SPLIT PARAM (*/min) (Volt) :1 : 4000.00000 : 7.50000 : 1.00000 : 1.00000 : 100 DEAD ZONE FEED/ACC/JRK RAMP TIME BACKLASH SPINDLE HELP OPER. LIMITS EXIT
Axis id Description: it is the axis identifier. Range: min 1/max 32 Default value: 1 Unit type: none Maximum feed Description: it is the maximum axis feedrate when the "rapid traverse voltage" is applied. Range: 1/999999999 Default value: 4000 Unit type: mm or inches/min for linear axes, degrees/min for rotary axes. Rapid traverse voltage Description: it is the voltage applied for the feedrate specified by the "maximum feed" parameter. Range: -10/+10 Default value: 7.5 Unit type: Volt NOTE: It is suggested a value of 7.5 to maintain the D/A convertor linearity.
7-10
Servo loop gain Description: this is a constant value; when modified, it permits to vary the axis lagging error. Range: 0/10. Default value: 1 Unit type: none Stand still servo loop gain Description: this is a constant value; when modified, it permits to vary the axis lagging error. Unlike the "servo loop gain", it is used when the axis is not moving or is within the position tolerance. Range: 0/10 Default value: 1 Unit type: none VFF percentage Description: this is the VFF percentage used during the axis movement with VFF mode active. Range: 0/100 Default value: 100 Unit type: % NOTE: The input value is immediately put into effect. When the axis is a spindle, an error message will be displayed if the operator configures these parameters. To open the spindle characterization window, press the SPINDLE softkey.
7-11
Servo Error
SERVO ERROR
- axis id - position error at stand still - position error with VFF - position error without VFF :1 (*) : 0.00000 (*) : 0.0000 (*) : 0.0000
BACKLASH SPINDLE
Axis id Description: it is the axis identifier Range: min 1/max 32 Default value: 1 Unit type: none Position error at stand still Description: it specifies the maximum position error for a stand still axis. Range: 0/99999.99999 Default value 0 Unit type: mm or inch for linear axes, degrees for rotary axes. Position error with VFF Description: it specifies the maximum position error for a VFF move. Range: 0/99999.99999 Default value 0 Unit type: mm or inch for linear axes, degrees for rotary axes. NOTE FOR ROLLOVER AXES; If the value entered exceeds the maximum admissible threshold, the latter is automatically forced. The threshold is determined as: (rollover pitch / 2) - space covered in a servo tick at max. speed.
7-12
Position error without VFF Description: it specifies the maximum position error for a move without VFF. Range: 0/99999.99999 Default value: 0 Unit type: mm or inch for linear axes, degrees for rotary axes. NOTE: The input values are immediately put into effect. NOTE FOR ROLLOVER AXES; If the value entered exceeds the maximum admissible threshold, the latter is automatically forced. The threshold is determined as: (rollover pitch / 2) - space covered in a servo tick at max. speed.
7-13
Feed/Acc/Jrk
FEED/ACC/JRK
- axis id - rapid traverse feed - rapid acceleration - manual feed - manual acceleration - rapid jerk - working jerk (+/min) (*/s x s ) (+/min) (*/s x s ) (*/s^3) (*/s^3) :1 : 4000.00000 : 300.00 : 3000.00000 : 3000.00 :0 :0
BACKLASH SPINDLE
Axis id Description: it is the axis identifier Range: min 1/max 32 Default value: 1 Unit type: none Rapid traverse feed Description: it specified the maximum axis velocity. Range: 0/99999.99999 Default value: 4000 Unit type: mm or inches/min for linear axes, degrees/min for rotary axes. Rapid acceleration Description: it specifies the maximum axis acceleration. Range: 0/99999.99999 Default value: 300 Unit type: mm/s or inch/s for linear axes, degrees/s for rotary axes.
2 2 2
7-14
Manual feed Description: it specifies the maximum axis velocity for manual moves (value <=Rapid traverse feed). Range: 0/99999.99999 Default value: 3000 Unit type: mm or inches/min for linear axes, degrees/min for rotary axes. Manual acceleration Description: it specifies the axis acceleration for manual moves (value <= Rapid acceleration). Range: 0/99999.99999 Default value: 300 Unit type: mm/s or inch/s for linear axes, degrees/s for rotary axes. NOTE: The input values will be immediately put into effect. Rapid Jerk Description: is the axis jerk for fast moves and is used by the High Speed Machining and the Jerk Limitation (MOV = 8) algorithms Range: min 0 /max 99999.99999 Default Value: 0 Units: mm/sec or inches/sec for linear axes resp. degrees/sec for rotational axes Working Jerk Description: this is the axis jerk for work feeds (manual and in work G1/2/3) used by the algorithm for high speed machining and Jerk Limitation. Range: min 0/ max 99999.99999 Default Value: 0 Units: mm/sec or inches/sec for linear axes resp. degrees/sec for rotational axes
2 2 2
7-15
Spindle
The SPINDLE softkey opens the following data entry window:
SPINDLE (1of 2)
- axis id - offset for spindle orient. - spindle with acc/dec ramp - max spindle reversal time - gear used for reversal time . speed for orientation - accelerat. for orient. NULL OFFSET KC KV VFF SPLIT PARAM TOLERANCE SERVO ERROR BROKEN WIRE :1 (deg) : 0.00000 :N (s) : 1.00000 :1 (RPM) : 60.00 (rev/s x s ) : 60.00 DEAD ZONE FEED/ACC/JRK RAMP TIME BACKLASH SPINDLE HELP OPER. LIMITS EXIT
To also modify the configuration of the spindle gears, press [Pg Dn] after page 1 of 2 has been completed. The following data entry window will be displayed: Page 2 of 2 must be displayed even if the spindle does not feature a transducer. In fact , this page 2 permits to specify velocity and voltage values that cannot be automatically calculated by the Servo Monitor.
SPINDLE (2 of 2)
max speed - gear 1 (RPM) : 4000.00000 - gear 2 (RPM) : 4000.00000 - gear 3 (RPM) : 4000.00000 - gear 4 (RPM) : 4000.00000 :1 voltage for max RPM - gear 1 (RPM) : 0.000 - gear 2 (RPM) : 0.000 - gear 3 (RPM) : 0.000 - gear 4 (RPM) : 0.000 stand still servo loop gain - gear 1 : 0.00 NULL OFFSET KC KV VFF SPLIT PARAM TOLERANCE SERVO ERROR BROKEN WIRE DEAD ZONE FEED/ACC/JRK RAMP TIME BACKLASH SPINDLE HELP OPER. LIMITS EXIT servo loop gain - gear 1 (RPM) : 0.00 - gear 2 (RPM) : 0.00 - gear 3 (RPM) : 0.00 - gear 4 (RPM) : 0.00
7-16
Axis id Description: it is the axis identifier Range: min 1/max 32 Default value:1 Unit type: none Offset for spindle orient. Description: it is the distance from the spindle marker to the 0 position. Range: -359.99999/+359.99999 Default value: 0 Unit type: degrees Spindle with acc/dec ramp Description: it specifies whether or not the spindle uses an acceleration or deceleration ramp. Range: Y/y/N/n Default value: N Unit type: none Max spindle reversal time Description: it is the maximum time during which the spindle reverts the direction of rotation at the maximum velocity using the gear specified in the "gear used for reversal time" parameter. Range: 0.001/99999.99999 Default value: 1 Unit type: seconds Gear used for reversal time Description: specifies the gear used for spindle reversal over the time defined by the "max spindle reversal time" parameter. Range: 1/4 Default value: 1 Unit type: none Speed for orientation Description: specifies the spindle orientation speed in rpm. Range: 0.1/9999.99 Default value: 60 Unit type: RPM
7-17
Accelerat. for orient Description: specifies the acceleration used for spindle orientation. Range: 0.1/99.999 Default value: 60 Unit type: revs/sec2 NOTE: These parameters must be configured only if the axis is a spindle. If the data entries are filled in but the axis is not a spindle, an error message will be displayed. The input values are immediately put into effect. Max speed Description: it is the maximum speed associated to the "voltage for max RPM" value. Range: 0.1/99999.99999 Default value: 4000 Unit type: RPM Voltage for max RPM Description: it is the voltage that permits to obtain the "max speed". A value in the range 7.5 is recommended to operate within the D/A converter Linearity. Range: -10/+10 Default value: 0 Unit type: Volt Servo loop gain Description: it is the gain applied during spindle orientation. Range: 0/10 Default value: 0 Unit type: none Stand still servo loop gain Description: it is the gain applied during the "stand still" phase of the spindle orientation. It is valid only for gear 1. Range: 0/10 Default value: 0 Unit type: none NOTE: The new gear values calculated using these parameters are not put immediately into effect. They require a change of gear.
7-18
Operative Limits
OPERATIVES LIMITS
- axis id - upper software overtravel - lower software overtravel :1 (*) : 0.00000 (*) : 0.0000
BACKLASH SPINDLE
Axis id Description: it is the axis identifier Range: min 1/max 32 Default value: 1 Unit type: none Upper software overtravel Description: it is the positive software travel limit for the specified axis measured with respect to the home position. Range: -99999.99999/+99999.99999 Default value: 0 Unit type: mm or inch for linear axes, degrees for rotary axes. Lower software overtravel Description: it is the positive software travel limit for the specified axis measured with respect to the home position. Range: -99999.99999/+99999.99999 Default value: 0 Unit type: mm or inch for linear axes, degrees for rotary axes. NOTE: If 0.0 appears in both software overtravel fields the travel limits will be disabled. To enable the new values, press RESET or CYCLE START.
7-19
Split Param.
SPLIT AXIS PARAMETERS
- axis id - offset between markers - skew error - max. skew error - skew gain NULL OFFSET KC KV VFF SPLIT PARAM TOLERANCE SERVO ERROR BROKEN WIRE :1 (pulse) : 0 (*) : 0.0000 (*) : 0.0000 : 0.00 DEAD ZONE FEED/ACC/JRK RAMP TIME BACKLASH SPINDLE HELP OPER. LIMITS EXIT
Axis id Description: it is the axis identifier Range: min 1/max 32 Default value: 1 Unit type: none Offset between markers Description: it specifies the distance between the marker of the slave and that of the master. If in this field the value -1 is inserted, when executing the split axis homing cycle, the system does not recover the skew, if any, between the markers but it considers such skew as a distance really existing. By pressing again the SPLIT PARAM softkey, the system visualizes in this field the skew value found. It is up to the operator that this value goes back to the corresponding field of the AMP. Range: -2147483647/+2147483647 Default value: 0 Unit type: pulses Skew error Description: it specifies the allowed error between two axes. It is calculated as the difference between the position of the master and that of the slave. Range: 0/99999.99999 Default value: 0 Unit type:mm or inch for linear axes, degrees for rotary axes.
7-20
Max. skew error Description: it is the maximum alignement error between two axes. If the skew error is greater than this value, the axes will not start moving. Range:0/99999.99999 Default value: 0 Unit type: mm or inch for linear axes, degrees for rotary axes. Skew gain Description: it is a constant applied to the "skew error" offset. Range: 0/2 Default value: 0 Unit type: none NOTE: Except for the "offset between markers", all the values in this data entry window are immediately put into effect. The "offset between markers" is enabled by the subsequent homing cycle.
7-21
Broken wire
BROKEN WIRE
- axis id - disable broken wire (Y/N) :1 :
BACKLASH SPINDLE
Axis id Description: axis identifier. Range: min 1/max 32 Default value: 1 Unit type: none Disable broken wire Description: enables or disables the broken wire for the selected axis. Range: YES/NO Default value: none Unit type: none
7-22
Ramp Time
RAMP TIME
- axis id - Rapid minimum ramp time - Working minimum ramp time :1 (msec) : 0.0 (msec) : 0.0
DEAD ZONE FEED/ACC./JRK RAMP TIME
BACKLASH SPINDLE
Axis id Description: axis identifier. Range: min 1/max 32 Default value: 1 Unit type: none Rapid minimum ramp time (Minimum ramp time for rapid movements) Description: this is the minimum time it takes the axis to reach maximum acceleration (jerk application time) and it is used by High Speed Machining algorithms and the movements using non linear ramps. Variation range: min 0/max 999.99 Default value: 0 (Minimum time algorithm deactivated) Type of unit: milliseconds Working minimum ramp time (Minimum ramp time for working movements) Description: this is the minimum time it takes the axis to reach maximum acceleration (jerk application time) and it is used by High Speed Machining algorithms and the movements using non linear ramps. Variation range: min 0/max 999.99 Default value: 0 (Minimum time algorithm deactivated) Type of unit: milliseconds
7-23
CONFIGURING THE OSCILLOSCOPE

The oscilloscope can be tailored to the user requirements by setting its configuration parameters, which are displayed in two data entry pages. The first step in the oscilloscope configuration is to select the controlled variable and then define the parameters associated with the variable selected through specific data entry panels
Config. oscill.
OSCILLOSCOPE PARAMETERS (1 of 2)
- sampling tick (ms) : 10 - variable (1/2/3/4) :1 feed calculated on profile feed calculated (single axis) following error (single axis) feed and error on same axis - auto screen clear (Y/N) : N
-1 -2 -3 -4
CHANGE PARAM
CONFIG. OSCILL
CLEAR SCREEN OSCILL. CONTIN
TRIGGER
EXAME DATA EXIT
Sampling tick Description: it is the interval between two subsequent samplings of the controlled variable. It must be equal to or a multiple of the system tick. Range: in function of the system tick Default value: 10 Unit type: msec Variable Description: it is the type of variable to be sampled. Possible types are as follows: feedrate on the profile calculated by the interpolator (1) axis feedrate for 1 or 2 axes calculated by the interpolator (2) lagging error for 1 or 2 axes (3) feedrate and lagging error for the same axis, only for 1 axis (4) Range: 1/2/3/4 Default value: 1 Unit type: none
7-24
Auto screen clear Description: This parameter permits to define whether the screen is to be completely cleared when the graphic displayed by the oscilloscope is completed (Y) or whether the graphic display mode proceeds to overlap the new graphic to the old one (N). The selected screen clear mode is valid when the new monitoring session is opened by pressing the OSCILL. CONTIN. or TRIGGER softkeys. By overlapping a sequence of graphics it is possible to analyze in real-time how the values vary through different time intervals. Range: Y/N Default value: N Unit type: none NOTE: To clear the screen at any moment, press the CLEAR SCREEN softkey. After the parameters in this data entry window have been defined, press [Enter] or the CONFIG. OSCILL. to confirm and store them and close the window. If you press [Pg Dn], the second data entry page will be displayed which allows to define other parameters typical of the controlled variable.
7-25
Feedrate on the profile

To define the parameters that configure the feedrate on the profile it is necessary to fill in the following fields:
- feed lower limit - feed upper limit - treshold value - process number (*/min) : 0.00000 (*/min) : 0.00000 (*/min) : 0.00000 :0 CLEAR SCREEN OSCILL. CONTIN HELP EXAME DATA EXIT
CHANGE PARAM
CONFIG. OSCILL
TRIGGER
Feed lower limit Description: it is the lower limit of the variable to be displayed and is equivalent to the lower ordinate limit drawn by the oscilloscope during the monitoring session. Sampled values below this limit will be ignored. Range: -999999999/+999999999 Default value: 0 Unit type: mm or inches/min for linear axes, degrees/min for rotary axes. Feed upper limit Description: it is the upper limit of the variable to be displayed and is equivalent to the upper ordinate limit drawn by the oscilloscope during the monitoring session. Sampled values above this limit will not be displayed. Range: -999999999/+999999999 Default value: 0 Unit type: mm or inches/min for linear axes, degrees/min for rotary axes. Threshold value Description: if the absolute difference between two subsequent feedrate values is less than this threshold, both values are considered equal and the second one is ignored. This feature, which permits to reduce the number of sampled points stored in the buffer by eliminating the less significant ones, is particularly convenient when analyzing long distances covered at a constant feedrate. Range: 0/99999.99999 Default value: 0 Unit type: mm or inches/min for linear axes, degrees/min
7-26
Process number Description: It is the process number whose "feed on profile" must be displayed. Range: from 1 up to the maximum number of configured processes Default value: 0 Unit type: none NOTE: By pressing [Enter] or CONFIG.OSCILL. it is possible to store the values defined in both data entry pages, which will be displayed as default values the next time the data entry window is opened. If the data entry window is closed with [Esc], the new values defined in both data entry pages will be ignored and the default values will be those that appeared on display when the window opened.
7-27
Feed calculated (single axis)

To define the feed parameters for one axis it is necessary to fill in the following fields:
- feed lower limit - feed upper limit - treshold value - first axis logical id -second axis logical id CHANGE PARAM CONFIG. OSCILL (*/min) : -1000.00000 (*/min) : 1000.00000 (*/min) : 0.00000 :1 :0 CLEAR SCREEN OSCILL. CONTIN TRIGGER HELP EXAME DATA EXIT
Feed lower limit Description: it is the lower limit of the variable to be displayed and is equivalent to the lower ordinate limit drawn by the oscilloscope during the monitoring session. Sampled values below this limit will be ignored. Range: -999999999/+999999999 Default value: -1000 Unit type: mm or inches/min for linear axes, degrees/min for rotary axes. Feed upper limit Description: it is the upper limit of the variable to be displayed and is equivalent to the upper ordinate limit drawn by the oscilloscope during the monitoring session. Sampled values above this limit will not be displayed. Range: -999999999/+999999999 Default value: 1000 Unit type: mm or inches/min for linear axes, degrees/min for rotary axes. Threshold value Description: if the absolute difference between two subsequent feedrate values is less than this threshold, both values are considered equal and the second one is ignored. This feature, which permits to reduce the number of sampled points stored in the buffer by eliminating the less significant ones, is particularly convenient when analyzing long distances covered at a constant feedrate. Range: 0/99999.99999 Default value: 0 Unit type: mm or inches/min for linear axes, degrees/min for rotary axes.
7-28
First axis logical id Description: it identifies the axis to be sampled. Range: min 1/max 32 Default value: 1 Unit type: none Second axis logical id Description: it permits to identify the second axis to be sampled. Write 0 to indicate that only one axis is to be monitored. Range: min 0/max 32 Default value: 2 Unit type: none NOTE: By pressing [Enter] or CONFIG.OSCILL. it is possible to store the values defined in both data entry pages, which will be displayed as default values the next time the data entry window is opened. If the data entry window is closed with [Esc], the new values defined in both data entry pages will be ignored and the default values will be those that appeared on display when the window opened.
7-29
Following error (single axis)

To define the following error parameters it is necessary to fill in the following data entry fields:
- error lower limit - error upper limit - treshold value - first axis logical id -second axis logical id CHANGE PARAM CONFIG. OSCILL (*) : -100.00000 (*) : 100.00000 (*) : 0.00000 :1 :0 CLEAR SCREEN OSCILL. CONTIN TRIGGER HELP EXAME DATA EXIT
Error lower limit Description: it is the lower limit of the variable to be displayed and is equivalent to the lower ordinate limit drawn by the oscilloscope during the monitoring session. Sampled values below this limit will not be displayed. Range: -99999.99999/+99999.99999 Default value: -100 Unit type: mm or inches, degrees. Error upper limit Description: it is the upper limit of the variable to be displayed and is equivalent to the upper ordinate limit drawn by the oscilloscope during the monitoring session. Sampled values above this limit will not be displayed. Range: -99999.99999/+99999.99999 Default value: 100 Unit type: mm or inches, degrees. Threshold value Description: if the absolute difference between two subsequent errors is less than this threshold, both values are considered equal and the second one is ignored. This feature permits the reduction of the number of sampled points stored in the buffer by eliminating the less significant ones. Range: 0/99999.99999 Default value: 0 Unit type:mm or inch for linear axes, degrees for rotary axes.
7-30
First axis logical id Description: it identifies the axis to be sampled. Range: min 1/max 32 Default value: 1 Unit type: none Second axis logical id Description: it allows to identify the second axis to be sampled. Write 0 to indicate that only one axis is to be monitored. Range: min 0/max 32 Default value: 0 Unit type: none NOTE: By pressing [Enter] or CONFIG.OSCILL. it is possible to store the values defined in both data entry pages, which will be displayed as default values the next time the data entry window is opened. If the data entry window is closed with [Esc], the new values defined in both data entry pages will be ignored and the default values will be those that appeared on display when the window opened.
7-31
Feed and error on same axis

In order to define define parameters relative to feed and error on the same axis, it is necessary to compile the following data-entry:
- feed lower limit - feed upper limit - feed threshold value - error lower limit - error upper limit - error threshold value - axis logical id CHANGE PARAM CONFIG. OSCILL (*) : 0.00000 (*) : 0.00000 (*) : 0.00000 (*) : -100.00000 (*) : 100.00000 (*) : 0.00000 :1 CLEAR SCREEN OSCILL. CONTIN TRIGGER HELP EXAME DATA EXIT
feed lower limit (*/min) feed upper limit (*/min) feed threshold value (*/min) error lower limit (*) error upper limit (*) error threshold limit (*) as error on single axis as feed on single axis
Axis logical id Description: it allows to specify the axis on which you want to carry out the sampling. Range: min 1/max 32 Default value: 1 Unit type: none
7-32
CONTINUOUS MODE
When set in continuous mode, the oscilloscope launches the data acquisition routine at the frequency specified by the sampling tick. The graphics generated by the sampled values is displayed as described in the "Data Display Modes" section. When the graphics reaches the upper abscissa limit, it re-starts from the left-most corner of the screen. If the "auto screen clear" parameter has been set to "Y", the screen will be totally cleared. If the "auto screen clear" parameter has been set to "N", the new portion of the graphics will overlap the old one. To abort the monitoring session, press the OSCILL. CONTIN. softkey. The only other active softkey during the monitoring session is CLEAR SCREEN.
TRIGGER MODE
When set in trigger mode, the oscilloscope launches the data acquisition routine at the frequency specified by the sampling tick. The graphics generated by the sampled values is displayed as described in the "Data Display Modes" section. The monitoring session ends when the data acquisition buffer is full, which is indicated by the TRIGGER COMPLETED message. To abort the monitoring session at any moment, press the TRIGGER softkey. The only other active softkey during the monitoring session is CLEAR SCREEN.
DATA DISPLAY MODES

Sampled data are stored in circular buffers that may be kept in files for subsequent analysis. When the monitored variable is the feedrate on the profile, there is only one buffer available. When the monitored variables are the feedrate or the following error on two axes there are two available buffers. When the feedrate or the following error on one axis is monitored, the absolute axis position at each sampling is also stored separatedly in a dedicated buffer. The values in this buffer do not appear during the standard data acquisition and display session but may be displayed by pressing the DIMENSION softkey (from EXAME DATA environment).
7-33
The cartesian axes are displayed as follows:
CHANGE PARAM
CONFIG. OSCILL
CLEAR SCREEN OSCILL. CONTIN
TRIGGER
HELP EXAME DATA EXIT
Depending on the controlled variable, the ordinate axis may show feedrate (f) or following error (e) values. The upper and lower ordinate limits are defined in the oscilloscope configuration. In case of feedrate and error on the same axis, minimum and maximum limits are displayed both for feedrate (white) and for error (red). The abscissa axis shows time (t) values expressed in miliseconds. The lower limit is always zero, whereas the upper limit is the time needed for sampling all the points in the current display page. Each displayed point corresponds to a sampled value and each screen can display 590 points on the abscissa axis. Consequently, if the sampling tick is 10ms, the maximum time limit will be 5900 ms and the point on the upper abscissa axis will correspond to the 590th sampling. When the controlled variable is the feedrate on the profile, the sampled points are displayed in yellow. When the controlled variables are the feedrates or the following errors of two axes, the points on the first declared axis ("first axis logical id") will be displayed in yellow, whereas the points on the second declared axis will be displayed in red. The axes identifiers are displayed respectively in yellow and red on the left-hand side of the ordinate axis. In case of feedrate and error on the same axis, the points relative to the feedrate are displayed in yellow and those relative to the error are displayed in red colour.
7-34
Sampled points are displayed in real time, i.e. in the instant in which the oscilloscope acquires their values. However, when analysis of a partition is too slow due to the system being overloaded, the system cannot synchronize data acquisition with data display. As a result, the oscilloscope continues sampling points at the configured tick whereas the display lags behind. If this difference is too big, some points may be lost without being displayed, i.e. in the circular buffer the first sampled values may be covered by points sampled after the buffer is full. When this occurs, the system displays a vertical bar of the same color as the axis whose data have been lost and proceeds to display the latest acquired values. The graphics are generated inside an area delimited by the cartesian axes, from left to right. During the data display, when the graphics reaches the upper abscissa limit, it re-starts from the left-most point of the cartesian system. Values below the lower ordinate limit or above the upper ordinate limit will not be displayed. During a monitoring session it is possible to clear the screen at any moment by pressing the CLEAR SCREEN softkey. If CLEAR SCREEN is pressed when the oscilloscope is active, the system will resume graphics display from the left-most point of the cartesian system (lower abscissa limit).
7-35
ANALYZING THE DATA (EXAME)
Main menu and graphics

When the EXAME DATA softkey is pressed, the following menu appears:
HELP ZOOM TIME ENLARGE SAVE ASCII DIMENSION SAVE CHECK RESTORE EXIT
The system also displays a graphics with all the points that have been sampled during the last continuous or trigger oscilloscope session. If the buffer is empty, i.e. if there has been no previous oscilloscope session, no graphics will be displayed and the following error message will appear: "No data to display in buffer"; in this case, the HELP, EXIT and RESTORE softkeys only will be active. When the buffer is not empty, the graphics that appears inside the system of cartesian coordinates is similar to the one displayed for the continuous or trigger oscilloscopes. The ordinate axis shows feedrate or following error values. It limits are specified in the oscillocope configuration, rounded off for the sake of calculation. The maximum limit on the abscissa axis shows the total time of sampled points for the displayed values. In trigger mode the lower limit is always zero (expressed in ms) whereas the upper limit is the time consumed for sampling the displayed points, which can be calculated with the following formula: t =(sampling tick) x (number of sampled points) In continuous mode the lower limit is always different from zero because the circular buffer must have been overflown at least once. It normally corresponds to the time in which the first displayed value has been sampled, whereas the upper limit is the same as in the trigger mode. The graphics is compressed to occupy a single page. If the number of points is too high, the diagram can be best analyzed using the ZOOM and TIME ENLARGE options. When two axes are monitored and two graphics are displayed, overlapping points, i.e. points in which both axes have the same value, are displayed in white (rather than in yellow or red). While the system is drawing the graphics, all of the softkeys are disabled.
7-36
Zoom
When the ZOOM softkey is pressed, the zoom rectangular window appears in the middle of the quadrant. To position the zoom window, press the arrow keys in the desired direction. Press the [+] key on the right of the keyboard to enlarge the zoom window and press the [-] to reduce it. To display the selected portion of the graphics, i.e. the portion within the window, press ZOOM again. The portion of the graphics will appear within a new cartesian system whose new upper and lower limits depend on the position and the dimensions of the rectangle. The resulting graphics represents those data that have been sampled in the interval between the upper and lower abscissa limits (expressed in ms). They have been enlarged as a result of the narrowing of the ordinate limits. Press [Esc] to cancel the "zoom" mode and re-display the current graphics.
Time Enlarge
When the TIME ENLARGE softkey is pressed, the rectangular zoom window appears in the middle of the quadrant. The portion to be displayed can be selected with the same procedure described for the zoom option. The graphics is compressed on the ordinate axis and enlarged on the abscissa (time) axis. To enable the enlarge option, press TIME ENLARGE again. TIME ENLARGE is typically used when the graphics is highly compressed and has a great number of points. In such cases it is advisable to use it in conjunction with the ZOOM option. Press [Esc] to cancel the TIME-ENLARGED diagram and re-display the current graphics.
Dimension
This function permits to analyze the diagram coordinates with greater accuracy in order to establish the exact error or axis feedrate on a given point in the diagram. When the DIMENSION softkey is pressed, the cursor adopts the form of a cross. To move the cursor on the plane delimited by the cartesian axes, press the [Left/Right Up/Down Arrow] keys. To modify the cursor step, press [+] or [-] . The parameters that describe the current position of the cursor are displayed on a window that occupies the upper right corner of the screen. The first parameter, t, is the time that corresponds to the current cursor position referred to the abscissa axis.
7-37
The second parameter (f for feedrate or e for following error) is the position of the cursor with respect to the ordinate axis. If there is only one graphics and it shows the following error or the feedrate on one axis, the parameter window displays a third parameter, s that represents the absolute position of the controlled axis in the instant marked by the current cursor position. The value of parameter changes only when the cursor moves along the time axis. To close the "DIMENSION" session, press the DIMENSION softkey. In case of feedrate and following error on the same axis, the feedrate value will be displayed in the window after the time value, and the error value relative to the current cursor position will appear on the following line.
Check
When the CHECK softkey is pressed, the system re-displays the graphics shown on entering the "EXAME DATA" submenu. This permits to restore the original graphics after a series of ZOOM or TIME ENLARGE operations.
Save ASCII
This function is used to print an ASCII file the values sampled for the interval between the two coordinate axes.
SAVE ASCII DATA ON FILE

file name:
File name Description: the path name of a file in which to save the values displayed in ASCII format. The parameter must be given in DOS format "E:\dir\....\nome file"; drives C and D are not allowed. If the file exists already, you are prompted to confirm that it it is to be overwritten.
7-38
SAVING AND RESTORING DATA

The Servo Monitor permits to store the data acquired during an oscilloscope session and to restore them for subsequent analysis.
Save
This softkey permits to save the data acquired during an oscilloscope session. When SAVE is pressed the following data entry window will be displayed:
SAVE DATA IN FILE

file name:
File name Description: It specifies which file will be used for storing the data collected during the last oscilloscope session. It may be the name of the file with or without the drive and the pathname in MS DOS format. Drives "C" and "D" are not allowed. If only the name of the file is specified, the default drive and pathname will be: "E:\USD". If a file with the same name already exists, it will be overwritten by the new file. To enable the save operation, after keying in the file name (an path if necessary), press [Enter] or SAVE. To abort a save operation, press [Esc]. NOTE: After a SAVE session, all the oscilloscope parameters remain unchanged.
7-39
Restore
This softkey permits to restore the data stored in a save session either on the same or on a different system.
RESTORE DATA FROM FILE

file name:
File name Description: it may be simply the file name or include the drive and the pathname in MS DOS format. It specifies the file that has been used for storing data during a SAVE session. Drives "C" and "D" are not allowed. If only the name of the file is specified, the default drive and pathname will be: "E:\USD". Key in the file name (and the pathname) and press [Enter] or RESTORE. The system loads the data into the oscilloscope buffer and immediately displays them. During this stage the system also checks whether the format of the loaded data is compatible with the Servo Monitor format. After the data have been loaded and checked by the system, they can be analyzed using the Oscilloscope utilities. To cancel a RESTORE session press [Esc]. NOTE: After a RESTORE session, the oscilloscope default parameters remain unchanged whereas the data that were stored in the oscilloscope buffer will be lost and replaced by the new ones.
7-40
ERROR MESSAGES
The table that follows describes the messages that may be displayed during Servo Monitor operation.
Message Axis not configured
Description The identifier specified in the data entry for modifying or configuring the oscilloscope parameters corresponds to an axis that has not been declared in the system characterization. The identifier specified in the SPINDLE data entry corresponds to an axis that is not a spindle. It is not possible to repeat an axis identifier in the oscilloscope configuration. The upper and lower limit values are not legal, i.e. the upper limit is smaller than the lower limit or the difference between the two is zero. The KC and KV parameters for the spindle must be configured in the SPINDLE data entry window and not in the KC KV.
It's not a spindle
Same id for two axes
Limit values not allowed
Axis is a spindle. Change parameters with SPINDLE data-entry Spindle without transducer. Press Page Down to give voltage and feed No data to display in buffer
If the spindle does not feature a transducer, additional spindle parameters such as voltage and feedrate must be specified in the second page of the SPINDLE data entry window. The EXAM DATA session has been opened but the buffers are empty buffers, i.e. there has been no previous oscilloscope session. There is not enough memory space for loading softkey areas, data-entries, errors or helps. In a SAVE session there is not enough memory space for file storage. The specified path-name does not exist. An error occurs when a file is closed, for example when the disk is full
Not enough space
Wrong path name Error in closing file
7-41
Message Error in initialization File protection error Floppy Disk protected in write Error in device name Device not exists or floppy not inserted Hardware error on disk Error reading file
Description Initialization error. For example, a softkey file, a data-entry file, and error file or a help file is not found. During a SAVE operation the destination file is write-protected. During a SAVE operation the destination floppy disk is writeprotected. During a SAVE or RESTORE operation the specified device name is not allowed. During a SAVE or RESTORE operation the destination device does not exist or the floppy disk is not found, i.e. has not been inserted in the drive. The system has detected a hardware disk error. The system has detected a file reading error.
Sampling tick must be equal The sampling tick specified during the oscilloscope configuration is or multiple of system tick not allowed. The oscilloscope sampling tick must be equal to or a multiple of the system tick, which is normally equal to the interpolator tick. It's not a master split axis The SPLIT PARAM data entry is accepted only if the specified identifier corrresponds to a master split axis. File is not suitable for restore The file to be restored has not an allowed format, i.e. it has not been created during a SAVE session. In position band field too small (< 1 digit) When converted into the internal unit of measure, the value entered in the in Position band field turns out to be smaller than the minimum value of transducer resolution, i.e., the value has been rounded off to zero. Enter a higher value.
END OF CHAPTER
7-42
Chapter
DSI SERVICE CHANNEL
This utility allows to communicate with the DSI type digital drives to read their parameters, write data, send commands, save their configuration or load one which has been selected. For its activation you need to press the DIAGNOSTIC softkey from the main menu and from this menu select DSI SRV CHAN softkey.
SELECT PROCESS PART PROGRAM DIAGNOSTIC
General screen of CNC Series 10
DSI SRV CHAN
DIAGNOSTIC Menu DSI Service Channel utility screen
D.S.I. drives Configurator
date: dd/mm/yy
time: hh/mm
SETUP SELECT AXIS SHOW LOAD LOG
DESCRIPTION READ BLOCK
SAVE ALL WRITE DATA
LOAD COMMAND
HELP SAVE AX INFO EXIT
8-1
Chapter 8 DSI Service Channel
SETUP
On pressing the SETUP softkey the following screen is displayed:
D.S.I. drives Configurator date: dd/mm/yy time: hh/mm
--- D.S.I. Drives Configurator ---
D.S.I. Axis ID Axis Id : Axis Id : Axis Id : Axis Id : Axis Id : Axis Id : Axis Id : Axis Id :
IDNs format IDNs format : IDNs format : IDNs format : IDNs format : IDNs format : IDNs format : IDNs format : IDNs format :
Page 1 of 4 SETUP SELECT AXIS SHOW LOAD LOG DESCRIPTION READ BLOCK SAVE ALL WRITE DATA LOAD COMMAND HELP SAVE AX INFO EXIT
This data entry is composed of 4 pages, each of them allows to insert a maximum of 8 D.S.I. (from those defined in AMP) identifiers and to define, for each axis, the identifying (IDN) drive parameters format representation. Page scrolling is executed by pressing the Page Up/Down keys. The SETUP softkey is the only one that can be selected if files with configuration data of drives (see the description of the DIMENSION softkey on the next pages) do not exist.
8-2
In particular: Axis Id Description: The D.S.I. axis identifier which you want to access in reading/writing to the digital drive parameters. The identifier must be included among those defined in AMP for the D.S.I. axes.
Range: min 1/max 32 Default value: none Unit type: none IDNs Format Description: IDNs formats of drive parameters N = Numeric (1, 2, 3, ...) S = Symbolic (S - 0 -1, ...,P - 0 - 1, ...) Range: N/S Default value: none Unit type: none
DESCRIPTION
The DIMENSION softkey enables the utility which, for each axis inserted with SETUP, reads the IDN list with the relative parameter description from the drive and writes it into files (one per axis). As this operation can take some time to execute, the user is asked to confirm after pressing the DIMENSION softkey: Utility screen This operation may take a long time. Proceed anyway (Y/N)? If the answer is Yes the following message appears: Utility screen Get Information from axis id N ... Working ... where N is one of the axes identifiers inserted by SETUP. When the above mentioned file(s) writing is finished, the message is removed from the screen and the SAVE ALL and SELECT AXIS softkeys of the menu second row are activated. The DESCRIPTION and LOAD softkeys are the only ones that can be selected after each updating of SETUP fields.
8-3
SAVE ALL
After pressing the SAVE ALL softkey the following screen appears:
--- Save D.S.I. Drives Configuration --Type file name :
DESCRIPTION READ DATA
SAVE ALL WRITE DATA
LOAD COMMAND
This data entry screen asks for the name of the file for saving the data blocks of all the axes inserted with the SETUP softkey. If you do not enter the full path starting from the drive letter, it is assumed that the file is under E:\USD. The file will be called "drive configuration file. [Enter] or [F7] (SAVE ALL softkey) confirms the file name entered and the save operation starts by showing the message: Save Data Blocks of axis id N ......Working...... where N identifies the axis whose configuration is being saved. N runs through the identifiers of all axes configured with the SETUP softkey. Errors during this operation cause the cancellation of the relative configuration file.
The operation is aborted by pressing [Esc].
8-4
Format and syntax of the configuration file

1. Format SAVE ALL creates a configuration file which is an ASCII file containing comments and data (the same is true for SAVE AX INFO described later). The data are organized into two logic groups of different levels: first level: second level: data for an axis data for an IDN of the axis
In the following these groups of an axis or an IDN will be called "sections" and fields of the section the elements contained. 2. Syntax rules a line of the file cannot contain more than 80 characters comments comment lines have to start with ; a line cannot contain a comment as well as data configuration data: each configuration data element has to be contained in its own dedicated line of the file (a line cannot contain several configuration data elements) each data element has to be preceded by its key word: Axis = key word for DSI axis identifiers Idn = key word for the IDN of an axis Name = key word for parameter descriptions Attr = key word for attributes Un = key word for measurement units Min = key word for minimum Max = key word for maximum Data = key word for data blocks each key word has to be written in the format shown above sections the start of a section is marked by a key word followed by a value enclosed in square brackets: Example: Axis = 9 or Idn = 104 there are the following sections: axis section IDN section Axis = ID where ID is the logic identifier of the axis Idn = NUM where NUM is the IDN in numeric or symbolic format
an axis section contains as many IDN sections as have been configured for the axis
8-5
an IDN section consists of the following fields: Name =... Attr =... Un = ... Min =... Max =... Data =... Example: Idn = 104 Name = Kv Attr = 0x4401 Un = Min = Max = Data = 1.0 the attribute (field Attr =...) must ALWAYS be present and has to be written in hexadecimal format in the following way: Attr = 0xNNNN Depending on the value of this field there are four possible data types (field Data =...): Decimal values Data = float where float is a Real or an Integer in decimal format Hexadecimal or binary values Data = 0xNNNN Strings Data = ssssssssssssss Lists Data = N1, N2, N3, ... if the field Data = ... contains a list which extends over several lines in the file this is indicated by ending a line with // after the comma of the last list element and by ending the entire list with #. Example: Data = 1, 2, 3, 5, 80, 55, // 91, 102, 200, 310, // 501, 502#
8-6
Example for a configuration file: ; ; Title: Ring Configuration ; Date: 29/08/97 - Time 10:26:03 ; ;---IDNs of Axis Id 15 Axis = 15 ; Idn = 1 Name = NC Cycle Time (Tncyc) Attr = 0x110001 Un = usec Min = 500 Max = 65000 Data = 1000 ; Idn = 2 Name = SERCOS cycle (Tscyc) Attr = 0x110001 Un = usec Min = 500 Max = 65000 Data = 1000 ; Idn = 3 Name = Minimum At Transmit Starting Time (T1min) Attr = 0x110001 Un = usec Min = Max = Data = 12 ; : :
8-7
LOAD
After pressing the LOAD softkey the following screen is displayed:
--- Load D.S.I. Drives Configuration --Directory path :
SAVE ALL WRITE DATA
LOAD COMMAND
In the input field Directory path, enter the name of the directory containing the configuration file you want to load. The path can either be complete or start with \, which selects the E: drive. Example: 1. specifying the full path: Directory Path: F:\DSI\CFG\, or 2. specifying the path starting from a directory: Directory Path:\DSI\, in example 2. The full path is E:\DSI\ Pressing [Enter] or [F8] (LOAD softkey) confirms the entered data and the LOAD operation proceeds by showing the second data entry screen described in the following. The operation is aborted by pressing [Esc].
8-8
date: dd/mm/yy
time: hh/mm
. . . . . FILE n . . FILE n + 1 . . . . --Selected File-File : FILE n + 1
SAVE ALL WRITE DATA
LOAD COMMAND
The left-hand window of the screen lists all files in the directory specified in the data entry screen described on the previous page. You can scroll the list with the [Up/Dn Arrow] or the [Pg Up/Dn] keys. A colored bar highlights the selected file name. The right-hand window is read-only and reports the file selected in the left window. Pressing [Enter] or [F8] (LOAD softkey) confirms the entered data and the LOAD operation proceeds by showing the third data entry screen described in the following. The operation is aborted by pressing [Esc].
8-9
date: dd/mm/yy
time: hh/mm
Read Ax Id : Write Ax Id : Read Ax Id : Write Ax Id : Read Ax Id : Write Ax Id : Read Ax Id : Write Ax Id :
SAVE ALL WRITE DATA
LOAD COMMAND
The Read Ax Id fields are read-only and show the axes identifiers read from the selected configuration file. In the Write Ax Id fields you have to enter the identifiers of the axes configured with the SETUP softkey on which you want to copy the configuration of the corresponding one from the line above. Example: Read Ax Id : Write Ax Id :
1 6
2 5
3 8
5 1
In this example there is a configuration file in which the drive data for the 1, 2, 3 and 5 axes have been saved. These are to be assigned respectively to the axes 6, 5, 8 and 1 of those present on the control and inserted by SETUP. The following situation is also legitimate: Read Ax Id : Write Ax Id : 1 6 2 3 8 5
where the configuration read for the drives of the axes 2 and 5 are not copied on any axes in the control. For copying the configuration of a drive on several drives of the control repeat the LOAD request.
8-10
[Enter] or [F8] (LOAD softkey) confirms the file name entered and the load operation starts by showing the message: Load Data Blocks of axis id N ...Working... where N is one of the identifiers entered in a Write Ax Id field of the data entry screen. Drive access errors occurring during this operation are written in the E:\USD\LOAD.LOG file.
8-11
SELECT AXIS
When the SELECT AXIS softkey is pressed, the following screen is displayed:
--- D.S.I. Axis ID Selection ---
Axis id: Axis id: Axis id: Axis id: Axis id: Axis id: Axis id: Axis id:
Axis id: Axis id: Axis id: Axis id: Axis id: Axis id: Axis id: Axis id: -- Select Axis Id: --
SAVE ALL WRITE DATA
LOAD COMMAND
This data entry allows to select an axis identifier among those inserted by SETUP and displayed in Axis Id 4 columns indicated as reading only fields.
8-12
After the axis is selected, in the right-hand part of the screen, the window containing the list of IDNs relative to that axis is displayed. In the window you can scroll the list elements using the [Up/Dn] keys or [Pg Up/Dn]. A luminous bar positioned at the window centre highlights the IDN reached with the scanning, which is considered to be the one selected for further operations. In addition, on the top of the video, under the title row, another window is displayed, containing the axis identifier and the IDN selected with the drive parameter description identified in this way. READ BLOCK, WRITEDATA, COMMAND and SAVE AX INFO softkeys are activated, because only at this point is it possible to communicate with the drive to read/write data or send relative commands to a selected axis. The following shows a screen with IDN 9 selection for axis 5:
D.S.I. drives Configurator Axis : 5 IDN : 9 date: dd/mm/yy Beginning Address in Master Data Telegram ID Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 15 17 time: hh/mm
SAVE ALL WRITE DATA
LOAD COMMAND
8-13
READ BLOCK
When the READ BLOCK softkey is pressed, the following screen is displayed: (Example of READ BLOCK screen with IDN 9 selection)
D.S.I. drives Configurator Axis : 5 IDN : 9 date: dd/mm/yy Beginning Address in Master Data Telegram ID Number 1 2 --- Read Data Block & Operation Data --Unit Attribute Minimum input value Maximum input value Operation data : : : : : 0 x 110001 1 65535 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 15 17 time: hh/mm
SAVE ALL WRITE DATA
LOAD COMMAND
The description of this data entry is preceded by a short specification about the structure of what, until now has been generally indicated as drive parameters operation. Each IDN identifies a data structure that from now will be named Data Block. A Data Block is composed by the following elements: Attribute Unit Name Minimum Maximum Operation Data
8-14
Attribute:
contains the information relative to the Operation Data representation format. The element, 4 bytes long, is structured as follows: bit 15-0: bit 18-16: conversion factor used to convert numeric data in visual display formats Operation Data length 000 - reserved 001 - Operation Data is 2 bytes long 010 - Operation Data is 4 bytes long 011 - reserved 100 - Operation Data is a sequence of n (variable) elements of 1 byte each 101 - Operation Data is a sequence of n (variable) elements of 2 byte each 110 - Operation Data is a sequence of n (variable) elements of 4 byte each 111 - reserved bit 19: indicates if Operation Data is used to send a command to the drive 0 - no command 1 - command bit 22-20: Operation Data type 000 - binary 001 - integer without sign 010 - integer 011 - integer without sign 100 - characters 101 - integer without sign 110 - reserved 111 - reserved bit 27-24 position of decimal point for visual display and Operation Data setting Visual format. binary decimal without sign decimal with sign hexadecimal text ID Number
Unit: Name:
measuring unit in which the Operation Data is expressed Data Block description
Minimum/Maximum/Operation Data: data values respectively for minimum/maximum/current. For further details refer to the specialized manuals. READ BLOCK data entry shown at page 6, displays Data Block elements values identified by IDN selected for a certain axis, after their reading from the drive. Data entry fields are reading only ones.
8-15
WRITE DATA
When the WRITE DATA softkey is pressed, the following screen is displayed: (Example of WRITE DATA screen with IDN 9 selection)
D.S.I. drives Configurator Axis : 5 IDN : 9 date: dd/mm/yy Beginning Address in Master Data Telegram ID Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 --- Write Operation Data --7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 15 17 time: hh/mm
SAVE ALL WRITE DATA
LOAD COMMAND
The only Data Block element that can be modified with this utility is the Operation Data. Therefore, this writing operation is not always allowed by the drive, as many Data Block are writing protected. In case the operation is not allowed, the error Write Operation Data Error is displayed in the screen shown above. The data writing type and format must respect what has been defined in the relative attribute, as for a numeric value, must be respected its variability interval (Minimum/Maximum elements - see description at pages 6 and 7) NOTE: This softkey can be activated only with 1, 2, 3 security levels.
8-16
COMMAND
When the COMMAND softkey is pressed, the following screen is displayed: (Example of a COMMAND screen with IDN 9 selection)
D.S.I. drives Configurator Axis : 5 IDN : 9 date: dd/mm/yy Beginning Address in Master Data Telegram ID Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 --- Send Command to D.S.I. Drive --7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 15 17 time: hh/mm
Type ENTER to confirm or ESC to abort
SAVE ALL WRITE DATA
LOAD COMMAND
The selection of this softkey is relevant only if, in the referred Data Block attribute the bit identifying an operation type <command> is set (see description at page 7). NOTE: This softkey can be activated only with 1, 2, 3 security levels.
8-17
SAVE AX INFO
On pressing the SETUP softkey the following screen is displayed:
--- Save D.S.I. Drives Configuration --Type file name :
SAVE ALL WRITE DATA
LOAD COMMAND
This data entry screen asks for the name of the file for saving the data blocks of an axis previously selected with the SELECT AXIS softkey. If you do not enter the full path starting from the drive letter, it is assumed that the file is under E:\USD. The file will be called "drive configuration file. [Enter] or [F9] (AX INFO softkey) confirms the file name entered and the save operation starts by showing the message: Save Data Blocks of axis id N ......Working...... where N is the identifier of the selected axis for which the configuration is saved. Errors during this operation cause the cancellation of the configuration file.
8-18
SHOW LOAD LOG

When pressing the SHOW LOAD LOG softkey the contents of E:\USD\LOAD.LOG are displayed (if such file exists). The error messages are preceded by the axis identifier with the IDN on which they occurred. You can scroll the text with the [Pg Up/Dn] keys. Press [Enter] or [Esc] to exit. Example of a display:
--- LOG File for LOAD operation --Axis 15 - Idn 3 - Operation data cannot be changed . . . . . . . Axis 15 - Idn 108 - Operation data is write-protected at this time . . . . . . . Type <PG-DOWN> or <PG-UP> to move - <ENTER> or <ESC> to exit SETUP SELECT AXIS SHOW LOAD LOG DESCRIPTION READ DATA SAVE ALL WRITE DATA LOAD COMMAND HELP SAVE AX INFO EXIT
8-19
LOADING DSI DRIVERS PARAMETERS

For the digital DSI drives, which cannot memorise the parameters permanently, there is a mode for loading them during the start-up of the machine tool. The parameters (IDN) are read out of an ASCII file in a format compatible with the NC and loaded into the drives which are blocked in the communication phase 2 for this purpose. Once the parameters have been loaded, the remaining phases are completed. The transfer does not take place if the NC is already prepared for a stop in the communication phase 2 or 3 or for one of the test modes (see Chapter DSI REBOOT CONFIGURATION) or one of the axes boards has signalled an alarm.
Usage Mode
In order to be able to load IDNs you have to create a file with the name DSILOAD.CMD in the directory E:\USD and to specify in it (via a simple syntax) the parameter files to be transferred. The following example will explain this: <BOF> ; ; Parameters machine 1 ;
; X axis upload e:\usd\namefile1
; table upload f:\namefile2 <EOF> You see that: 1. The name of each file to be transferred is inserted after the keyword upload and has to include the drive and the full path. 2. Comments are entered in lines starting with the symbol ;. 3. Comments cannot be entered on lines containing the keyword upload.
8-20
The NC will also create the file E:\USD\DSILOAD.LOG containing information concerning the executed transfer and errors occurred during the transfer: 1. Open file <f> Open the file <f> 2. Error opening <f> Error while opening the file <f> 3. Uploading axis <n> ... Transfer of parameters for the axis <n> 4. Syntax error at line <l> Line <1> contains a syntax error 5. IDN <i> : <err> (line <1>) The upload of the IDN <i> has returned an error <err> on the file line <1>. 6. Unknown IDN type at line <1> The data on line <1> is of an unknown type (check the attribute). 7. Axis not allowed at line <1> The axis ID is wrong or this axis does not exist or is not an DSI axis. 8. End job The upload is complete.
Application notes
While using the automatic parameter upload, the CNC is not yet ready for use. In this condition you cannot launch machine logic functions relating to the axes other than the AX_GETx functions. In any case the monitor shows a message indicating that the IDN transfer is running (LOADING DSI PARAMETERS, PLEASE WAIT...). For a correct handling of the application you should monitor the status of the DSI axes with the machine logic in order to verify whether the transfer has already been completed. Using the AX_GETS function you can read the bits 8 and 9 of the second status word (Driver DSI ON and Driver DSI Enabled): if both are 0, the transfer is still running. If they are 1, the transfer has been completed and the machine tool can be started and used. In order to speed up the start-up of the NC, you should only transfer the required parameters.
8-21
ERROR MESSAGES
During the utility use some error situations may arise. The following list gives the error messages which may be displayed, after which there is a short description.
MESSAGE Wrong D.S.I. axis Id Wrong IDN format Wrong Axis selection Write Operation Data Error
DESCRIPTION An axis identifier specified in SETUP data entry does not correspond to a D.S.I axis in AMP. IDNs format wrong or absent for an axis inserted in SETUP data entry. D.S.I. axis identifier wrong selection in SELECT AXIS data entry. Write operation of the Operation Data is not allowed by the drive (writing protection) or the data compilation did not respect the type and format defined in its attribute). The selected IDN does not identify a Data Block with <command> type Operation Data. A wrong configuration file or path name has been entered in the data entry screen for SAVE ALL or SAVE AX INFO or LOAD. The file selected in the second LOAD data entry screen is not a correct configuration file for the D.S.I. drives The configuration file you want to create with SAVE ALL or SAVE AX INFO already exists. You can overwrite it if you want. An axis identifier entered in the third LOAD data entry screen is not valid as it is not one of those inserted in SETUP.
Wrong Command Wrong Path
Wrong configuration file has been selected
File exists. Press Enter to re-write, Esc to abort Wrong Axis operation Id specification for LOAD
END OF CHAPTER
8-22
Chapter
MECHATROLINK DIGITAL DRIVES CONFIGURATION UTILITY
INTRODUCTION
The Mechatrolink Digital Drives Configuration Utility program is a CNC utility that enables you to read/write drive parameters for their initial configuration and subsequent setting. It is also possible to perform the run-time monitoring of drive status (alarms, I/O bits and status bits) and quantities such as the following error or axis position.
This package can be used solely with YASKAWA digital drives with MECHATROLINK digital interface.
10 Series CNC - AMP Software Characterization Manual (16)
9-1
Chapter 9 Mechatrolink Digital Drives Configuration Utility
DESCRIPTION OF FUNCTIONS
The software enables you to perform the following functions: Search for configured axes. Read the parameters saved in the RAM of a drive. Change the parameters saved in the RAM of a drive. Save the changes that have been made. Monitor quantities such as following error and axis position. Monitor the I/Os of the drive. Monitor drive status. Read drive alarms and warnings.
PRELIMINARY TECHNICAL CONSIDERATIONS ON MECHATROLINK

YASKAWA drives are equipped with an EEPROM type permanent memory. The drive parameters are also saved in the same memory and, at power-up, are copied onto a RAM. The MECHATROLINK communication interface is made up of a single communication channel and therefore cannot be used to send commands in parallel mode. This means, for instance, that if the axis is moving the channel is taken up by the interpolator, which is transmitting the interpolation command, and hence it is not possible to read/write parameters or enter other types of command using this package. On the other hand, if you are writing or reading parameters with this package, you will not be able to give movement commands or commands of any other sort via the interpolator or the logic.
9-2
BASICS
APL and ALT files

Before examining the use of the configuration package, we should go over the basics of how it works by describing the two types of file employed:
ALT file (Axes Link Table) The ALT file contains a list of the axes connected to the control and it is used to associate each axis with a given set of parameters, i.e., an APL file. With this package it is possible to change this association and, in this case the ALT is automatically updated. APL file (Axis Parameter List) APL files contain the drive parameters and the information needed to view them and interpret them.
ALT Axis ID 1 2 3 4 Interface M M M M Parms File apl_f1.csv apl_f2.csv apl_f3.csv apl_f4.csv
Apl_f1. csv asse 1 Apl_f2. csv Apl_f3. csv Apl_f4. csv Figure 1
APL and ALT files are ASCII files formatted appropriately. The formatting modalities for these files and a procedure that makes it possible to create them with ease using Microsoft Excel are described later on in this document. APL and ALT files reside in the HD of the CNC, in the E:\USD directory.
9-3
Content and format of an ALT file Each line in an ALT file (max 250 characters) contains the information on 1 axis, split over three fields. The information contained in an ALT file line is: AXID (max 2 characters): axis id. BUS TYPE (max 1 character): type of bus connected (for MECHATROLINK the code is "M"). LINKEDAPL (max 12 characters): APL file associated with the axis (8 characters per file name + 1 character for the dot + 3 characters for the extension) As far as formatting is concerned, keep in mind that: - Comment lines must start with an exclamation point - Valid lines start and end with a semicolon - Axis ids must be entered in ascending order - The last line contains no new line characters An example of APL file is given below:
! ALT (Axis Link Table) ! It is used to make the Link between an axis and its parameters file (APL) ! !;AxID ;Bus ;Linked APL ; ! ;01 ;M ;01APL.csv ; ;02 ;M ;02APL.csv ; ;03 ;M ;03APL.csv ; ;04 ;M ;04APL.csv ; ;05 ;M ;05APL.csv ; ! !! END OF FILE
9-4
Content and format of an APL file Each line in an APL file (max 250 characters) contains the information on 1 parameter, split over 13 fields. The information contained in an APL file line is: 1- Parameter data that can be modified by the OEM: DESCRIPTION (max 60 characters): contains a string describing the parameter. ACTUAL_VAL (max 13 characters): value set for the parameter. SEC_LEV (max 1 character): parameter visibility level. 2- Parameter information needed to view it and change it: MIN (max 13 characters): minimum value that a parameter may assume. STEP (max 7 characters): parameter variation step. MAX (max 13 characters): maximum value that a parameter may assume. UNIT (max 10 characters): contains a string with the unit of measure of the parameter. FACT_SET (max 13 characters): predetermined value for the parameter. 3- Parameter information needed to convert it into the format accepted by the DRIVE ID_PRM (max 7 characters): contains the parameter id (CN-xxxx for Sigma or PN-xxxx for Sigma-II). SIZE (max 3 characters): is a string consisting of a number indicating the parameter size in bytes and a character indicating type of data: Value S U H Meaning Decimal integer with sign Decimal integer without sign Hexadecimal
CONVERSION (max 13 characters): contains a factor which is multiplied by the parameter value before passing it on to the drive. PRM_TYPE (max 3 characters): indicates whether the parameter is read only (RO) or read/write (R/W). FASE_WR (max 1 character): if the parameter is writeable, it indicates the system operating phase during which it can be changed: 0 means that the parameter can be written only during the parameter check phase, 1 that it can be changed during any phase. As far as formatting is concerned, keep in mind that: Comment lines must start with an exclamation mark Valid lines start and end with a semicolon The last line contains no new line characters
9-5
A few ALP file lines are exemplified below:

! APL (Axis Parameter List) ! This file contains information on axis parameters DESCRIPTION ;Memory Switches 1 ;Memory Switches 2 ;Load Inertia ;Speed Loop Gain ;Speed Loop Integration constant ;Emergency Stop Torque ;Forward Torque Limit ;Reverse Torque Limit ;Number Of Encoder Pulses ;Forward Software Limit ;Reverse Software Limit !! END OF FILE ; ACTUAL_VAL;SEC_LEV; ;0380H ;0000H ;100 ;400 ;2000 ;289 ;800 ;800 ;8192 ;3 ;3 ;3 ;3 ;3 ;3 ;3 ;3 ;6 MIN_VAL ; STEP ; ;;;0 ;1 ;100 ;0 ;0 ;0 ;513 ;;;1 ;1 ;1 ;;;;1 MAX_VAL ; ;;;65535 ;20000 ;65535 UNIT ; FACT_SET;ID_PRM ;SIZE; CONVERSION;PRM_TYPE;FASE_WR; ;bit ;bit ;% ;Hz ;ms ;0380H ;0000H ;100 ;400 ;2000 ;MAX ;MAX ;MAX ;Cn-0001;2H ;1 ;Cn-0002;2H ;1 ;Cn-0003;2U ;1 ;Cn-0004;2U ;0.1 ;Cn-0005;2U ;0.01 ;Cn-0006;2U ;1 ;Cn-0008;2U ;1 ;Cn-0009;2U ;1 ;Cn-0011;2U ;1 ;R/W ;R/W ;R/W ;R/W ;R/W ;R/W ;R/W ;R/W ;R/W ;R/W ;R/W ;0 ;1 ;1 ;1 ;1 ;1 ;1 ;1 ;0 ;1 ;1 ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ;
;MAX torque ;% ;MAX torque ;% ;MAX torque ;% ;32767
;P/round ;8192
;819191808 ;3 ;-819191808 ;3
;-2147483648;1 ;-2147483648;1
;2147483647 ;P ;2147483647 ;P
;819191808 ;Cn-002F;4S ;1 ;-819191808;Cn-0031;4S ;1
Correspondence between the APL file and the drive parameters When a user selects an axis, the program uses the ALT to access the APL associated with it, reads the values of the parameters, and copies them onto a structure (APL structure). Drive parameters instead are stored in the EEPROM and are copied onto the RAM at power-up. The correct operation of the package is ensured only if there is a constant correspondence between the RAM of the drive and the APL structure, and between the EEPROM of the drive and the APL file.
9-6
Changes to the parameters Parameter reading and writing are operations affecting the drive RAM (a change to a parameter is also saved in the APL structure to maintain the correspondence). Since the drive works with parameters saved in the RAM, the effect of changes to the values of the parameters can be immediately evaluated, and is maintained as long as the drive is powered. If you decide to retain the changes made on a permanent basis, save the changes in the APL file and the drive EEPROM too.
CNC
DRIVE
APL File
ALWAYS COINCIDE
EEPROM
COINCIDE AT POWER ON
COINCIDE AT POWER ON
APL structure
ALWAYS COINCIDE
RAM
9-7
USING THE PACKAGE
Files needed
To use the package, you must install the following files on the NC: ALT file: APL file: E:\USD\AXLINTAB.CSV APL appearing in the ALT.
Creating an ALT file from a Microsoft Excel file

To create an ALT file quickly you can use Microsoft Excel according to the following procedure: 1. Open an ALTEdit.xls file with Microsoft Excel 2. Add the axes you wish to program by entering the id of each and the APL associated with it (some sample lines are provided). You must list the axes with ids in ascending order without skipping lines or fields and writing over the sample lines 3. Choose Save as in the File menu, enter AXLINTAB as file name, and save with extension CSV delimited by the list separator 4. Copy the file produced in this manner onto the NC, in the E:\USD directory
Creating an APL file from a Microsoft Excel file

To create an APL file quickly you can use Microsoft Excel according to the following procedure: 1. Open an APLEdit.xls with Microsoft Excel 2. Compile the table according to the scheme proposed as an example with the parameter ids in ascending order, without skipping lines or fields 3. Choose Save as in the File menu, enter as file name a name of up to 8 characters that agrees with a Linked APL file of the ALT file; save with extension CSV delimited by the list separator 4. Copy the file produced in this manner onto the NC, in the E:\USD directory
It is good practice to have a separate APL file for each axis.
9-8
Automatic database creation

Instead of using a Microsoft Excel file it is possible to create ALT and APL files automatically from inside the program. To this end, you must have the drives in communication with the CNC. The procedure is as follows: 1. Delete all the .CSV files present in the E:\USD directory, if any. 2. Launch the program: a message appears telling you that there is no ALT file (press [enter] to continue). 3. Click the CONFIG UPDT softkey: select drive type, either Sigma or Sigma-II and confirm. At this point, an ALT file is generated containing all the Mechatrolink axes present at this moment and for each of them there is a reference to an APL file called DEFAPLxx.CSV where xx is the axis id. APL files are derived from the default file present in the CNC, but the current parameter values are read by the drive and saved in the file.
Starting the program.

To access the configuration package click the DIAGNOSTIC and DSI_SRV_CHAN softkeys.
Softkey menu
CONFIG UPDT CHANGE APL SAVE CHANGES DRIVE INFO HELP SEND APL SELECT AXIS READ PRM WRITE PRM FACT SETT MONITOR I/O STATUS MON ALM MONITOR AXIS MONITOR RESET EXIT
9-9
Selecting an axis
The first thing to be done is choosing an axis with softkey SELECT AXIS. This softkey and the other softkeys available before axis selection are described below.
SELECT AXIS softkey Click this softkey to select an axis. A list of up to 32 axes appears, with: - White : ALT axes actually connected to the CNC, which therefore can be selected - Grey : ALT axes not connected to the CNC, which therefore cannot be selected Axes not included in the ALT file are not displayed. An axis that is connected to the CNC but is not included in the ALT file will not be displayed, but its presence can be detected by means of the CONFIG UPDT softkey. If any parameters have been changed during the selection of another axis you will be asked to confirm that you want to save the changes made. CONFIG UPDT Softkey This is used to update the configuration contained in the ALT file. In particular: if a drive included in the ALT file is not connected to the CNC, you may choose to remove it from the ALT a drive that has been connected to the CNC but has not been entered in the ALT file will be added automatically and its parameters will be entered in a new APL file called DefAPLxx.csv (where xx is the axis id). Use this softkey with caution! Malfunctioning may occur if the default APL of the CNC is not compatible with ALL the drives used. Default APL files exist only for Sigma and Sigma-II type drives. If you are not sure about the operations performed using this function, you should exit the package WITHOUT saving the changes made to the parameters. It is always advisable to start from an ALT file describing the configuration used.
Changing the parameters set

The ALT file associates each axis with a set of parameters, i.e., with an APL (Actual Parameter List) file containing the values of all the parameters and all the other information needed to view and change such values. With the CHANGE APL softkey you can associate the chosen axis with a different APL file and therefore with different parameter values. The new parameters are copied onto the drive RAM, and remain in this memory until the power is cut out. You can use the SAVE CHANGES softkey to retain the changes made even after power off.
9-10
CHANGE APL softkey This is used to associate a new set of parameters with the current axis. You must enter the name of the new APL file in the ad hoc data input field. The file name may have up to 8 characters plus a 3-character extension. Once a new parameter set has been selected, a "prms changed" message appears on the right, at the end of the second screen line, and at the same time the SAVE CHANGES softkey becomes active to enable you to retain the new parameter set on a permanent basis (otherwise, it would be lost at POWER OFF). If any changes have been made to the previous parameter set, you will be asked whether you want to save them in the APL file and the drive EEPROM. Softkey SEND APL Use this softkey to send the APL file parameters to the drive. This is done when the system configuration (ALT) is changed by associating a new parameter set with the current axis. It is necessary to enter [R] or [E], depending on whether you want to send the parameters to the RAM or the EEPROM of the drive.
Parameter reading and writing

When you have selected an axis, softkeys READ PRM and WRITE PRM are enabled to let you read and write a parameter value in the drive RAM.
READ PRM softkey The parameter to be read is selected by moving the highlight bar in the available parameters ID list on the right of the screen; a string describing the chosen parameter appears in the centre of the box. Press [ENTER] to read the parameter and view its: - Id - Description - Current value - Unit of measure - Minimum and maximum values - Variation step Press [ENTER] again to go back to the parameter selection list.
9-11
WRITE PRM softkey Select a parameter whose value has to be written by moving the highlight bar in the available parameters ID list on the right of the screen; a string describing the chosen parameter appears in the centre of the box. Press [ENTER] to read the parameter and view its: - Id - Description - Current value - Unit of measure - Minimum and maximum values - Variation step At this point, a field appears where you can enter the new value of the parameter, in the appropriate format (decimal or hexadecimal) and range (in the case of decimal parameters). If the value entered is invalid, the field will display the current value of the parameter. Click softkey FACT SET and the default parameter of the value is written automatically. Press ESC to abort the operation. If the value entered is acceptable, the parameter is written in the drive RAM and the list of writable parameters is displayed again.
FACT SET softkey During a parameter writing operation, when you enter a new value, you can use this softkey to restore the default value. NOTE: To change the parameters follow the instructions given in the MECHATROLINK manual.
Information on the drive
DRIVE INFO softkey Use this softkey to get information on the drive and, in particular, on: Series Model Software version
9-12
Saving changes
To save the changes made, use the SAVE CHANGES softkey, which is enabled as soon as any differences between the parameters saved in the EEPROM and those saved in the RAM of the drive are detected; this happens when you: Write a parameter (WRITE PRM) Change the set of parameters associated with the current axis (CHANGE APL)
If the changes made to the parameters are saved you will be able to find your changes even after a system POWER OFF. This affects both the drive and the CNC: On the DRIVE: it copies the parameters from the RAM to the EEPROM On the CNC: it rewrites the APL file with the new parameters. If the associated APL has been changed, the line regarding the axis concerned in the ALT file is also updated.
If any changes made have not been saved, you will be prompted automatically to save them when you try to change the set of parameters associated with the axis, or select a new axis or try to exit the package.
SAVE CHANGES softkey For the currently selected axis, click [Y] (Yes) or [N] (No) depending on whether or not you want to save the changes made. NOTE: If you choose not to save the changes made, the earlier parameters will be restored.
9-13
Note that if you answer NO to a prompt about saving the changes made to the APL file of the previous axis, this gives rise to a potentially hazardous situation. For example, consider the following sequence of operations: STEP 1: The NC and the drives are powered An axis is selected STEP 2: The parameters are changed STEP 3: A new axis is selected and when you are prompted to save the changes made to the APL file of the previous axis you answer NO STEP 4: The previous axis is selected again The axis selected is in the following conditions: The APL file and the EEPROM of the drive contain the values before the changes (i.e., STEP 1 values) The RAM contains the values as changed (in STEP 2) up to the first POWER OFF Now if you make any further changes to the parameters and decide to save them, only the latter changes will be taken into account. TO BE ON THE SAFE SIDE, WE RECOMMEND THAT YOU RESTART THE DRIVES WHENEVER YOU MAKE ANY CHANGES THAT YOU DECIDE NOT TO SAVE.
9-14
Monitoring
MONITOR softkey This softkey gives access to a submenu with the monitoring functions available for the drive currently selected. In particular, the following softkeys are enabled:
I/O STATUS MON softkey This lets you monitor the I/O word (on the right of the screen) and the status word (on the left of the screen) of MECHATROLINK. The meaning of the individual bits displayed is as follows. Input/Output word: bit 0: P-OT (Positive OverTravel) forward direction limit switch input bit 1: N-OT (Negative OverTravel) reverse direction limit switch input bit 2: DEC deceleration limit switch input bit 3: PA encoder phase A signal input bit 4: PB encoder phase B signal input bit 5: PC encoder phase C signal input bit 6: EXT1 no. 1 external latch signal input bit 7: EXT2 no. 2 external latch signal input bit 8: EXT3 no. 3 external latch signal input bit 9: BRK brake status output bit 10: not used bit 15: not used Status word: bit 0: ALARM alarm (1 alarm generated) bit 1: WARNG warning (1 warning generated) bit 2: CMDRDY command ready (1 ready, 0 busy) bit 3: SVON servo ON (1 servo ON) bit 4: PON main power ON (1 power ON) bit 5: MLOCK machine lock (1 lock ON) bit 6: ZPOINT home position (1 absolute position within the home position range) bit 7: PSET positioning complete (1 positioning completed) bit 8: DEN command distribution completed flag (1 command distribution completed) bit 9: T_LIM torque limit (1 torque limited, 0 torque not limited) bit 10: L_CMP latch completed (1 latch completed) bit 11: NEAR positioning proximity (1 absolute position within positioning proximity range of target position) bit 12: P-SOT forward direction software limit (1 forward direction software limit exceeded) bit 13: N-SOT reverse direction software limit (1 reverse direction software limit exceeded) bit 14: reserved bit 15: reserved
9-15
ALM MONITOR softkey This is used to monitor the alarm or warning status in the communication channel on the MECHATROLINK interface. The upper box shows the current alarm status, whilst the lower box shows the last ten status indications saved by the drive. All this information is read directly by the drive and is reset by means of the RESET softkey (in order not to keep the communication channel busy all the time). If the channel is taken up by a movement, the request is turned down.
AXIS MONITOR softkey This enables you to monitor the value of several variables and in particular: - POS: reference position in reference coordinate system - MPOS: reference position in machine coordinate system - PERR: position error - APOS: feedback position in machine coordinate system - LPOS: counter latch position in machine coordinate system - IPOS: internal reference position in reference coordinate system - TPOS: final target position in reference coordinate system - FSPD: feedback speed - TSPD: reference speed - TSPD: final target reference speed - TRQ: torque command - OMN1: option monitor 1 - OMN2: option monitor 2 Monitoring consists of restoring on screen the current value and the minimum and maximum values assumed by the variable selected. Pressing ENTER enables you to change the variable monitored by entering the relative code in the input field. The codes that can be selected are shown on screen and described in the HELP menu. The RESET softkey enables you to reset the minimum and maximum values. NOTE: The values displayed are supplied directly by the drive and hence, when you change the variable monitored, the new value is updated only after a movement command has been given.
RESET softkey Lets you reset the values monitored by means of ALM MONITOR and AXIS MONITOR.
9-16
PARAMETER CHANGE DETAILS

The parameter write function (WRITE PRM softkey) hides those parameters whose change is incompatible with the MECHATROLINK communication phase (FASE_WR field in the APL). This process takes place in two phases: phase 0 corresponding to the parameter checking procedure at bootstrap (communication is asynchronous) and phase 1 indicating that the start-up sequence is over (communication is synchronous).
By definition, some parameters can be changed only during the home position phase, not during normal working conditions. For Sigma drives these parameters are:
Cn-0037 Cn-0001 Cn-0011 Cn-0024 Cn-0025
Servomotor Selection Encoder Selection Number of Encoder Pulses Electronic Gear Ratio (numerator) Electronic Gear Ratio (denominator)
These parameters can be changed only if they are found to be different during the check at bootstrap; to transfer them to the drive, choose the UPLOAD option.
9-17
PARAMETER SUPERVISOR
The Supervisor is a diagnostic program that checks the integrity of drive parameters. It compares the values of the parameters contained in the CNC database with the values of the parameters residing in the RAM of the drives. The results of this test are saved in a file called E:\USD\MECHPCHK.LOG. If the database is not present, this test cannot be run and no error is generated. The Supervisor is launched automatically each time the CNC is started, and if any inconsistencies are detected it shows a menu in which you may select one of the following options about how to proceed: UPLOAD DOWNLOAD VIEW DIFFERENCES SKIP (transfer of discordant parameters from the CNC to the drive EEPROM) (transfer of discordant parameters from the drive RAM to the CNC) (view the differences in the parameters) (none of the above; continuation of the CNC boot)
While the Supervisor checks the parameters, the following message appears Verifying drives parameters, please wait informing the operator that the test is in progress. After about two seconds, if any difference is observed, the menu with the foregoing options appears. This parameter checking stage (including the menu) is a special boot status of the CNC, during which the axes cannot be powered/activated. The machine logic can be synchronised using the S_AXES signal (S 02,01), which remains on 0 during the entire checking process and changes to 1 when the CNC is ready. This parameter check is not performed if any axis emergency conditions are detected at power up, or an error in the database is observed: this means that the database must be present and validated, since the Supervisor is not responsible for creating the database. If an error is detected during this test, the program displays a message showing the internal error code and the procedure is interrupted (see the error codes in Appendix B). If a parameter with an invalid value is sent to a drive during the upload, a message to this effect appears and the procedure is broken off.
9-18
Error codes displayed

Error codes displayed by the parameter Supervisor. Code 6 Code 7 Code 10 Code 12 Code 13 Code 14 Code 15 : : : : : : : Error in opening a database file. Error in reading a database file. Id of a non Mechatrolink type axis found in database. Error found in the database APL file. Error found in the database ALT file. Error found in log file. Generic error found in database.
9-19
END OF CHAPTER
9-20
Capitolo
10
D.S.I. SPINDLE DRIVE SETUP
We shall describe a number of steps performed with the DriveTop system to configure the operating modes and the external transducer; when the use of input fields is not specified, see the drive manual.
CONFIGURING THE OPERATIVE MODES

See the figure below 1.
The primary operating mode is configured as velocity control mode, and it is activated for rotation commands (SG96RPM, SG97RPM). Whether configured or not, this mode is activated at CNC power-up and each time the spindle is enabled.
10-1
Capitolo 10 D.S.I. Spindle Drive Setup
Secondary mode No.1 must be set as position mode, which uses the spindle measuring transducer; in this case, it is the external encoder. This mode is activated by the CNC when the SORIENT command is executed. Secondary mode No. 2 is selected by the CNC when the C Axis performance is activated, i.e., the drive is to be controlled by an axis. Secondary mode No. 3 is not used (the value shown in the image is not significant).
10-2
CONFIGURING THE EXTERNAL TRANSDUCER

If you are using an external encoder mounted on the spindle axis, see figure 2 below.
Select encoder type (in the example it is a square wave encoder) and a connection slot on the drive. If desired, you can reverse the direction of the count by ticking the ad hoc field, then you must enter the resolution of the transducer (the actual value, i.e., not multiplied by 4 as required for the analog axes on the CNC). In the Encoder gear field, enter the ratio between motor rpm and encoder rpm for a correct computation of speed. For the remaining fields, see the drive manual.
10-3
CONFIGURING THE TYPE OF AXIS

See figure 3 below.
The drive must be configured as a rotary axis. To set the resolution of the quantities, click Advanced.
10-4
CONFIGURING THE POSITION SCALE

See figure 4 below.
The position must be expressed in degrees, speed in RPM, the acceleration in rotary units (as a rule, the program sets the optimal value of its own accord). As for transducer rev resolution, it is mandatory to use a proprietary scale which is a power of two (to correct for the loss of the electric zero due position count overflow), e.g., 8192 pulses/rev. This field corresponds to parameter S-0-0079 and the same value must be set in AMP as electric step. As a function of transducer resolution, the drive calculates a theoretical angular resolution (360 degrees/ transducer resolution), but you must consult the drive manual to determine the actual resolution.
10-5
CONFIGURING ADDITIONAL PARAMETERS

See figure 5 below.
In the maximum travel range field, enter a value that is a power of 2, the highest value that can be accepted, to correct for count overflow if the spindle has been rotating for a long time. The value entered must never be smaller than 2097152 (2). The field Position data in must be selected as absolute format, i.e., you must not activate the rollover function since it is not managed by the CNC for this type of axis. The field Feed constant K is not significant, but should be set on 1. If the field is disabled, it is possible to force the value by writing the parameter S-0-0123 directly.
FINE CAPITOLO
10-6
Chapter
11
EMERGENCY DIAGNOSTIC
EMERGENCY START
The 10 Series CNC systems have a minimum level bootstrap which although not activating all functions allows you to carry out some useful operations only in this environment.
Emergency diagnostic date: dd/mm/yy
AMP DOS SHELL SHUT DOWN
PLUS SECURITY COMPILER
VARIAB. RESET TABLE EDITOR DSI REBOOT CFG
SYSTEM HISTORY PERIPHERAL UTILITY
HELP LANGUAGES SYSTEM
The minimum bootstrap is activated by pressing the [F1] key at power on. The EMERGENCY DIAGNOSTIC screen appears:
11-1
Chapter 11 Emergency Diagnostic
EMERGENCY DIAGNOSTIC Screen Softkeys

AMP This softkey accesses the AMP utility for system characterization. The utility features are described in this manual. PLUS This softkey accesses the PLUS environment for machine logic development. information, see the PLUS manuals. VARIAB RESET This utility is used to initialise, save on a file or recover from a file the dual port memory areas contained in the system. This topic is discussed later on in this chapter. SYSTEM HISTORY This softkey accesses the display/printing/delete utility of the historic errors or system message files which are displayed while the machine is running. This file structure has a fixed maximum size meaning that after a while new signals will cause the loss of the oldest ones. HELP Displays an on-line help window. DOS SHELL This softkey accesses the DOS SHELL utility. This is a utility for executing commands for the management of files on the drives known to the system (local or remote). More information on this utility can be found in the 10 Series CNC Users Manual. SECURITY Manages the system security levels for the different usage levels. More information on this utility can be found in the 10 Series CNC Users Manual. TABLE EDITOR This utility is for system table management; further information on this utility can be found in the 10 Series CNC Users Manual. PERIPHERAL For selecting the output port for the system printer or for use in the DOS environment. LANGUAGES This utility allows you to customize the language of the messages displayed in the HELP, SOFTKEYs, etc. Further information on this utility is given later in this chapter. SHUT DOWN This softkey is used to run a new system bootstrap, which is useful after software characterisation changes or machine logic changes, or after a system shut down. For further
11-2
COMPILER Used for compiling the source files written in C or ASSEMBLER language and for executing the LINK. DSI REBOOT CFG Relevant only for systems with D.S.I. axes boards. It prepares the system for D.S.I. drive data configuration. UTILITY Performs the execution of the commands specified in the E:UTY\AUTOEMG.BAT file or in the A:\AUTOEMG.BAT file on one of the floppy disks. This is a utility for executing programs for hard disk compression, system scanning for virus detection or other programs selected by the OEM. The E:\UTY\AUTOEMG.BAT file (or its copy on floppy disk) must be modified for any utility that the OEM might want to execute; the file has a structure to be used as an example.
11-3
TABLE RESET UTILITY

This utility can be enabled only by emergency switching. It allows you to reset, save on a file or recover from a file the content of the DUAL PORT memory area, either fully or partly, and to delete the system tables and the backup files of said tables contained in E:\TBL-Origin, Tools, Checkers, User, Magazines tables and backup files, hereinafter referred to as *.ORG, *.TOL, *.OFS, *.USR, *.MAG and *.IMA, and the backup files hereinafter referred to as *.BCK (all the DUAL PORT memory), *.BAX (origin table), *.BTO (tool table), *.BOF (checkers table), *.BUS (user table), *.BMA (magazines tables), *.BGW (GW variables), *.BGD (GD variables) and *.BWP (WinPLUS variables) -.
VARIAB. RESET
EMERGENCY START Main Menu

EMERGENGY START Main Menu
TABLE RESET Utility Menu
Reset Retentive Tables Request
date: dd/mm/yy
RESET DP
DELETE TABLES DELETE FILES
SAVE DP
RESTORE DP
HELP EXIT
11-4
DUAL PORT areas are actually reset and restored only upon quitting the Table Reset utility.
The possibility to cancel the system tables, with the exception of the backup files (*.IMA), depends on how the security mechanism is set. The bits of byte 4 enable the security mechanism as follows: bit 0 - enables cancellation of *.TOL and *.MAG bit 1 - enables cancellation of *.OFS bit 2 - enables cancellation of *.ORG bit 3 - enables cancellation of *.USR
11-5
Reset DP
When the RESET REQUEST softkey is pressed, the following screen is displayed: Reset Retentive Tables Request
-- R E S E T R E Q U E S T -date: dd/mm/yy
All dual port or specific Tables (A/T) ? T
RESET DP
SAVE DP
RESTORE DP
HELP EXIT
All dual port or specific Tables (A/T)? Description: the data entry panel prompts you to select whether to reset the entire contents of the dual port memory area or only a specific table. A = all T = specified tables only If the selection is T, a data entry panel is opened where you can select the tables(s) to be reset (see following page). Range: A/T Default value: T Unit type: none
11-6
Select Tables
Reset Retentive Variables Request
-- S E L E C T
- Axes Table - Tools Table - Offsets Table - User Table - Magazine Table - GW Variables - GD Variables - System Variables - WinPlus Variables
date: dd/mm/yy T A B L E S -(Y/N) : N (Y/N) : N (Y/N) : N (Y/N) : N (Y/N) : N (Y/N) : N (Y/N) : N (Y/N) : N (Y/N) : N
RESET DP
SAVE DP
RESTORE DP
HELP EXIT
Axes Table (Y/N): If you select Y, the AXES TABLE will be reset (see the PLUS Application Manual) Tools Table (Y/N): If you select Y, the TOOLS TABLE will be reset Offsets Table (Y/N): If you select Y, the ORIGIN TABLE will be reset User Table (Y/N): If you select Y, the USER TABLE will be reset Magazine Table (Y/N): If you select Y, the MAGAZINE TABLE will be reset GW Variables (Y/N): If you select Y, the GW VARIABLES TABLE will be reset GD Variables (Y/N): If you select Y, the GD VARIABLES TABLE will be reset System Variables (Y/N): If you select Y, the SN, SC SYSTEM VARIABLES TABLE will be reset WinPLUS Variables (Y/N): If you select Y, the WINPLUS VARIABLES TABLE will be reset.
11-7
Delete Tables
By pressing the DELETE TABLES softkey the following screen is displayed: Reset Retentive Variables Request
-- S E L E C T TABLES T Y P E (S) -date: dd/mm/yy
- Tool Tables - Offset Tables - User Tables - Origin Tables - Magazine Tables - Backup Memory
(Y/N) : (Y/N) : (Y/N) : (Y/N) : (Y/N) : (Y/N) :
RESET DP
SAVE DP
RESTORE DP
HELP EXIT
In this screen you can select the types of tables (by entering Y next to the desired type) in which you want to remove the elements belonging to them, by carrying out the steps described in the following steps.
11-8
After making one or more selections and exiting the screen with confirming the entered data (pressing the [Enter] key or the DELETE TABLES softkey) the following screen is displayed: (table selection screen) Reset Retentive Variables Request
date: dd/mm/yy
Existing Tables
Table to be deleted :
RESET DP
SAVE DP
RESTORE DP
HELP EXIT
In the window on the lower left-hand side of the screen you see the table names of the types selected previously. You can scroll the names on the list with the up/down keys. A white bar for row selection highlights the cursor position. In the read-only window on the lower right-hand side of the screen you see the table name on which you are positioned. If in the previous screen the tables types that were selected cannot be deleted because they are security protected then the following messages will be displayed in the upper lefthand part of the screen: WARNING: security protection for *.EXT where EXT can be TOL, USR, OFS, ORG, MAG.
11-9
Choose the table to be removed. By pressing the [Enter] or DELETE TABLES softkeys, the following screen is displayed: Reset Retentive Variables Request
-- D E L E T E --- Delete selected table (y/n):
date: dd/mm/yy
RESET DP
SAVE DP
RESTORE DP
HELP EXIT
Only now, if you confirm the deletion of a selected table by entering Y and pressing [Enter] or the DELETE TABLES softkey, is the file removed from the E:\TBL directory. When exiting from this screen (with confirmation or abort) the table selection screen described on page 8-7, is displayed again, allowing you to go ahead with deleting operations. To interrupt the procedure, exit from the table selection screen on page 9-6 by pressing [Esc].
11-10
Save DP (Save DUAL PORT memory request)

When you click the SAVE DP softkey, the following screen appears: Reset Retentive Variables Request
-- B A C K U P R E Q U E S T -date: dd/mm/yy
RESET DP
SAVE DP
RESTORE DP
HELP EXIT
All dual port or specific Tables (A/T)? Description: the data entry screen asks you whether you want to save the entire content of the dual port memory area on a file or just some specific tables. A = all T = only the tables specified
Variation range: A/T Default value: T Unit type: none
11-11
If your choice is A, a data entry screen appears to let you select the disk (Floppy Disk or Hard Disk) where you want the DUAL PORT memory backup file to be saved. See the screen below: Reset Retentive Variables Request
date: dd/mm/yy
-- P L U S D U A L P O R T B A C K U P --- S E L E C T D I S K -Floppy Disk or Hard Disk (F/H): H
RESET DP
SAVE DP
RESTORE DP
HELP EXIT
Floppy disk or Hard Disk (F/H)? Description: the data entry window asks you to choose the disk where you want to save the DUAL PORT memory backup file. F = Floppy Disk H = Hard Disk
Variation range: F/H Default value: H Unit type: none Choose the disk where you want the backup file to be saved. Press [Enter] or click SAVE DP to open the screen shown on the following page. To cancel the procedure, press [Esc].
11-12
When you have chosen a disk, the following screen appears (backup file name selection screen):
date: dd/mm/yy
-- P L U S D u a l P o r t B A C K U P --
Name
Size
Date
Time
Enter file name:
RESET DP
SAVE DP
RESTORE DP
HELP EXIT
The window at the bottom left lists the names of the backup files saved previously on the chosen disk. You can scroll through the list by clicking the [Up/Down] arrow keys. A white line selection band shows the position of the pointer. In the bottom right portion of the screen, a read/write window shows the name of the backup file your pointer is currently placed on; in this box you can also enter a new backup file name. If you save a previously saved backup file, you will be asked to confirm that you want to overwrite the data contained in this file through a data entry box that appears under the backup file entry window: choose Y to overwrite the previously selected backup file or N to abort the process. Press [Enter] to save the backup file on the chosen disk. If you are saving the file on the Hard Disk, the backup file will be stored in the E:\TBL directory. To cancel the procedure, press [Esc].
11-13
If you select T in the data entry screen shown on page 9-11, a new data entry screen is opened to let you select the table(s) to be saved. See the screen below: Reset Retentive Variables Request
-- S E L E C T T A B L E S -date: dd/mm/yy
- Axes Table - Tools Table - Offset Table - User Table - Magazine Table - GW Variables - GD Variables - WinPLUS Variables
(Y/N) : (Y/N) : (Y/N) : (Y/N) : (Y/N) : (Y/N) : (Y/N) : (Y/N) :
RESET DP
SAVE DP
RESTORE DP
HELP EXIT
In this screen, you can select type of table (by entering Y next to the type you are interested in). For each table to be saved, press [Enter]: this opens the data entry screen shown on page 9-12 to let you select the disk where you want the backup file for the chosen table to be saved; after that, the data entry screen shown on page 9-13 appears so that you can perform the backup file saving procedure described previously.
11-14
Restore DP (Restore DUAL PORT memory request)

Click the RESTORE DP softkey to open the following screen: Reset Retentive Variables Request
-- R E S T O R E R E Q U E S T -date: dd/mm/yy
RESET DP
SAVE DP
RESTORE DP
HELP EXIT
All dual port or specific Tables (A/T)? Description: the data entry screen prompts you to decide whether you want to restore the entire content of the dual port memory from a file or just some specific tables. A = all T = only the tables specified
Variation range: A/T Default value: T Unit type: none
11-15
If you choose A a data entry screen opens to let you select the disk (Floppy Disk or Hard Disk) containing the backup file with all the information needed to restore the DUAL PORT memory. See the following screen: Reset Retentive Variables Request
date: dd/mm/yy
-- P L U S D U A L P O R T R E S T O R E --- S E L E C T D I S K -Floppy Disk or Hard Disk (F/H): H
RESET DP
SAVE DP
RESTORE DP
HELP EXIT
Floppy disk or Hard Disk (F/H)? Description; the data entry screen asks you to choose the disk containing the backup file to be used to restore the DUAL PORT memory.. F = Floppy Disk H = Hard Disk
Variation range: F/H Default value: H Unit type: none Choose the disk from which you want the DUAL PORT memory to be restored. Press [Enter] or click RESTORE DP to open the screen shown on the following page. To cancel the procedure, press [Esc].
11-16
When you have selected a disk, the following screen appears (backup file name selection screen):
date: dd/mm/yy
-- P L U S D u a l P o r t R E S T O R E --
Name
Size
Date
Time
Enter file name:
RESET DP
SAVE DP
RESTORE DP
HELP EXIT
The window at the bottom left lists the names of the backup files saved previously on the chosen disk. You can scroll through the list by clicking the [Up/Down] arrow keys. A white line selection band shows the position of the pointer. In the bottom right portion of the screen, a read/write window shows the name of the backup file your pointer is currently placed on; in this window you can also specify the name of a valid backup file. If you press [Enter], the system will ask you to confirm your request to restore the DUAL PORT memory through a data entry box displayed immediately under the backup file entry window: select Y to restore the DUAL PORT memory, or N to abort the procedure. To cancel the procedure, press [Esc].
11-17
If you choose T in the data entry screen shown on page 9-15, a new data entry screen will open to let you select the table(s) to be restored. See the screen below: Reset Retentive Variables Request
-- S E L E C T T A B L E S -date: dd/mm/yy
- Axes Table - Tools Table - Offset Table - User Table - Magazine Table - GW Variables - GD Variables - WinPLUS Variables
(Y/N) : (Y/N) : (Y/N) : (Y/N) : (Y/N) : (Y/N) : (Y/N) : (Y/N) :
RESET DP
SAVE DP
RESTORE DP
HELP EXIT
In this screen you can select the table types you want to restore (by entering a Y next to each table type you are interested in). Press [Enter] for each table to be restored: a data entry window of the type described on page 9-16 will open up to let you select the disk containing the backup file with the information needed to restore the chosen table; after that, you will be asked to specify the backup file name in a new data entry screen (see page 9-17).
11-18
Delete Files (Backup file procedure)

Click the DELETE FILES softkey to open the following screen: Reset Retentive Variables Request
-S E L E C T BACKUP F I L E(S)(Y/N) : (Y/N) : (Y/N) : (Y/N) : (Y/N) : (Y/N) : (Y/N) : (Y/N) : (Y/N) :
date: dd/mm/yy
- All PLUS Dual Port - Origin Tables - Tool Tables - Offset Tables - User Tables - Magazine Tables - GW Variables - GD Variables - WinPLUS Variables
RESET DP
SAVE DP
RESTORE DP
HELP EXIT
In this screen you can select the table backup files (by entering Y next to the types you want to select) to be deleted through the procedure described below.
11-19
Once you have selected one or more tables, and have confirmed the data entered (either by pressing the [Enter] key or by clicking DELETE FILES), the table selection screen is closed and the following screen appears (backup file to be deleted selection screen):
date: dd/mm/yy
Existing Backup Files
File to be deleted :
RESET DP
SAVE DP
RESTORE DP
HELP EXIT
The window at the bottom left lists the backup file names corresponding to the table types previously selected. You can scroll the list with the [Up/Down] arrow keys. A white line selection band shows the position of the pointer. In the bottom right portion of the screen, a read only window shows the name of the backup file your pointer is currently placed on.
11-20
Now you should proceed with the choice of the backup files to be deleted. Press [Enter] or click DELETE FILES to open the following screen: Reset Retentive Variables Request
-- D E L E T E --- Delete selected Backup File (y/n):
date: dd/mm/yy
RESET DP
SAVE DP
RESTORE DP
HELP EXIT
At this point, if you confirm the command to delete the selected backup file by entering Y and either pressing [Enter] o clicking DELETE FILES, the file in question is removed from the E:\TBL directory. When you quit this screen (by either confirming or aborting the procedure), the backup file selection screen described on page 9-20 appears again, to let you continue with the backup file delete process. To cancel the procedure, press [Esc] in the backup file selection screen depicted on page 9-20.
11-21
LANGUAGE MANAGEMENT UTILITY

This utility is used to change the texts of the 10 Series CNC system (Help, softkey texts, data entry, errors), and customize them.
HELP LANGUAGES EXIT EMERGENCY START Main Menu TEXTS LANGUAGE MANAGEMENT Menu
Texts Language Management

MODIFIED LANGUAGE ACTIVATED LANGUAGE
date: dd/mm/yy
RUNNING LANGUAGE
Working...
HELP ACTIVATE CREATE TEXT HANDLER DELETE EXIT
INFORMATION BOXES Modified Language This is the language environment in which the changes are executed. Activated Language This is the language directory that will be used at subsequent power on.
11-22
Running Language This is the language directory presently in use by the control. Do not use this utility to modify the DOS GRAPHICS partition softkeys configured in AMP and displayed in the UTILITY sub-menu.
Directories on which this utility works:

Resident languages Languages managed by the user
TXE TXI TXO
English (default) Italian (optional) Others languages (optional)
TT1 TT2 --TTN
User environment 1 User environment 2 . . . User environment n
D:\txt This is the directory containing the files actually used by the system for the texts. When you install a base release the texts in English are loaded into this directory. A compressed version (*.AB) is also stored under D:\TXT\TXE. Resident Languages These are all the languages installed as options with the appropriate procedure. They are loaded under D:\TXT and a compressed copy is under the directories D:\TXT\TXI (Italian), D:\TXT\TXO (other languages e.g. German, French). This version of the utility functions with the language options starting with version 4.3.1.
11-23
E:\ttx (User Managed Languages) These are international or customized languages managed by the OEM user. He can operate in his own work environment identified by a triliteral TTn (where n = letter/digit) under "E:\TTX". Each environment consists of two sub-directories (TTnO and TTnV) containing the original version of the texts (TTnO) or the work version (TTnV). At creation they are identical.
You should only work under TTnV, leaving the contents of TTnO unchanged!
In this environment you can carry out the following operations: creating a new work environment cancelling a work environment changing the work version of the texts (TTnV) enabling a modified language (= loading the modified version into D:\TXT) comparing texts of the language options installed under D:\TXT (see the description of the Resident Languages) with the original versions saved in the user environments under TTnO. NOTE The names in upper case in the directory are fixed whereas those in lower case are fields for user inputs. Example: TTn, n has to be entered by the user.
11-24
Activate
date: dd/mm/yy
RUNNING LANGUAGE TXE
Original Options & User Versions TXE Activate Language : TXE
This softkey allows you to copy the contents of the directory selected with the cursor in the window Original Options & User Versions into the directory D:\TXT. The texts will be displayed at the next start of the system and the name of the directory of the activated language will appear in the Activated Language box. Original Options & User Version Description: shows the directories in "D:\txt" and the directories in "E:\ttx". The first ones, created during the installation phase of the languages options, have the name TXn (n = E,I,O); the second ones are the user environments with the name TTn (n = letter or digit); the Activate function copies the contents of the directory with the user modified text version (TTnV) into D:\TXT. Use or [Pg-Up/Pg Dn] for moving inside the window.
Activate Language Description: this is a read-only field containing the triliteral of the directory being selected. Press [Enter] or ACTIVATE to confirm the selection. [Esc] aborts the operation.
11-25
To avoid misalignments with the text files of the Human Interface after a language is activated (which can be manipulated by AMP for managing OEM softkeys and data entry), you must carry out the following steps: 1. activate the AMP utility 2. select a pertinent AMP directory (SELECT softkey) 3. regenerate the configuration data (EXIT softkey - enter Y to the request "Translate new parameters?") 4. repeat steps 2 and 3 for all the pertinent AMP directories 5. activate the desired AMP directory (ACTIVATE softkey) 6. reboot the system.
NOTE This utility will not change the texts of the OEM softkeys or OEM data entry configured in AMP. Their syntax always has to be modified in the AMP environment.
11-26
Create
date: dd/mm/yy
Original Options TXE Original Option: TXE New Language Environment :TT
This softkey allows you to create a new user environment under "E:\ttx", which will be initialized with the contents of the language option selected in the Original Options window. NOTE: When you enter the LANGUAGES utility for the first time, you will notice that only the ACTIVATE and CREATE softkeys are enabled. Only the creation of a new language determines that other softkeys are enabled. Original Options Description: shows the triliterals of the directories under "D:\TXT, (TXE and, if the relative options have been installed, TXI, TXO).
11-27
New Language Environment Description: allows you to enter the letter defining the triliteral of the language environment to be created. Example: New User Environment: TTf creates E:\TTX\TTf, E:\TTX\TTf\TTfO, E:\TTX\TTf\TTfV. The selected language option is copied into TTfO and TTfV. The user should only modify the texts in TTfV and leave those in TTfO unchanged. Then he can always return to the original to which the modifications carried out refer.
Use or [Pg-Up/Pg Dn] for moving inside the window. Press [Enter] or CREATE to confirm. [Esc] aborts the operation.
11-28
Delete
date: dd/mm/yy
User Environments
User Environment :
This softkey allows you to cancel a user environment under "E:\ttx". User Environments Description: shows the triliterals of the user environments under "E:\ttx". Use or [Pg-Up/Pg] down for moving inside the window.
User Environment Description: this is a read-only field containing the triliteral of the user environment to be cancelled that was selected in the User Environments window. Press [Enter] or [DELETE] to confirm, [Esc] to abort the operation.
11-29
Text Handler
This opens the sub-menu with functions for : comparing the texts of the installed language options with the original versions saved in the user environments (TTnO) updating an original user version contained in E:\TTX\TTn\TTnO with the texts of the language option with which it is to be compared modifying the texts of the work version contained in E:\TTX\TTn\TTnV. Texts Language Management
date: dd/mm/yy
RUNNING LANGUAGE
TEXT TYPES
COMPARE
UPDATE
SHOW DIFF
HELP MODIFY EXIT
When entering the sub-menu the following softkeys are enabled: TEXT TYPES, SHOW DIFF, MODIFY, HELP, EXIT.
11-30
Sub-menu functions:
Text Types
date: dd/mm/yy
RUNNING LANGUAGE
Compare Softkey Compare Data Entry Compare Error Compare Help All Biliterals Save existing DIFF list
(Y/N) ? (Y/N) ? (Y/N) ? (Y/N) ) (Y/N) ? (Y/N) ?
:Y :Y :Y :Y :Y :Y
TEXT TYPES
COMPARE
UPDATE
SHOW DIFF
HELP MODIFY EXIT
This softkey opens a data entry panel for defining: the text types to be compared (Softkey, Data Entry, Error, Help) whether you want to compare only texts whose names have certain prefixes (biliterals) whether you want to save the history of previous comparisons (SK_DIFF.LST, DE_DIFF.LST, ..., files created under E:\TMP). Compare Softkey Description: compares **_SKEY*.DAT files, where ** is a biliteral (AM, AP,...), * can be 0, 1, 2. The result of the comparison is written into the file E:\TMP\SK_DIFF.LST. Field: Y/N Compare Data Entry Description: compares **_DATAE.DAT files, where ** is a biliteral (AM, AP,...). The result of the comparison is written into the file E:\TMP\DE_DIFF.LST. Field: Y/N
11-31
Compare Error Description: compares **_ERROR.DAT files, where ** is a biliteral (AM, AP,...). The result of the comparison is written into the file E:\TMP\ER_DIFF.LST or E:\TMP\MS_DIFF.LST for "message" type errors contained in NC_ERROR.DAT and EE_ERROR.DAT. Field: Y/N Compare Help Description: compares **_HELPS.DAT files, where ** is a biliteral (AM, AP,...). The result of the comparison is written into the file E:\TMP\HE_DIFF.LST. Field: Y/N All Biliterals Description: for each text type described above, asks whether you want to compare only text with certain prefixes or all. Field: Y/N Save Existing DIFF list Description: asks whether you want to save or to cancel the files that previous comparisons have created under E:\TMP. If the files are saved, the result of subsequent comparisons are appended. Field: Y/N NOTE: When exiting this Data Entry panel with confirmation ([Enter] key or TEXT TYPES softkey), the COMPARE softkey is enabled.
11-32
Compare
If you have chosen in the TEXT TYPES data entry panel not to include all biliterals in the comparison (All biliterals: N), the data entry panel associated with the COMPARE softkey has the following structure : Texts Language Management
MODIFIED LANGUAGE Original Options TXE Biliterals ACTIVATED LANGUAGE
date: dd/mm/yy
Original Options : Original User Version : Original User Vers Biliteral : Compare Softkey : Compare Data Entry : Compare Error : Compare Help :
TEXT TYPES
COMPARE
UPDATE
SHOW DIFF
HELP MODIFY EXIT
Original Options Description: shows the triliterals of the directories under "D:\TXT, (TXE and, if the relative options have been installed, TXI, TXO). Original User Version Description: shows the triliterals of the user environments under E:\TTX. Out of this environment only the contents of the original text version directory (TTnO) is considered in the comparison. Biliterals Description: shows the list of the prefixes of .DAT file names under D:\TXT. If you selected "All biliterals" in the TEXT TYPES data entry panel (comparison of all biliterals for the various file types), this windows contains only the ALL BILITERALS string. The data entry panel which puts the selection windows side by side has the following read-only fields: the first 3 display the selections made in the above described windows the other 4 display the file types involved in the comparison as defined TEXT TYPES. Use or [Pg-Up/Pg Dn] for moving inside the windows and the [Tab] key to move from one window to another.
11-33
Modification types detectable by text comparisons: Softkey addition/cancellation of menus addition/cancellation/modification of softkey names in a menu Data Entry addition/cancellation of data entries addition/cancellation of input fields in a data entry panel addition/cancellation/modification of descriptive texts for a data entry panel Errors addition/cancellation/modification of error messages (the number identifying an error is the line number on which the message is written in the relative file) Messages modification of the headline (= position + color) addition/cancellation/modification of messages or their codes Help addition/cancellation/modification of help codes modification of text length
THE CONTENTS OF THE TEXTS ARE NOT COMPARED
NOTES: 1. You can only compare texts written in the same language. 2. If there are text files in the selected option which are missing in the user version, this is indicated before entering them into the user ORIGINALS (TTnO) and their names will be written in to the file E:\TMP\NEW_FILE.LST. For confirming the selections and starting the comparison procedure press the [Enter] key or the COMPARE softkey. To exit the data entry panel press the [Esc] key. After having exited the DATA ENTRY panel the UPDATE softkey is activated.
11-34
Update
date: dd/mm/yy
Original Option : Original User Version : Update Original User Vers. (Y/N) ? :
TEXT TYPES
COMPARE
UPDATE
SHOW DIFF
HELP MODIFY EXIT
With this key you can update the original versions in the user environment (directory TTnO) with the texts language option you have selected with the COMPARE function. The first two fields of the data entry panel are read-only and show the selections carried out in COMPARE. The third field requests to confirm before proceeding with the update.
11-35
Show diff
date: dd/mm/yy
Display differences (S/D/E/M/H) :
TEXT TYPES
COMPARE
UPDATE
SHOW DIFF
HELP MODIFY EXIT
This softkey allows you to display on the screen the differences found in the text comparisons i.e. the contents of the files E:\TMP|*.LST. You are asked to specify which file you want to display: S D E M H SK_DIFF.LST differences between the Softkey files
DE_DIFF.LST differences between the Data Entry files ER_DIFF.LST differences between the Error files MS_DIFF.LST differences between the Message files HE_DIFF.LST differences between the files
11-36
Modify
date: dd/mm/yy
User Versions
User Version :
TEXT TYPES
COMPARE
UPDATE
SHOW DIFF
HELP MODIFY EXIT
This softkey allows you to modify the texts in the selected user environment. User Versions Description: shows the triliterals of the user environments under "E:\ttx". With MODIFY you access the texts contained in the work directory TTnV which can be modified with the editor described below. User Version Description: read-only field with the triliteral of the environment to be modified. After modifying a language the modifications applied become active only after activating that language (ACTIVATE softkey).
11-37
EDITOR FOR MODIFYING TEXT FILES

The MODIFY softkey opens the editor for text files. This utility allows you to: modify the texts of SOFTKEYS, DATA ENTRY, HELP, ERROR MESSAGES modify the error attributes perform backup/restore operations on the files of international language(s); in this way, a language can be developed on one system and exported to other systems
HELP SELECT EXIT
Main Menu for LANGUAGE MANAGEMENT Editor Menu for Text FILE MODIFICATION
Editor Configurator files
date: dd/mm/yy
WINDOW DISPLAYING BILITERALS MENU
DELETE SK MODIFY BACKUP
INSERT DE MODIFY RESTORE
MODIFY HELP MODIFY
ERR MODIFY ERR ATTRIB
HELP VIEW EXIT
11-38
BILITERALS MENU AM AP BE CM DE DS EC ED EE HI LE LN MP NC OD PA PD PF PG PI PK PL PM PP PR PS PT RP SH SY TB TC TE TU MD CC GV BS CN WE WM WL WO WP W1 W2 W3 EM EL SR AMP Utility Loader Emergency Menu C Compiler Data Entry General Dos Shell Languages Configurator Graphic Editor Emergency Human Interface Languages Selection Line Editor Machine Plot Process Environment Servo Monitor PLUS ASCII Edit PLUS Variable Debugger Peripherals PLUS Generator PLUS I/O Configurator Security PLUS Logic Analyzer PLUS Main Menu Part Program Management AMP Print AMP Parser PLUS Timing Monitor PLUS Reboot System History PLUS Synoptic Editor PLUS Dual port Reset Table Editor Configurator Table Editor User Table Editor Manual Digitizing Electronic CAM Graphic Verify Graphic Verify Blank Shapes Network Configurator Wood Wood Manager Wood List Wood Optimizer Wood Panel Wood Panel Mill Cycles Wood Panel Drill Cycles Wood Panel Cutting Cycles Graphic Editor Mill Graphic Editor Lathe Service Channel
11-39
The most frequently used keys are described below. Specific key combinations will be described as they come up.
For movement among the items of a menu.
For movement within the string to be modified
Display the previous or next menu page.
Home
End
Display the first and last page of a menu.
Confirms changes to the data entry panel.
Exits from a menu without saving changes.
NOTES: When moving the selection bar over the biliterals list you will notice that some of them are blue: these are biliterals for utilities not installed on the system (options). Again as you move the selection bar down the list of two-letter names, you will notice that the softkeys that have no files associated (for example, DE MODIFY, HELP MODIFY) are deactivated.
11-40
SOFTKEYS OF THE EDITOR FOR CONFIGURATION FILE MODIFICATION DELETE

The DELETE softkey removes the biliteral selected from the biliterals menu. This means that the editor does not actually cancel the files associated with that biliteral but cannot access them any more. DELETE Confirm deleting (Y/N) : N
Confirm deleting Description: if you answer with [Y], the biliteral selected is deleted.
INSERT
This allows you to insert a new biliteral. When a biliteral is entered in the menu, the editor is enabled to access the associated files. ADD FILE Biliteral Err type Path Note Biliteral Description: the name of the biliteral identifying a new set of configuration files. Err type Description: this field defines error management type: 0 = The error is displayed on a single line. 1 = The error is displayed on several lines Path Description: defines the directory that the file is saved in. If the "Path" field is empty, then the path will be in the currently selected language. Note Description: the comment displayed next to the biliteral in the biliterals menu. : : : : 0
11-41
MODIFY
This allows you to modify some information concerning the biliteral selected. MODIFY Biliteral Err type Path Note : : : :
Biliteral Description: the biliteral selected in the biliterals menu. Err type Description: this field defines error management type: 0 = The error is displayed on a single line. 1 = The error is displayed on several lines Path Description: defines the directory that the file is recorded in. If the "Path" field is empty, then the path will be in the currently selected language. Note Description: the comment displayed next to the biliteral in the biliterals menu.
11-42
SK MODIFY
The SK MODIFY softkey allows you to modify the text of the softkeys associated with the biliteral previously selected from the biliterals menu.
DELETE SK MODIFY BACKUP LANGUAGES MANAGEMENT UTILITY Main Menu SOFTKEY MODIFY Editor Menu
date: dd/mm/yy
MENU DATA Total menus Actual menu Parent menu : : :
SOFTKEYS FILE TO MODIFY
MODIFY HELP MODIFY
HELP VIEW EXIT
The screen for modifying softkeys contains an information window with the data menu (DATA MENU) and a window for editing (SOFTKEY FILE TO MODIFY), in which the text of the softkeys can be modified. Information provided in the DATA MENU window: Total number of menus Number of the current menu Number of the previous menu
11-43
Contents of the SOFTKEYS FILE TO MODIFY Window: The menu of the current softkey is displayed in the SOFTKEYS FILE TO MODIFY editing window. To modify the text of the softkeys, the string must be over written; the red cursor will show which softkey has to be modified. Only the softkeys configured can be modified (the DARK BLUE ones). A configured softkey cannot be removed.
If the biliteral selected consists of a number of files, a window will open containing a list of the files for the biliteral selected.
SOFT-KEYS FILES
Simply move the bar to select the softkey menu you want to modify. Keys enabled during SOFTKEY modifications:
Shift
Tab
To go to the next softkey
Shift
Tab
To go to the previous softkey
11-44
DE MODIFY
The DE MODIFY softkey lets you modify the text of the data entry panels in the system.
INSERT DE MODIFY RESTORE LANGUAGES MANAGEMENT UTILITY Main Menu
SOFTKEY MODIFY Editor Menu

CODES VIEW
date: dd/mm/yy
MODIFY HELP MODIFY
HELP VIEW EXIT
The left-hand column (CODES) lists the identifiers of all the data entry panels saved in the set-up file. The right-hand window displays (if the VIEW softkey is pressed) part of the contents of the data entry panel selected. If you select a code from the CODES column and press the DE MODIFY softkey again, you will enter the data entry panel editing phase. Keys enabled during DATA ENTRY panel modification:
Return Tab
Moves the cursor forwards Moves the cursor backwards Deletes characters in the editing window
Shift
+
Space
Tab
11-45
HELP MODIFY
The HELP MODIFY softkey allows you to modify the text of the help messages associated with each data entry panel.
MODIFY HELP MODIFY LANGUAGES MANAGEMENT UTILITY Main Menu
SOFTKEY MODIFY Editor Menu

CODES VIEW
date: dd/mm/yy
MODIFY HELP MODIFY
HELP VIEW EXIT
The left-hand column (CODES) lists the identifiers of all the help files. The right-hand window displays (if the VIEW softkey is pressed) part of the contents of the help text. If you select a code from the CODES column and press the HELP MODIFY softkey again, you will enter the help editing phase (see following page).
11-46

Current line : n Current line : n
date: dd/mm/yy
Help code : nnn*
Original text
Modifiable text
MODIFY HELP MODIFY
HELP VIEW EXIT
The left-hand window contains the original, non-modifiable help page (so as to have a permanent reference during the modification) whereas the real editing window is on the right-hand side. Keys enabled during HELP modification:
Shift
Tab
To move from one window to the other
CTRL
+ +
Deletes the current line Inserts lines
CTRL
11-47
ERR MODIFY
Opens an editing page where you can modify the errors in the environment selected in the main utility menu.
SOFTKEY MODUFY Editor Menu
ERROR MODIFY Menu

ERRORS FILE LIST Error n of n
date: dd/mm/yy
MODIFY HELP MODIFY
HELP VIEW EXIT
There are 2 types of "error files": 1. files with messages on a single line; these errors are displayed on one line only. 2. files with messages on several lines (maximum 3); these errors are displayed inside a box, spreading the message over several lines and filling it with appropriate information (for instance, process number). The NC and emergency errors belong to this type of file. Pressing the ERR MODIFY softkey will enable the ERR ATTRIB softkey. Maximum length of each line is 80 characters. If the error message requires more lines, the separator character " " will have to be inserted (0BA in hexadecimal). In order to do this keep the [Alt] key pressed and enter "186" on the numerical keypad : this creates a new error display line.
11-48
ERROR ATTRIB
If you press the ERR ATTRIB softkey, the following window opens:
ERROR MESSAGE ATTRIBUTES
Write in System History file Visualize error on screen Use CLEAR MSG to clear error Visualize the process number
: : : :
Foreground color : Background color :
Write in System History file Description: allows you to save ( Y ) or not to save ( N ) the error message in the System History file. Visualize Error on Screen Description: enables (Y ) or disables ( N ) display of the error message on the screen. Use CLEAR MSG to Clear Error Description: this attribute allows you to delete the error message by pressing the CLEAR MSG ( Y ) key or deleting it using only the RESET key ( N ). Visualize the Process Number Description: displays ( Y ) or does not display ( N ) the error message and the number of the process generating it.
11-49
Foreground Color Description: defines error message text color. Range: 0/7 where: 0 = grey 1 = blue 2 = green 3 = light blue 4 = red 5 = magenta 6 = yellow 7 = white
Background Color Description: defines the error message background color. Range: 0/7 where: 0 = black 1 = blue 2 = green 3 = light blue 4 = red 5 = magenta 6 = brown 7 = white
VIEW
This softkey is active only when the DE MODIFY and HELP MODIFY softkeys are pressed and allows you to display the text of the specific environment concerned.
11-50
BACKUP
This softkey allows you to backup the environment or environments selected from the system on a floppy disk. After pressing the BACKUP softkey you have two options for the selection: 1. set the selection bar on the file concerned and press [Insert] (to select or deselect a file); the name of the file selected will turn red. Repeat this operation for each file concerned. 2. press the [+] key to select all the files or the [-] key to deselect them all. Press the BACKUP softkey or [Enter] again and the following data entry panel opens:
BACKUP / RESTORE
Insert floppy in drive A: and press <ENTER> to confirm or <ESC> to abort
File name :
Keys enabled for the BACKUP:

Ins
To select or deselect files one by one
To select all the files
+ To deselect all the files
NOTE: If there is not enough space on the floppy disk to save all the selected files, the system will ask you to insert another floppy disk.
11-51
RESTORE
This softkey allows you to restore the text files of the environment or environments selected from the floppy disk on to the system. After pressing the RESTORE softkey you have two options for the selection: 1. set the selection bar on the file concerned and press [Insert] (to select or deselect a file); the name of the file selected will turn red. Repeat this operation for each file concerned. 2. press the [+] key to select all the files or the [-] key to deselect them all. If you press [Restore] or [Enter], the following data entry panel will open:
BACKUP / RESTORE
Insert floppy in drive A: and press <ENTER> to confirm or <ESC> to abort
File name :
Keys enabled for the restore:

Ins
To select or deselect files one by one
To select all the files
+ To deselect all the files
NOTE: If the system notices that, after having downloaded a floppy disk, not all the selected files have been downloaded then it will ask you to insert the other floppy disks.
11-52
EXIT
Press the EXIT softkey to exit from the Editor for text files modification. By pressing the softkey, the following data entry panel is displayed:
EXIT
Save new configuration (Y/N)
:Y
Save New Configuration Description: by answering with Y the modifications carried out are saved in the text files. After exiting the editor you return to the language management utility. There the name of the modified user environment is shown in the Modified Language information box if the modifications have been saved.
11-53
OFF-LINE VERSION OF LANGUAGE UTILITY

The off-line version of the language management utility allows you to create/cancel user environments and to manipulate texts by comparisons and modifications. You can select the CREATE, TEXT HANDLER and DELETE softkeys in the main menu. The submenu associated with TEXT HANDLER has the same functions as those described in the on-line version. To use this utility on a PC you have to: 1. copy the contents of the directory E:\EDC from the CNC system onto a floppy disk; 2. copy the contents of the user environments (e.g. E:\TTX\TTF with E:\TTX\TTF\TTFO, E:\TTX\TTF\TTFV) in which you want to modify text from the CNC system onto a floppy disk, maintaining the structure of the directory tree; 3. insert the following macros into the autoexec.bat on the PC: set EDCDIR=<DRIVE>:\<PATH>\ set TXTDIR=<DRIVE>:\<PATH>\ set TTXDIR=<DRIVE>:\<PATH>\ NOTE: Insert the names of the drives into the macros definition. Write in capital letters. Example: set EDCDIR=C: \EDC\ set TXTDIR=A: \TXT\ set TTXDIR=C: \TXT\ 4. create the directories with which the macros were set; 5. copy the contents of the floppy disk, created in point 1, into the directories defined with the macros EDCDIR and TXTDIR, distributing the software as follows: directory defined as EDCDIR copy the TXTLANG.EXE and EDITCONF.EXE executables and the EDC_CONF.CNF file directory defined as TXTDIR copy files LE_*.* - EC_*.* - DE_ERROR.DAT - RUN_LANG.DAT 6. go into the directory defined with the macro TTXDIR: create the user environments under this directory with the name existing in the system under E:\TTX go into these user environments copy the contents of the floppy disk, created in point 2 7. activate the utility: go into the directory defined with the macro EDCDIR run the TXTLANG executable 8. modify the texts by pressing the MODIFY softkey described on page 9-24. Follow the procedure to use the Editor described on page 9-25 to modify files.
11-54
To transport the texts modified on PC to the CNC system, you need to: 9. copy the user environments from the PC onto a floppy 10. download the contents of the floppy created in point 9 on to the CNC system into the corresponding user directories under E:\TTX. In order to be able to compare the texts of the user environment with those of the language option, you have to install the options on the PC with the following procedure before you start the utility as described in point 7: 1. Go to the root directory of the hard disk (e.g. C:\) where you want to install the package. 2. Insert the optional floppy disk into the drive (A: or B:) 3. Enter one of the following commands depending on which floppy drive you are using: A: INSTALL B: INSTALL 4. Press [Enter]. 5. The install program will ask you in which drive you have put the floppy disk: Press 1 if it is in the A drive; Press 2 if it is in the B drive; Press [Enter]. 6. Select the language to be used during installation. 7. Select the drive on which you want to install the product. 8. Start the installation of the package on the hard disk. This creates the necessary directory tree structure i.e. : \TXT\TXE for the English language option \TXT\TXI for the Italian language option \TXT\TXO for the French and German language option NOTE: Remember that comparison between texts is only possible if they are in the same language.
11-55
GENERAL EXEC FILE COMPILING UTILITY

This utility allows you to generate applications for the DOS Graphic Interface and DOS Real Time Interface environments by compiling and linking the source files written by the user in C language or Assembler and copied using the DOS SHELL utility into directory "E:\PRG". Users will have to edit one or more files containing the list of files to compile and/or link in the above directory; this list must have the following structure: $C n file1.c file2.c . . filen.c $A n file1.asm file2.asm . . filen.asm $L n file1.obj file2.obj . . filen.obj where: $C indicates that the following " n " files are written in C language. $A indicates that the following " n " files are written in Assembler. $L indicates that the following " n " files are Object files and must be used to generate an executable code which will have the name of the first object of the list. Example: $C 2 program1.c program2.c $A 1 prg00001.asm $L 3 prg00001.obj program1.obj program2.obj
11-56
If you press the COMPILER softkey, the following screen will be displayed:
PLUS SECURITY COMPILER
EMERGENCY START Main Menu
COMPILER Menu
Compiler
date: dd/mm/yy
HELP COMPILER EXIT
On pressing the COMPILER softkey again, the following data entry panel will appear:
-- COMPILER --
- list file name
- use system library : - video access type :
11-57
List file name Description: identifies the list of files to compile and/or link in the directory "E:\PRG". Use System Library Description: indicates if you want to use system libraries or standard C libraries. Video Access Type Description: specify the video access type. If the system has an "intelligent" operator panel then LOGIC must be entered in this field, whereas if the operator panel is LCD, 10", 14" type then PHYSICAL must be entered. NOTE: Following confirmation, the compiler output will be displayed on the screen. The "objects" and "executable codes" generated will saved into directory "E:\PRG".
11-58
DSI REBOOT CONFIGURATION

This utility can only be enabled in emergency start. It is only relevant for systems with D.S.I. axes boards as it prepares the system for D.S.I. drive data configuration: it replaces the active logic with the default logic saving the replaced logic for a possible restore. It can only be enabled on the security levels 1, 2 and 3.
VARIAB. RESET TABLE EDITOR DSI REBOOT CFG
Main menu for EMERGENCY START UTILITY DSI REBOOT CONFIGURATION menu
DSI Reboot Configuration
date: dd/mm/yy
CFG DSI SETUP
DATA RESTORE
HELP EXIT
11-59
CFG DSI Setup

When pressing this softkey the following screen will appear: DSI Reboot Configuration
--- R E B O O T for D S I D R I V E S --System set for DSI drives config. :
date: dd/mm/yy
CFG DSI SETUP
DATA RESTORE
HELP EXIT
With this data entry you can preset the system for the DSI drivers data configuration or the mode for optic transmitter testing. Possible input values range from 1 to 4 and correspond to: 1. Preset the drivers stop in communication phase 2. 2. Preset the drivers stop in communication phase 3. 3. Program the optic transmitter for the continuous signal test mode 4. Program the optic transmitter for the zero bit stream test mode. If one of these choices is confirmed the active logic will be replaced by the default logic (after having been saved for an eventual restore). At the next start of the controller, the DSI drivers go into the indicated condition. Depending on the choice the CNC Software Diagnostic screen will show one of the following messages: SERVO: SD208 D.S.I. stopped at phase 2 SERVO: SD209 D.S.I. stopped at phase 3 SERVO: SD210 Continuous signal light test mode SERVO: SD211 Zero bit stream test mode After confirming you can change the selection only by pressing the DATA RESTORE softkey (see the next page).
11-60
DATA RESTORE
When pressing this softkey the following screen will appear: DSI Reboot Configuration
--- D A T A R E S T O R E --Data restore for standard reboot (Y/N)? N
date: dd/mm/yy
CFG DSI SETUP
DATA RESTORE
HELP EXIT
This data entry screen asks whether to restore the logic previously saved with the CFG DSI SETUP function. If you leave the utility after this request and reboot the system (REBOOT SYSTEM softkey), the D.S.I. drives will complete their four communication phases.
11-61
ERROR MESSAGES
The error messages of the following utilities are described below: Reset Tables, Languages, Compiler.
Reset Tables Utility

Code TB003 Message Description and Recovery Action Data Entry Allocation Error Not sufficient space for Data Entry panel allocation; contact Technical Service. TB005 Softkey Allocation Error Not sufficient space for Softkey allocation; contact Technical Service. TB006 Softkey W.A. not Initialized Not sufficient space for softkey Work Area allocation; contact Technical Service. TB007 Help Allocation Error Not sufficient space for Help allocation; contact Technical Service. TB009 Data-Entry W.A. not Initialized Not sufficient space for data entry panel Work Area allocation; contact Technical Service. TB010 FUNCTION Structure Allocation Error The FUNCTION structure cannot be allocated; contact Technical Service. TB011 DE_EDITING Structure Allocation Error The DE_EDITING structure cannot be allocated; contact Technical Service. TB012 SK ERRORS Allocation Error (cannot be visualized) Not enough space for softkey error allocation; contact Technical Service. TB013 SK LIBRARY Allocation Error (cannot be visualized) Not enough space for softkey libraries allocation; contact Technical Service. TB014 SK LIBRARY Work Area Initialization Error Not enough space for the softkey libraries Work Area allocation; contact Technical Service.
11-62
Code TB015
Message Description and Recovery Action SK ERROR Work Area Initialization Error Not enough space for the softkey errors Work Area allocation; contact Technical Service.
TB016
SK Work Area Initialization Error Error during initialization of the softkey Work Area; contact Technical Service.
TB017
SK D.E. Work Area Initialization Error Error during initialization of the data entry Work Area; contact Technical Service.
TB018
SK HELPs Work Area Initialization Error Error during initialization of the help Work Area; contact Technical Service.
TB019
Error in SK Text File Error in the softkey ASCII file; contact Technical Service.
TB020
Error in D.E. Text File Error in the data entry ASCII file; contact Technical Service.
TB021
SK Text File not Found The softkey ASCII file does not exist; contact Technical Service.
TB022
D.E. Text File not Found The data entry ASCII file does not exist; contact Technical Service.
TB023
Open File Error Error on opening the utility support flag (D:\PLU\TBL_RES).
TB025
Read File Error Error in reading the utility support flag (D:\PLU\TBL_RES).
TB026
Write File Error Error in writing the utility support flag (D:\PLU\TBL_RES).
11-63
Utility Languages
Code Message Description and Recovery Action
EC001
Error Writing File Incorrect write operation; exit.
EC002
Can't Add a New Element The biliterals table is full (maximum 150 elements).
EC003
Selected File not Found File selected cannot be found.
EC004
Insufficient Allocation Memory Not enough memory; contact Technical Service.
EC005
Cannot Open File File write protected.
EC006
Error Reading File Error in reading the file; exit.
EC007
Can't Blank Active SK A softkey cannot be redefined as all blanks.
EC008
Help Lines Must be Less Than 780 Maximum size for help is 780 lines.
EC009
Cannot be Less Than Two Letters The biliteral must be a two-letter name.
EC010
Illegal Note The comment cannot be all blanks.
EC011
The Table is Empty The DE, SK, HELP files are empty
EC012
No Space. Insert Another Floppy Disk Put in another floppy disk (in BACKUP).
EC013
Insert Next Restoring Floppy Disk Insert another floppy disk (in RESTORE).
11-64
Code EC014
Message Description and Recovery Action No Attrib for Two First Messages The first 2 items in the error list have no attribute associated.
EC015
Can't Modify Element (Exit & Save) More than one change in a session is impossible; exit and return.
EC016
Can't Delete Element More than one delete in a session is impossible; exit and return.
EC017
Duplicate Biliteral Biliteral is already present.
11-65
Code LE003
Message Description and Recovery Action Data Entry Allocation Error Not enough space for the Data Entry panel allocation; contact Technical Service.
LE005
Softkey Allocation Error Not enough space for the Softkeys allocation; contact Technical Service.
LE006
Softkey W.A. not Initialized Not enough space for the softkey Work Area allocation; contact Technical Service.
LE007
Help Allocation Error Not enough space for the Help allocation; contact Technical Service.
LE009
Data-Entry W.A. not Initialized Not enough space for the data entry Work Area; contact Technical Service.
LE010
FUNCTION Structure Allocation Error The FUNCTION structure cannot be allocated; contact Technical Service.
LE011
DE_EDITING Structure Allocation Error The DE_EDITING structure cannot be allocated; contact Technical Service.
LE012
SK ERRORS Allocation Error (cannot be visualized) Not enough space for the softkey errors allocation; contact Technical Service.
LE013
SK LIBRARY Allocation Error (cannot be visualized) Not enough space for the softkey libraries allocation; contact Technical Service.
LE014
SK LIBRARY Work Area Initialization Error Not enough space for the Work Area of the softkey libraries; contact Technical Service.
LE015
SK ERROR Work Area Initialization Error Not enough space for the errors Work Area; contact Technical Service.
LE016
SK Work Area Initialization Error Error during initialization of the softkeys Work Area; contact Technical Service.
LE017
SK D.E. Work Area Initialization Error Error during initialization of the data entry Work Area; contact Technical Service.
11-66
Code LE018
Message Description and Recovery Action SK HELPs Work Area Initialization Error Error during initialization of the help Work Area; contact Technical Service.
LE019
Error in SK Text File Error in the ASCII file of the softkeys; contact Technical Service.
LE020
Error in D.E. Text File Error in the ASCII file of the data entry; contact Technical Service.
LE021
SK Text File not Found The softkeys' ASCII file does not exist; contact Technical Service.
LE022
D.E. Text File not Found The data entry ASCII file does not exist; contact Technical Service.
LE024
Language Activation Error Error during the activation of the language. Cancel the directory of the selected language (DELETE softkey), reset TXT by restoring one of the languages in TXT with the ACTIVATE softkey.
LE025
Warning: Delete Active Language! Try to delete the activated language.
LE026
Language Creation Error Error during the creation of a user environment under the directory "E:\ttx"; there may already be an environment with the same name.
LE027
Language Directory not Deleted The cancellation failed.
LE028
Compare Languages Failed The comparison phase between the texts of a language option and the original user versions did not terminate correctly, probably due to corruption of the original version.
LEO29
Update Language Failed The updating of the original user version could not be performed because of lack of space on disk E:
LE030
At most 5 languages under E:\TTX There cannot be more than 5 user environments under the "E:\ttx" directory.
11-67
Code LE031
Message Description and Recovery Action Warning: Delete Modified Language! You try to cancel a language modified by the user.
LE032
Warning: Delete Running Language! You try to cancel the current system language!
LE033
Open File Error Error during opening of a file.
LE035
Read File Error Error during reading of a file.
LE036
Write File Error Error during writing of a file.
LE037
Memory Allocation on Spawn Error Modify package cannot be activated due to lack of memory space; contact Technical Service.
LE038
Not Enough Space for New Language If during the creation of a new user environment there is not enough space on the working disk E:, the directory for the environment is not created. Check the free space on that disk. Verify how much space is available on the above disk.
LE039
Error Reading Utility Configuration File Error while reading the biliterals of text files from EDC_CONF.CNF.
LE040
Differences File not Found The **_DIFF.LST file you want to display does not exist.
LE041
No Space to Explode Compressed Directory Lack of space for exploding a compressed language directory. Check the free space on disks F: and E:
LE042
No Compare Different Languages You cannot compare texts written in different languages.
LE043
Warning: Update Active Language! You try to update the currently active language!
11-68
Code LE044
Message Description and Recovery Action Warning: Update Modified Language! You try to update a language modified by the user!
LE045
Warning: Update Running Language! You try to update the current system language!
11-69
Utility Compiler
Code CM001 Message Description and Recovery Action Library w.a. allocation error Error in allocation of the library work area; contact Technical Service. CM002 Library w.a. not initialized Error in initialization of the library work area; contact Technical Service. CM003 Softkey w.a. allocation error Error in allocation of the softkey management work area; contact Technical Service. CM004 Softkey w.a. not initialized Error in initialization of the work area used for softkey management; contact Technical Service. CM005 FUNCTION structure allocation error Error in allocation of the work area used by the library; contact Technical Service. CM006 Data entry w.a. allocation error Error in allocation of the work area used for data entry management; contact Technical Service. CM007 Data entry w.a. not initialized Error in initialization of the work area used for data entry management; contact Technical Service. CM008 Error w.a. allocation error Error in allocation of the work area used for error management; contact Technical Service. CM009 Error w.a. not initialized Error in initialization of the work area used for error management; contact Technical Service. CM010 Help w.a. allocation error Error in allocation of the work area used for help management; contact Technical Service. CM011 Help w.a. not initialized Error in initialization of the work area used for help management; contact Technical Service.
11-70
Code CM012
Message Description and Recovery Action Open file error or file not found Verify if file is present; if it exists, delete it and write it again.
CM013
Wrong video access Verify if the configuration is correct; for access type, the strings permitted are "LOGIC" or "PHYSICAL".
11-71
Utility DSI Reboot Configuration

Code RB023 Message description and recovery action Open file error Error while opening a logic file RB025 Read file error Error while opening a logic file RB026 Write file error Error while saving or restoring a logic file RB027 Fatal error Each CFG DSI SETUP or DATA RESTORE request can only be carried out once in order to avoid overwriting (and hence losing) the original logic file.
END OF CHAPTER
11-72
Appendix
AMP - ERROR MESSAGES
This chapter describes the error messages that can be displayed on the screen during AMP operation. Moreover, for each of them a possible recovery action has given.
MESSAGE DESCRIPTION AND RECOVERY ACTION
Code AM001
Message description and recovery action Obligatory field It is mandatory to fill the range Value out of range The value is outside the allowed range Data Entry allocation error Internal software anomaly. Try to reinstall the release and contact your technical support. Sofkey allocation error Internal software anomaly. Try to reinstall the release and contact your technical support. Softkey W.A. not initialized Internal software anomaly. Try to reinstall the release and contact your technical support. Help allocation error Internal software anomaly. Try to reinstall the release and contact your technical support. Data Entry W.A. not initialized Internal software anomaly. Try to reinstall the release and contact your technical support. Function structure allocation error Internal software anomaly. Try to reinstall the release and contact your technical support.
AM002
AM003
AM005
AM006
AM007
AM009
AM010
A-1
Appendix A AMP - Error Messages
Code AM011
Message description and recovery action De editing structure allocation error Internal software anomaly. Try to reinstall the release and contact your technical support. HW information W. A. allocation error Internal software anomaly. Try to reinstall the release and contact your technical support. General info W.A. allocation error Internal software anomaly. Try to reinstall the release and contact your technical support. Optional info W.A. allocation error Internal software anomaly. Try to reinstall the release and contact your technical support. Process config W.A. allocation Internal software anomaly. Try to reinstall the release and contact your technical support. Interface info W. A. allocation error Internal software anomaly. Try to reinstall the release and contact your technical support. Axes config W. A. allocation error Internal software anomaly. Try to reinstall the release and contact your technical support. PLUS variables allocation error The memory dedicated to AMP configuration is exhausted. Reduce the number of one of the following configured items: - E parameters - Calibration and/or compensation points - PLUS variables - OEM data entries - USER variables and/or elements - M codes
AM012
AM013
AM014
AM015
AM016
AM017
AM018
AM019
E parameters W. A. allocation error The memory dedicated to AMP configuration is exhausted. Reduce the number of one of the following configured items: - E parameters - Calibration and/or compensation points - PLUS variables - OEM data entries - USER variables and/or elements - M codes
A-2
Code AM020
Message description and recovery action M codes W.A allocation error The memory dedicated to AMP configuration is exhausted. Reduce the number of one of the following configured items: - E parameters - Calibration points - PLUS variables - OEM data entries - USER variables - M codes
AM021
User variables W. A. allocation error The memory dedicated to AMP configuration is exhausted. Reduce the number of one of the following configured items: - E parameters - Calibration and/or compensation points - PLUS variables - OEM data entries - USER variables and/or elements - M codes
AM022
OEM softkey allocation error The memory dedicated to AMP configuration is exhausted. Reduce the number of one of the following configured items: - E parameters - Calibration and/or compensation points - PLUS variables - OEM data entries - USER variables and/or elements - M codes
AM023
Calibration points allocation error The memory dedicated to AMP configuration is exhausted. Reduce the number of one of the following configured items: - E parameters - Calibration and/or compensation points - PLUS variables - OEM data entries - USER variables and/or elements - M codes
AM024
Wrong configuration measuring unit It is generated when the measuring unit configured in the "General Information" data entry does not correspond neither to "MM" nor to INCHES. Type the requested measuring unit again choosing it from the above mentioned measuring units.
A-3
Code AM025
Message description and recovery action Wrong PLUS variable name The error is generated in the following cases: 1. The name of a PLUS variable begins with a character that is not @. 2. The name is made up by characters that are not included in the capital letter alphanumericals or in those different from "_". 3. One or more variables have the same name. Re-insert the variable's name Wrong number of PLUS boolean (max 128) The number of Booleans variables is greater than 128 (declared in "General Info" data entry. Wrong number of PLUS integer (max 128) The number of Short variables is greater than 128 (declared in "General Info" data entry. Wrong number of PLUS real (max 64) The number of double variables is greater than 64 (declared in "General Info" data entry. Wrong process type It is generated when a process type configured in the data entry "Process characterization" is different from "MILL", "LATHE" or "GRIND". Check the process type. Wrong probing cycles The string that defines enabling or disabling of probing cycles in the data entry "Proc Char" is not written correctly. Type the string again choosing between "ENABLE" and "DISABLE". Wrong homing cycle type The string that defines the homing cycle type in the "Proc Char" data entry is not written correctly. Type again the string choosing between "MANUAL" or "AUTOMATIC". Unallowed process It is generated when the selected process has not been previously activated. Exit by pressing the [Esc] key of the "Select Process" data entry select the "General Info" data entry and activate the requested process (for multi-process only). Number of processes = 0: not available The error is generated when none of the 4 process is activated. Configure at least one process in the "General Info" data entry.
AM027
AM028
AM029
AM030
AM031
AM032
AM033
AM034
A-4
Code AM035
Message description and recovery action Wrong process Identifier The process configured does not exist or the system is monoprocess. Wrong process variable (DLA) The string that defines the initialization value of the DLA variable is not written correctly. Type the string again: the only values accepted are "DISABLE" or "ENABLE". Too many processes for this hardware type There are too many processes for this hardware type. Wrong process variable (VFF) It is generated when the string that defines the initialization value of the VFF variable is not typed correctly. Type the string again: the only values accepted are "ENABLE" or "DISABLE". Wrong user variable The error is generated when: 1. The name of a "user" variable begins with a character different from "!". 2. The name includes characters that are not capital letter alphanumericals and that are different from "_". 3. The variable type is not specified or it is different from ".CH" or ":LR". 4. There are 2 or more variables of the same type with the same name. Re-insert the variable's name. Wrong user variables selection The selected variable does not exist. Wrong user variable name The selected variable does not exist. Wrong user variable assignment It is generated when the initialization value of a user variable character type, is not included in double quotes. Type the above value again in double quotes. Wrong user variable element number The USER variable element number must be >0. Wrong M code name It is generated when there are various "M" functions with the same number. Delete all duplications of M codes. Wrong activation mode The string that defines the activation mode of a "M" function is not typed correctly. Choose the activation mode between "PRELUDE", "POSTLUDE" and "EXPEDITE".
AM036
AM037
AM038
AM039
AM040
AM041
AM042
AM043
AM044
AM045
A-5
Code AM046
Message description and recovery action Wrong G code value The selected G code does not exist. Wrong axis name It is generated when the name of a determined axis is not allowed for that type of axis. Type again the axis name according to following ranges: COORDINATE D AXES: X, Y, Z, A, B, C, U, W, V, P, Q, D AUXILIARY AXES: same characters but small letters VIRTUAL AXES: same characters allowed for co-ordinates
AM047
AM048
Wrong axis type It is generated when the string defines the axis type, co-ordinate or auxiliary is not typed correctly. Type the axis type again choosing between "LINEAR" or "ROTARY". Wrong direction count It is generated when the string that defines the count direction is not written correctly. Type the string again; the only values allowed are "POSITIVE" or "NEGATIVE". Max manual speed <= Rapid traverse <= Maximum feed It is generated when the value associated to the "Rapid traverse feed" parameter, is greater than the value configured in the "maximum feed" parameter or when the value is minor than the value configured in the "manual feed" parameter. Work acceleration <= Rapid acceleration It is generated when an axis, auxiliary or co-ordinated, with a work acceleration higher than rapid acceleration is configured. Re-insert the value in the allowed range. LW SW Overtravel <= UP SW overtravel It is generated when the value of the lower operating limit is higher than the higher operating limit in the characterization of an axis. Re-insert one of the above values in such a way that the condition be respected. Wrong skew name It is generated when the name of the master axis associated with a "split" axis is "S". Re-insert the name of the axis by choosing a character from the range allowed for co-ordinated axes. Wrong marker detection The string that defines the "detection marker" type is not written correctly. Reinsert the string: the only values allowed are "EDGE" and "LEVEL". The first gear speed must be <> 0 It is generated when the speed value associated to gear 1 of the spindle is = to 0. Configure the speed value associated to the first range.
AM049
AM050
AM051
AM052
AM053
AM054
AM055
A-6
Code AM056
Message description and recovery action Invalid board number It is generated when an axis is associated to a board whose presence has not been previously configured. Select the "Hardware" data entry, configure the necessary boards, proceed with assigning the axes to the various boards utilizing the data entries "SELECT AXIS" and "Physical Connection". Wrong path name: last character must be \ This error is displayed when either the source or the destination path don't end with the "\"char. This assure that the path identify a directory name and not a single file name. Wrong master axis for CSS It is generated when the master axis name associated to the spindle corresponds to "S". Re-insert the master axis name: allowed values are the following: X, Y, Z, A, B, C, D , P, A, U, V, W. (Pseudo num. + co-ordinate num.) must be <=12 It is generated when the total number of co-ordinated and pseudo configured axis for a certain process, is higher than 12. Decrease the number of coordinated or pseudo configured axis. Co-ordinate name = pseudo name It is generated when a certain axes has been declared both as co-ordinate and pseudo. Change the axis name. Invalid co-ordinate number It is generated when the number of co-ordinate axes configured for a certain process is < 2. At least two axes must be configurated in the "Axis Gen Info" data entry. Wrong home position direction The string that defines the direction homing is not written correctly. Type the string again: the only values allowed are "POSITIVE" and "NEGATIVE". Wrong axis displayed format It is generated when the value corresponding to the display format of the axis positions are out of range. Re-insert this value: the only values allowed are 0.0; 3.7; 4.6; 5.5. Wrong tool offset number It is generated when the number of tool offset configured in the "Axis Gen Info" data entry is higher by 2. Delete all exceeding tool offsets. In position window must be less or equal to in position wait It is generated when the position window value of either a co-ordinate or auxiliary axis (during characterization) is higher than position wait. Insert again the two value in the correct range.
AM057
AM058
AM059
AM060
AM061
AM062
AM063
AM064
AM065
A-7
Code AM066
Message description and recovery action Wrong data entry code It is generated when we try to select an OEM data entry without previously configuring an OEM softkey. Select the "OEM DK CONFIG" data entry, configure a softkey with a having a function code between 1200 and 1399, select the corresponding function code in the "DE CONFIG" data entry. Wrong process loop It is generated when all the identifiers of process screens actually configured are not present in the configuration of process screen display sequence or when there are duplications. Define the complete screen sequence avoiding duplications. Additional screens must be configured only on the first four processes The additional screens divided into 4 quadrants can be configured only for the first 4 processes. Wrong OEM menu selection It is generated when the number corresponding to the menu selected in the "SELECT MENU" data entry is higher than the total number of OEM menus configured. Select the "HI GEN INFO" data entry, increase the total number of menus up to the requested value, repeat the menu selection through the "SELECT MENU" data entry. Wrong elementary screen type It is generated when the string defining one or more additional screen displays is not written correctly. Type the string where the cursor is positioned when the error is displayed. Wrong softkey type It is generated when the string that defines an OEM softkey type is not written correctly. Type the string again; allowed values are: NORMAL, MAINTAINED, ON_OFF, MENU, DATA_ENTRY. Wrong help number: the value must be 00..99 It is generated when the HELP file code associated to the "OEM softkey" is outside of the allowed range (both Mxx* and Pxx*) Data entry code already exists It is generated when the same "function code" corresponding to a data entry (range 1200-1399) is associated to 2 different OEM softkeys belonging to the same menu). Delete the duplication between data entry codes belonging to the same menu. Wrong submenu code It is generated when the no. of submenu associated to an OEM softkey is higher than the total no. of configured menus or when we associate a submenu to a softkey having the same function code corresponding to a data entry. Maintain the function code of the given softkey in the range relative to the "change menu" type and configure the no. of the associated menus included in the total no. of present menus.
AM067
AM068
AM069
AM070
AM071
AM072
AM073
AM074
A-8
Code AM075
Message description and recovery action Wrong parent menu number It is generated when the no. corresponding to the configured parent is higher than the total no. of present menu. Chose a configured menu as parent number. Wrong help code: last character must be * In the "OEM Softkey" HELP files the asterisk character has been omitted (Mxx* and Pxx*). Wrong field display format It is generated when the display format of a certain OEM data entry is different from those allowed. Insert the above format again choosing among: "DECIMAL", "INTEGER", or "ALPHANM". Wrong field entry It is generated when the string that defines whether the configuration menu of a certain field of an OEM data entry is mandatory, is not written correctly. Insert the above string again; the only values allowed are "OPTIONAL", or "MANDATORY". Wrong integer notation It is generated when the data that must be inserted in a data entry has been defined as INTEGER type whilst its default or min. or max. value are not written as integer values. Wrong help code: the first character must be M In the "OEM Softkey" HELP files the M character has been omitted. Wrong help code: the first character must be P In the "OEM Softkey" HELP files the P character has been omitted. Wrong field length It is generated when there is an inconsistency between the following configurations: OEM data entry field length and type of data that it must contain. Re-insert the value following: INTEGER DECIMAL ---> LENGTH 1-6 ---> LENGTH 1-12
AM076
AM077
AM078
AM079
AM080
AM081
AM082
ALPHANUM ---> LENGTH 1-20 AM083 The request directory is empty It is not possible to associate a comment to a empty AMP directory Wrong program extension It is generated when the extension of the programs configured in the OEM UTILITY data entry is different from ".BAT", ":COM", ".EXE". Re- insert the name of the program with one of the above extensions.
AM085
A-9
Code AM086
Message description and recovery action Open AMP file error It is generated when an anomaly occurs during the opening phase of a data base file. Run AMP again; if the message is displayed again, delete the AMP directory presently selected and regenerate the default configuration. Lseek error It is generated when a positioning error to the files occurs during the reading or writing phase. Run AMP again; if the error persists, delete the selected AMP directory and regenerate the default configuration. Read AMP file error It is generated when a reading operation in one of the AMP data base files is not successful. If the error is repeated again after several attempts, delete the present AMP configuration and regenerate the default configuration. Write AMP file error It is generated when a writing operation in one of the AMP data base files is not successful. If the error is repeated several times, delete the current AMP configuration and regenerate the default configuration. Insufficient memory The memory dedicated to AMP configuration is exhausted. Reduce the number of one of the following configured items: E parameters Calibration and/or compensation points PLUS variables OEM data entries USER variables and/or elements M codes
AM087
AM088
AM089
AM090
AM091
Error In Softkey key Configuration The error occurs when the new soft key file generated by AMP for the configuration of OEM menus has a format that is inconsistent with the format interpreted by the routine that has to convert it from ASCII to binary format. Verify if data in the "OEM SK CONFIG" data entry is correct. Error In Data Entry Configuration It occurs when the new data entry file generated by AMP for the configuration of OEM menus has a format that cannot be interpreted by the routine utilized for the conversion of the above file from ASCII to binary. Verify if data in the "SELECT DE" and "DE CONFIG" data entry is correct. Softkey file not found It is generated when an error occurs at the opening of the soft key file D:\TXT\HI_SKEY1.TXT or when this file is not present. Verify the file's presence.
AM092
AM093
A-10
Code AM094
Message description and recovery action Data Entry file not found It is generated when there is an error at the opening of the data entry file D:\TXT\HI_DATAE.TXT or when the above file is not present.. Verify the file's presence. Environment variable not found Internal software anomaly. Try to reinstall the release and contact your technical support. Axes have different servo clocks It is generated when the axes associated to a data board, both co-ordinate or auxiliary, have different interpolation clocks. Insert the same interpolator clock of the axes associated to the same board in the following data entries: "AUX GEN INFO" and "COORD GEN. INFO".
AM095
AM096
AM097
Master name not present in slave characterization It is generated in the "calculation" phase of the new configurated parameters when the defined slave axes have not been characterized and associated to a master axis or to a spindle axis. Verify which axis has been defined as slave and proceed with its characterization. Too many axes declared on the same board It is generated when the no. of axis associated to a data board is higher than the maximum number of allowed axes for that board. Associate part of the configured axis to an alternative board or the total no. of configured axis, operating inside the "SELECT AXIS" and "PHYSICAL CONNECT" axis. Less than 3 axes with either G18 or G19 It is generated during the "Calculation" phase of the configuration parameters when the configurater axes are only 2 and the interpolation plane is defined with G18 or G19. Modify the interpolation plane by configuring it as G17 or increase the no. of co-ordinate axes defined in the "AXIS GENERAL INFORMATION" data entry. Max value must be > = min value It is generated when in the OEM data entry configuration, the max value that can be assigned to a field is lower than the value defined as min. Re-insert the abovevalues in the correct range. Default value must be included between min and max value It is generated in the configuration of an OEM data entry, the default value assigned to a field is not included between the min and max values that can be assigned to that field. Re-insert the above value. New directory configuration error It is generated when a general error occurs during the selection phase of a new AMP directory through the "SET DIRECTORY" data entry. Delete the above AMP directory and proceed with its configuration.
AM098
AM099
AM104
AM105
AM106
A-11
Code AM107
Message description and recovery action Child process not found It is generated when a spawn function tries to execute a not existent child process. Activated AMP will be lost: Press Enter to confirm, Esc to abort It is a WARNING message. It asks the confirmation of command. Configuration data incongruent with current release The machine configuration data are incompatible with the current AMP release which is older than the data release. The number of calibration points must be 0 or greater than 1. You cannot declare one single calibration point. A split axis has converter while the other one does not It is displayed when in a couple of split axes, the master axis is associated to a converter while the slave axis is not, or vice versa. Both split axes must or must not have a converter: this is obtained by operating in the SELECT AXIS and PHYSICAL CONNECTION data entries. A split axis has transducer while the other one does not It is displayed when in a couple of split axes, the master axis is associated to a transducer while the slave axis is not, or vice versa. Both split axes must or must not have a transducer: this is obtained by operating in the SELECT AXIS and PHYSICAL CONNECTION data entries. Split axes have different type It is generated when in a couple of split axes, the master and slave axes are not of the same type. Verify inside the characterization of both slave and master axes that the field "AXIS TYPE", "DIAMETRAL", "ROLLOVER" are configured in the same way. Master axis has more than one slave It is generated when one master slave has several associated slave axes. Verify that each SPLIT axis has a different master axis associated by selecting all configured axes. More than one axis with the same identifier It is generated when the same identifier is associated to more than one axis. Verify the congruency of the various identifiers in the following data entries: AUX GEN INFO and COORD GEN INFO. Too many converters or transducers configured for this axes board type It is displayed when a board OS 8020/5 or OS 8020/7, is associated to a transducer or converter higher than 3. Re-insert the value of the converter or transducer in the range adequate to the type of configured axes board. More than one SK with the same code It is displayed when more OEM SK have the same function code..
AM109
AM110
AM112
AM113
AM114
AM115
AM116
AM117
AM118
AM119
A-12
Code AM120
Message description and recovery action Illegal request for display of modal function It is displayed when the activation mode has been defined EXPEDITE and the display of modal function has been required. Set activation mode to PRELUDE or POSTLUDE to have display of modal function. Illegal request for display after reset It is displayed when the activation mode has been defined EXPEDITE and the display after reset has been required. Set activation mode to PRELUDE or POSTLUDE to have display after reset function. Illegal request for blk-blk conditional It is displayed when the activation mode has been defined EXPEDITE or PRELUDE and the forced conditional blk-blk has been required. Set activation mode to POSTLUDE to have forced conditional blk-blk function. Illegal request for forced blk-blk It is displayed when the activation mode has been defined EXPEDITE or PRELUDE and the forced conditional blk-blk has been required. Set activation mode to POSTLUDE to have forced conditional blk-blk. Illegal request for stop block calculation It is displayed when the activation mode been defined EXPEDITE or PRELUDE and the stop block calculation has been required. Set activation mode to POSTLUDE to have stop block calculation. Illegal request for tool offset change It is displayed when the activation mode has been defined EXPEDITE or PRELUDE and the tool offset change has been required. Set activation mode to POSTLUDE to have tool offset change. Illegal request for reset after execution It is displayed when the activation mode has been defined EXPEDITE or PRELUDE and the reset after execution has been required. Set activation mode to POSTLUDE to have reset after execution. Logical Slave allocation error It is displayed when the allocation of auxiliary slaves fails. Check on available memory. Wrong Slave name It is displayed when the slave name syntax isn't correct. Write slave name with the defined syntax rules (see help for slave names). Wrong master name It is displayed when the master name isn't correct. Master name must be one of defined co-ordinate.
AM121
AM122
AM123
AM124
AM125
AM126
AM127
AM128
AM129
A-13
Code AM130
Message description and recovery action Master and slave axis on different board It is displayed when the slave axis board is different form the board of related master. Master and slave (if any) must be on the same board. More than one axis with same board connection It is displayed when the physical connections (converter/transducer) aren't univocally defined. Physical connections must be univocal for each axis. Function disabled by the current level It is displayed when the function request isn't enabled for the selected level of security. Select a lower level of security. Security violation: turn the system off It is displayed when the hardware product key isn't correct. Contact your technical support. OEM Softkey Menus must be configured selecting process n.1 It is displayed when the current process isn't the n. 1 and the some OEM SK menus have been configured. Master/slave voltages may differ for sign only It is displayed when the voltage of rapid traverse values are different for master and slave axes. Master and slave axes must have the same voltage, except the sign. Wrong processes sequence It is displayed when the processes required in the data entry "General Info" aren't sequential. Wrong position for COORD calibration points Displayed when the same value is assigned to several calibration points. Marker Offset must be < +Electrical Pitch It is displayed when the marker offset value for a slave axis is greater than the electrical pitch of related master. The maximum bound for the marker offset value must be less the electrical pitch. Marker Offset must be > -Electrical Pitch It is display when the marker offset value for a slave axis, tared negative, is greater, as an absolute value, than the electrical pitch value of the related master. Wrong position for AUX calibration points Displayed when the same value is assigned to several calibration points. No axes board configured Not declared board.
AM131
AM132
AM133
AM134
AM135
AM136
AM137
AM138
AM139
AM140
AM141
A-14
Code AM142
Message description and recovery action Wrong axes board sequence Axes boards declaration is not sequential. It is necessary to declare the same always from first position (axes board 0 code number) Wrong Process Variable (DSB) Error in "Block Delete" parameter configuration Wrong Process Variable (Optional Stop) Error in "Optional Stop" parameter configuration Wrong Process Variable (Rapid Override Control) Error in "Rapid Override Control" parameter configuration Wrong Process Variable (Program Scroll) Error in "Program Scrol" parameter configuration Wrong I/O board code number The installed I/O board is different from that declared in "I/O board code number" data entry. Wrong axes board code number The installed axes board is different from that declared in "Axes board code number" data entry. Interpolator clock must be a multiple of the system clock Check that the interpolator clock values for co-ordinated axes and auxiliary axes are multiple of system clock. Interpolator clock must be a multiple of servo loop clock Check that the interpolator clock is multiple of the "Position Loop Clock" of the axes board containing axes managed from that interpolator. Axis declared on a not existing board. It is generated when one axis is associated to an axis board not configured. Configure the "Hardware" data entry appropriately. No AMP directory specified Verify that source directory specified in BACKUP command is an AMP directory. Error in path name The requested device is wrong or it does not exist. Directory is already empty The directory you are attempting to delete is already empty
AM143
AM144
AM145
AM146
AM147
AM148
AM149
AM150
AM151
AM152
AM153
AM154
A-15
Code AM155
Message description and recovery action AMP directory cannot be activated: binary files do not exist The activated configuration is not associated to a corresponding system configuration. Configure AMP appropriately. Process memory overflow Process memory is insufficient. The process configuration requests too much memory: reduce the number of parameters or of USER VARIABLES. Error in Dos Real-time configuration The structure necessary in the Dos Real-Time partition is not configured appropriately. Position loop clocks have been changed: check HARDWARE data entry Starting from Rel. 3.0, the "Position Loop Clock" parameter is not any more in "Hardware Configuration" data entry. If a configuration created with a previous software release is used, this parameter is forced to a default value. Control that this default value is the right one. Error in End User Dos configuration The structure necessary in the End User Dos partition is not configured appropriately. Error in file closing The available memory on hard disk, is not sufficient. Inexisting path name The selected path name does not exist. Protected device The selected device is protected. Inexisting device The selected device is not available. Device not ready or floppy not inserted The selected device is not ready or the floppy disk has not been inserted. Disk hardware error Error on hard disk. Insufficient disk space Insufficient space on hard disk
AM156
AM157
AM158
AM159
AM160
AM161
AM162
AM163
AM164
AM165
AM166
A-16
Code AM167
Message description and recovery action Wrong tool direction axis name Configuring a virtual axis a wrong axis name or a name already used has been inserted by a co-ordinated axis on the same process. Error in virtual axes order declaration Configuration axes must be done in sequential way always beginning from the first axis. Virtual axis id duplicated in different process The axis identifier has been used in other processes. Virtual axis id equal to a co-ordinating axis id The axis identifier has been used to configure co-ordinated axes. Inexisting calibration points user file Calibration points from file, not found. Format error in calibration points user file Calibration points format is not correct. Calibration points in user file are less than required The calibration points in user file are less than those declared in AMP. Calibration points in user file are in excess The calibration points in user file are more than those declared in AMP. Feed value is too high for requested servo loop tick. The configured feed value is too high for the requested servo loop tick. End User Dos configuration file not found or error in copy Check that the option has been correctly installed. It is not possible to enable both Dos Real-time and End User Dos It is not possible to enable simultaneously Dos Real-time and End User Dos. Incongruence between axis type and physical connection declaration A digital axis (whether D.S.I. or OS-Wire) has been associated with the wrong type of board (or vice versa); or an analog spindle has been declared on a board without analog converters. D.S.I. info W.A. allocation error Out of AMP configuration memory space, reduce the: E parameters correction and/or calibration points PLUS variables OEM data entry USER variables and/or elements M codes
AM168
AM169
AM170
AM171
AM172
AM173
AM174
AM175
AM176
AM177
AM178
AM179
A-17
Code AM180
Message description and recovery action Input value not admitted for this data-entry field The portable console cannot be declared on serial line 1. Electrical/mechanical pitches ratio overflow Overflow when calculating some fundamental parameters: try to reduce the ratio between electrical step and mechanical step.
AM181
AM182
Backlash overflow: time too big The BACKLSH field of an axis contains a value that is too high to be converted in internal measure units. Verify the portion of the field related to the application time of the backlash and try to reduce it. Insufficient free space on drive E When you select an AMP the system makes sure there is a free space of at least 5 Mbytes on drive E: (space reserved to the creation of temporary files); if there is not enough space, this error message is displayed.
AM183
AM185
D.S.I. axis can't have transducer and/or converter A D.S.I. axis cannot be declared with transducer and/or converter. Only one not D.S.I. spindle can be configured on a 8026/2 board For this type board, only one non D.S.I. type spindle can be declared. Calibration values will cause overflow in calculation Reduce the distance between the calibration points as this generates excessively high tangent values. Too many boards for this machine type Too many axis boards declared for this hardware; reduce the number of boards declared. Too many spindles have been configured Too many spindles have been configured. The maximum is four. Shared spindle not configured A spindle declared as shared has a wrong ID. Alternative interpolation plane not valid The alternative interpolation plane has not been defined correctly. Check which axis names have been entered into the relative field.
AM186
AM187
AM188
AM192
AM193
AM194
A-18
AM195
In position band field too small (< 1 digit) When converted into the internal unit of measure, the value entered in the in Position band field turns out to be smaller than the minimum value of transducer resolution, i.e., the value has been rounded off to zero. Enter a higher value. Axes boards not recognized! During the creation of a default AMP, the system was unable to recognise the axis board and therefore the value of 11 was set as default code.
AM196
A-19
END OF APPENDIX
A-20
Appendix
GENERATION OF HELP FILES FOR OEM SOFTKEYS
HELP file - menu association

It is possible to associate a HELP file to each OEM menu and data entry configured in AMP by utilizing the following procedure: 1. Configure (AMP) in the SELECT MENU and/or SELECT DE data entries a help code with the following syntax: Mxx* in case of a softkey menu Pxx* in case of a data entry menu where xx is represented by a code that identifies only a help text 2. Create the E:\TXT directory if it doesnt exist. After edit the file OM_HELPn.TXT (n=AMP number 0 .. 3) in the E:\TXT directory and insert the various help texts adopting the following syntax: the beginning of each single text is identified by one of the above codes which must be preceeded by "!!!" (ex. !!!M01*) each text line cannot have more than 40 characters help codes cannot be duplicated helps associated with the menus (Mxx*) are displayed in a 20 line page while those associated with data entries (Pxx*) are displayed in a 10 line page
B-1
Appendix B Generation of Help Files for Oem Softkeys
For example: !!!M01* TOP MENU
top Menu
page 1 of 5
This utility allows to set up all the configurable parameters of the control. To exit from AMP, hit the EXIT softkey. Two kinds of HELP are supported: Menu level: it explains the meaning of each softkey. Parameter level: it explains the meaning, the functionality and the range of each parameter. To remove the help, hit the HELP softkey again. Use Page Up, Page Dn keys to access the following Help pages.
3. the presence of the help file for OEM softkeys is checked when AMP is exited. If the file is present then the help is integrated with the system help. The user may delete the OM_HELPn.txt file to restore the original system help (without the OEM help).
END OF APPENDIX
B-2
Appendix
AXIS CALIBRATION FROM FILE
GENERAL
It is possible to insert calibration points from a file or from an AMP data entry, depending on the answer to the data entry "Calibration Point from File (Y/N)". A separate file is required for each axis. Files containing calibration points must be placed in the directory: E:\OEM\AMPn, where "n" corresponds to 0, 1, 2 or 3 associated with the required AMP configuration. It is possible to have different configuration files associated with each of the four possible AMP configurations or to copy the same file to each of the directories so that the same calibration is used. The file must have the name CLB_FILE.yy where "yy" represents the ID of the axis whose calibration points are defined in the file. I.e. points to be applied to the axis having ID 14 will be contained in the file CLB_FILE.14, while points associated with the axis having the ID 02 will be contained in file CLB_FILE.2.
C-1
Appendix C Axis Calibration from File
File Format
The file format is ASCII text. Each record consists of a pair of real number: the first number is the position, the second the associated error as specified for the AMP data entry. The following is an example of a calibration file: 0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 0.0 0.001 0.004 0.004 0.003 0.007 0.009 0.01
When an AMP configuration is selected, the system checks, for each axis, if calibration points are requested and if they are in a file. When AMP takes data from user file, it performs a syntactic check on the file, indicating possible errors. It checks that the number of points present in the file (position-error number pairs) is equal to the number of points requested by the data entry; in the case of mismatch an error message is displayed.
C-2
Error conditions and messages

During the acquisition of points from the file the following messages may appear: AM171 AM172 AM173 AM174 Calibration points user file not found Format error in calibration points user file Fewer calibration points in user file than defined More calibration points in user file than defined
If the file does not exist or it contains format errors, points remain uncharged (0 if points were not previously defined). If in the file there are more points than requested, the extra points are ignored. If in the file there are fewer points than requested, the remaining points are filled with zeroes. The points that have been entered may be examined and modified using the data entry. Calibration points from the file are translated only if, when leaving AMP, "Y" is answered to the request "Translate new parameters (Y/N)". If the calibration points file does not exist, on leaving AMP "N" will be automatically forced in "Calibration points from file (Y/N)?" record, and error AM171 will be displayed.
C-3
END OF APPENDIX
C-4

AMP Characterization Manual

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Исходное описание:

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

AMP Characterization Manual

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

10 Series CNC AMP

Software Characterization Manual

Code: 45006667V Rev. 18

PUBLICATION ISSUED BY:

IMPORTANT USER INFORMATION

UPDATING 10 Series CNC - AMP Software Characterization Manual

UPDATES FOR THE PRESENT RELEASE General

10 Series CNC - AMP Software Characterization Manual

Preface 10 Series CNC - AMP Software Characterization Manual

10 Series CNC - AMP Software Characterization Manual

Preface 10 Series CNC - AMP Software Characterization Manual

10 Series CNC - AMP Software Characterization Manual

Preface 10 Series CNC - AMP Software Characterization Manual

10 Series CNC - AMP Software Characterization Manual

Preface 10 Series CNC - AMP Software Characterization Manual

10 Series CNC - AMP Software Characterization Manual

Index 10 Series - AMP CNC Software Characterization Manual

GENERAL CONCEPTS ................................................................... 1-1

10 Series CNC - AMP Software Characterization Manual

Index 10 Series CNC - AMP Software Characterization Manual

GLOBAL PARAMETERS CONFIGURATION ..................................3-1

PROCESS CONFIGURATION .........................................................4-1

10 Series CNC - AMP Software Characterization Manual

Index 10 Series CNC - AMP Software Characterization Manual

AXIS CONFIGURATION.................................................................. 5-1

HUMAN INTERFACE CONFIGURATION ....................................... 6-1

THE SERVO MONITOR .................................................................. 7-1

10 Series CNC - AMP Software Characterization Manual

Index 10 Series CNC - AMP Software Characterization Manual

DSI SERVICE CHANNEL.................................................................8-1

MECHATROLINK DIGITAL DRIVES CONFIGURATION UTILITY ..9-1

10 Series CNC - AMP Software Characterization Manual

Index 10 Series CNC - AMP Software Characterization Manual

D.S.I. SPINDLE DRIVE SETUP..................................................... 10-1

EMERGENCY DIAGNOSTIC ........................................................ 11-1

10 Series CNC - AMP Software Characterization Manual

Index 10 Series CNC - AMP Software Characterization Manual

AMP - ERROR MESSAGES ........................................................... A-1

GENERATION OF HELP FILES FOR OEM SOFTKEYS ................ B-1

AXIS CALIBRATION FROM FILE ................................................... C-1

10 Series CNC - AMP Software Characterization Manual

10 Series CNC - AMP Software Characterization Manual

Chapter 1 General Concepts

FLOPPY DISK UNIT

10 Series CNC - AMP Software Characterization Manual

Chapter 1 General Concepts

CLASSIFICATION OF THE MACHINE AXES

10 Series CNC - AMP Software Characterization Manual

Chapter 1 General Concepts

servo loop gain

Vm*60 Pm 8192 * * * (Kv * 16.66666666...) Fm Pe 10

10 Series CNC - AMP Software Characterization Manual

Chapter 1 General Concepts

in position window in position time-out

10 Series CNC - AMP Software Characterization Manual

Chapter 1 General Concepts

operating limitend of travel overtravel -

overtravel+ end of travel+ operating limit+ zero microswitch

10 Series CNC - AMP Software Characterization Manual

Chapter 1 General Concepts

I/O RING MODULE

10 Series CNC - AMP Software Characterization Manual

Chapter 1 General Concepts

Vm60 Pm 8192 * * (Kv * 16.66666666...) Fm Pe 10